Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape

Library

User's Guide
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.

Copyright © 2017 Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.

Dell, EMC, and other trademarks are trademarks of Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries. Other trademarks may
be trademarks of their respective owners.

Printed December 2017

iii
iv Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Read this first
Minimum firmware levels for common library features
Table 1. Minimum firmware levels for common library features
Feature Minimum Firmware Level(s) Required
LTO HH V2 Tape Drives Library firmware level must be at A.00, or greater, to
support HH V2 Tape Drives.
LTO 8 Tape Drive Library firmware must be at E.70 or greater to support
the Ultrium 8 drives. Ensure the minimum version
required to support Ultrium 8 tape drives are installed
on the host. Ensure that any host applications and
software using their own device drivers are at the
minimum level required to support Ultrium 8 tape
drives.
LTO 7 Tape Drive Library firmware must be at D.10 or greater to support
the Ultrium 7 drives. Ensure the minimum version
required to support Ultrium 7 tape drives are installed
on the host. Ensure that any host applications and
software using their own device drivers are at the
minimum level required to support Ultrium 7 tape
drives.
LTO 6 Tape Drive Library firmware must be at B.50 or greater to support
the Ultrium 6 drives. Ensure the minimum version
required to support Ultrium 6 tape drives are installed
on the host. Ensure that any host applications and
software using their own device drivers are at the
minimum level required to support Ultrium 6 tape
drives.
LTO 5 Tape Drive Library firmware must be at 9.00, or greater, to support
the Ultrium 5 drives. Ensure the minimum version
required to support Ultrium 5 tape drives are installed
on the host. Ensure that any host applications and
software using their own device drivers are at the
minimum level required to support Ultrium 5 tape
drives.
Library BCR (Bar Code Reader) Libraries manufactured after May 2010 may have a BCR
that requires a minimum level of library firmware. The
minimum level of firmware for these libraries is 9.00.
Attempts to downlevel these libraries below 9.00 will be
blocked by the library.
Dedicated Cleaning Slot removal Library firmware level must be greater than 3.90.
Encryption Library firmware level must be 5.80 or greater.

LTO4 Drive firmware level must be 77BE or greater.

Key Path Diagnostics Library firmware level must be greater than 6.3, if
feature is available.
Path Failover LTO 4 Tape Drives: No minimum level of firmware is
required.
IPv6 Support Library firmware level: 4.50

v
Contacting Dell
For customers in the United States, call 800-WWW-DELL (800-999-3355).

Note: If you do not have an active Internet connection, you can find contact information about your
purchase invoice, packing slip, bill, or Dell product catalog.

Dell provides online and telephone-based support and service options. Service availability varies by
country and product, and some services might not be available in your area. To contact Dell for sales,
technical support, or customer service issues, follow the steps that are listed:
1. Go to Dell.com/support.
2. Select your country from the drop-down menu on the lower right corner of the page.
3. For customized support:
a. Enter your system Service Tag in the Enter your Service Tag field.
b. Click Submit. The support page that lists the various support categories is displayed.
4. For general support:
a. Select your product category.
b. Select your product segment.
c. Select your product. The support page that lists the various support categories is displayed.
5. For contact details of Dell Global Technical Support:
a. Click Global Technical Support.
b. The Contact Technical Support page is displayed with details to call, chat, or e-mail the Dell
Global Technical Support team.

vi Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Contents
iii Installation Planning . . . . . . . . . 25
Determining the Number of Logical Libraries . . . 25
Read this first . . . . . . . . . . . . v Basic Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Minimum firmware levels for common library Library Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v Using Multiple Logical Libraries for Library
Contacting Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Using Multiple Control Paths . . . . . . . . 26
Using Multiple Control Paths for Path Failover 26
Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Library Partitioning and Element Addressing . . . 26
Logical Unit Number (LUN) Scanning . . . . . 30
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv Host Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
SCSI Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Safety and environmental notices . . xvii Physical Characteristics of the SCSI Interface 31
Danger and caution notices . . . . . . . . xvii Using Multiple SCSI Buses . . . . . . . 32
Laser Safety and Compliance . . . . . . . . xviii Terminating the Bus . . . . . . . . . 32
Performing the safety inspection procedure . . . xviii SCSI Differential - LVD . . . . . . . . 32
Rack safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii SAS Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Fibre Channel Interface . . . . . . . . . 33
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi Cables and Speeds . . . . . . . . . . 33
Using Zoning to Isolate Devices and Enhance
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Product Description . . . . . . . . . 1 Sharing on a Storage Area Network . . . . 34
Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Bar Code Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Installation and Configuration . . . . . 35
Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Using the Library Configuration Form . . . . . 35
Supported Internet Protocols . . . . . . . . . 7 Installing Your Library. . . . . . . . . . . 35
SNMP Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Choosing a Location . . . . . . . . . . 35
SNMP Traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Unpacking the Library. . . . . . . . . . 36
Maximum Library Storage Capacity and Data Verifying the shipment . . . . . . . . . 36
Transfer Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Installing the Library Foot Pads (for Desktop
Ultrium Tape Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Installation ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Speed Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Removing and Storing the Shipping Lock . . . 38
Channel Calibration . . . . . . . . . . 10 Rackmounting the Library (for Rack Installation
Power Management . . . . . . . . . . 11 ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Attaching the Library to a Server . . . . . 50
Library Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Connecting the Host Interface Cable . . . . . 50
Product Environment . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Connecting a Power Cord . . . . . . . . 52
Supported Device Drivers . . . . . . . . . 15 Configuring Your Library. . . . . . . . . . 53
Choosing Your Configuration Method . . . . 53
Using Factory Defaults as Your Configuration . . 53
User Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Configuring Your Library using the Web User
Operator Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . 17 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Operator Control Panel Philosophy . . . . . 17 Establishing Remote Access to Your Library 54
Power-ON Display . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Logging on to the Web User Interface . . . 55
Note about the Front Panel LEDs . . . . . . 18 Verifying/Updating Firmware . . . . . . 56
Input Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Choosing General Library Settings. . . . . 57
Selecting Predefined Values . . . . . . . 19 Choosing the Number of Logical Libraries for
Toggling Values . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Your Library . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Entering Numerical Values . . . . . . . 19 Entering Path Failover Feature Activation Key 59
Power ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Setting Up Encryption . . . . . . . . . 60
Web User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Choosing Drive(s) Interface
Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Identification/Settings . . . . . . . . . 61
System Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Entering Library Network Settings . . . . 62
Web User Interface Help Pages . . . . . . . 23 Entering User Access Information using the
Logging out of the Web User Interface . . . . 23 Web User Interface . . . . . . . . . . 64

vii
 Entering Date and Time using the Web User Configure Library: General . . . . . . . 116
Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Configure Library: Logical Libraries . . . . 117
Configuring Logs and Traces using the Web Configure Library: Path Failover . . . . . 118
User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Configure Library: Encryption . . . . . . 118
Entering Email Notification Information using Configure Library: Drives . . . . . . . 120
the Web User Interface . . . . . . . . 66 Configure Library: Network . . . . . . 122
Configuring SNMP settings . . . . . . . 66 Configure Library: User Access . . . . . 123
Testing encryption configuration for Library Configure Library: Date & Time . . . . . 125
Managed encryption . . . . . . . . . 68 Configure Library: Logs & Traces. . . . . 125
Restoring Factory Default Settings using the Configure Library: Event Notification . . . 126
Web User Interface . . . . . . . . . . 68 Configure Library: SNMP . . . . . . . 127
Logging out of the Web User Interface . . . 68 Configure Library: Save/Restore
Configuring Your Library using the Operator Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Service Library Menu . . . . . . . . . 129
Preparing the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Service Library: Clean Drive . . . . . . 129
Verifying the Connection . . . . . . . . . . 69 Service Library: Advanced Diagnostics (for
Cartridge magazines . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Service Personnel Only) . . . . . . . . 130
Populating the Library with Data Cartridges . . 73 Service Library: View Logs . . . . . . . 130
Inserting the Cleaning Cartridge . . . . . . 74 Service Library: View Drive Logs . . . . . 131
Service Library: Save Drive Dump . . . . 131
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Service Library: Perform Diagnostics . . . 132
Operator Control Panel Navigation . . . . . . 81 Service Library: Key Path Diagnostics . . . 133
Operator Control Panel Menu Tree . . . . . . 83 Service Library: Upgrade Firmware . . . . 134
Monitor Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Service Library: Reboot . . . . . . . . 135
Monitor: Library. . . . . . . . . . . 84 Import and Export Media during Normal Library
Monitor: Drive . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Monitor: Inventory . . . . . . . . . . 88 Configuring I/O Stations and Reserving Slots . . 136
Control Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Control: Open I/O Station . . . . . . . 90 Using Ultrium Media . . . . . . . . 139
Control: Move Cartridges. . . . . . . . 91 Data Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Control: Magazine . . . . . . . . . . 91 Cartridge Compatibility . . . . . . . . . 141
Control: Re-Inventory . . . . . . . . . 92 WORM (Write Once, Read Many) Cartridges . . . 141
Configure Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 WORM Media . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Configure: Logical Libraries . . . . . . . 92 Data Security on WORM Media . . . . . . 142
Configure: Library . . . . . . . . . . 94 WORM Media Errors . . . . . . . . . . 142
Configure: Drive. . . . . . . . . . . 96 Cleaning Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Configure: Network . . . . . . . . . 97 Bar Code Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Configure: Set Access PIN . . . . . . . 98 Guidelines for Using Bar Code Labels . . . . 144
Setting the Operator Control Panel Access Write-Protect Switch . . . . . . . . . . . 144
PIN using the Operator Control Panel . . 98 Handling the Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . 145
Configure: Save/Restore . . . . . . . . 99 Provide Training . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Configure: Set Date and Time . . . . . . 101 Ensure Proper Packaging . . . . . . . . 145
Configure: Path Failover. . . . . . . . 102 Provide Proper Acclimation and Environmental
Service Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Service: Library Verify . . . . . . . . 102 Perform a Thorough Inspection . . . . . . 146
Service: Run Tests . . . . . . . . . . 103 Handle the Cartridge Carefully . . . . . . 147
Service: Service (Drives) . . . . . . . . 104 Environmental and Shipping Specifications for
Service: Display Contrast . . . . . . . 104 Tape Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Service: Telnet Service Port . . . . . . . 105
Web User Interface Menus . . . . . . . . . 105 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . 149
Monitor Library Menu . . . . . . . . . 106 Installation Problems . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Monitor Library: Library Identity. . . . . 106 Library Recovery Problem Determination . . . . 155
Monitor Library: Drive Identity . . . . . 107 Procedures for Isolating CRU Problems. . . . . 155
Monitor Library: Library Status . . . . . 109 Isolating a Power Supply Problem . . . . . 155
Monitor Library: Drive Status . . . . . . 110 Isolating Drive Sled Problems . . . . . . . 157
Monitor Library: Inventory . . . . . . . 112 Isolating a Library Controller Card vs. Accessor
Manage Library Menu . . . . . . . . . 114 Enclosure Problem . . . . . . . . . . 158
Manage Library: Move Media . . . . . . 114 Isolating Web User Interface Problems . . . . 159
Manage Library: Perform Inventory . . . . 115 Isolating Accessor Scanner Problems. . . . . 159
Manage Library: Release Magazine . . . . 115 Isolating Host Attachment Interface Problems 159
Configure Library Menu. . . . . . . . . 116

viii Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Identifying a Suspect Cartridge . . . . . . . 160 4U Library I/O Slots, Storage Slots, and Drive Slots
Element Addresses and Physical Locations . . . 204
Error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Library Partitioning and Element Addressing. . . 205

Service Procedures . . . . . . . . . 175 Appendix B. TapeAlert Flags . . . . . 209

Removing Cartridges from Magazine Slots . . . 175 TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Library . . . . 209
Releasing the Magazines Manually . . . . . . 175 TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Drive . . . . 211
Using the ITDT Firmware Update, Dump Retrieval
and Drive Test Tool . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Appendix C. Sense Data. . . . . . . 215
Library sense data . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Check, Adjust, Remove, and Replace 179 Drive Sense Data . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Electrostatic Discharge . . . . . . . . . . 179 Appendix D. Enabling LUN Support in
Relocating Your Library . . . . . . . . . . 179 Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Removing/Installing/Adding a Tape Drive Sled 181 Red Hat Enterprise Linux . . . . . . . . . 231
Removing a Tape Drive Sled . . . . . . . 182 Enabling LUN Support in Netware . . . . . . 232
Installing a Tape Drive Sled . . . . . . . 183
Adding a Tape Drive Sled . . . . . . . . 185 Appendix E. Notes on IPv6
Configuring the Tape Drive . . . . . . 186
Replacing a Power Supply . . . . . . . . . 186
Compatibility with Windows 2003/XP
Replacing a Library Controller Card . . . . . . 187 and 2008/Vista . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Replacing Cartridge Magazines . . . . . . . 188 Notes on IPv6 Compatibility with Linux . . . . 236
Replacing the Library Enclosure . . . . . . . 189
Preparing the Defective Library for Replacement 189 Appendix F. SNMP Status MIB
Unpacking and Preparing the Replacement Variables and Traps . . . . . . . . 237
Library Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Installing your drive in the replacement library
Appendix G. Library Configuration
enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Swapping Power Supplies . . . . . . . . 194 Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Swapping Library Controller Cards . . . . . 196
Swapping Cartridge Magazines . . . . . . 198 Appendix H. Accessibility . . . . . . 241
Installing the Replacement Library Enclosure 200
Completing the Installation of the Replacement Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Library Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Returning the Defective Library Enclosure. . . 202
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Appendix A. SCSI Element Types,
SCSI Addresses, and Physical
Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . 203
2U Library I/O Slot, Storage Slots and Drive Slot
Element Addresses and Physical Locations . . . 203

Contents ix
x Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Figures
1. Front panel of a 2U library . . . . . . . . 1 38. Attaching host interface cables to the 4U
2. Front panel of a 4U library . . . . . . . . 2 library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
3. Rear panel (drive sled only) of a half height 39. Attaching a SAS interface cable to the 2U
Fibre Channel drive . . . . . . . . . . 3 library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4. Rear panel of a 4U library with full height Fibre 40. Removing the protective label from the power
Channel drive and half height SAS drives . . . 3 receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
5. Rear panel of a 2U library with a full height 41. Log in screen on the Web User Interface 56
dual port SAS drive . . . . . . . . . . 4 42. The 2U library Configure Library: General
6. Library drive sled without ESD springs (SCSI screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
sled shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 43. Example: The 4U library Configure Library:
7. Library drive sled with ESD springs [1] (SAS General screen . . . . . . . . . . . 58
sled shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 44. The 4U library Configure Library: Logical
8. Power-ON screens . . . . . . . . . . 18 Libraries page. . . . . . . . . . . . 59
9. Web User Interface login page . . . . . . 21 45. The Configure Library: Path Failover Feature
10. 2U library System Status screen . . . . . . 21 Activation screen. . . . . . . . . . . 59
11. 4U library System Status screen . . . . . . 22 46. Feature Key verification screen . . . . . . 60
12. 4U library System Status screen showing 47. Feature Activation Key screen . . . . . . 60
media attention status . . . . . . . . . 22 48. Configure Library: Encryption Activation
13. 4U library System Status screen showing a screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
power supply failure . . . . . . . . . 23 49. The Configure Library: Drive screen . . . . 62
14. Configuration of a one - partition system 27 50. Configure Library: Network Page . . . . . 62
15. Configuration of a two - partition system 28 51. Warning Screen . . . . . . . . . . . 63
16. Configuration of a three - partition system 28 52. The Configure Library: User Access screen 64
17. Configuration of a four - partition system 29 53. The Configure Library: Date and Time screen 65
18. Examples of SCSI element addressing . . . . 29 54. The Configure Library: Logs and Traces screen 65
19. Removing the plastic protective sheets from 55. The Configure Library: Email Notification
the library . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
20. Installing foot pads on the bottom of the 56. Configure Library: SNMP page . . . . . . 67
library enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . 38 57. 2U library left magazine . . . . . . . . 70
21. Shipping lock and label . . . . . . . . 39 58. 2U library right magazine . . . . . . . . 70
22. Removing the Shipping lock and label . . . 39 59. 2U library I/O station in the left magazine 71
23. Library shipping lock and label storage 60. 4U library left magazines . . . . . . . . 71
location on rear panel of library. . . . . . 40 61. 4U library right magazines . . . . . . . 71
24. Rack Kit A mounting hardware . . . . . . 41 62. 4U library I/O station in the lower left
25. Rack Kit B mounting hardware . . . . . . 42 magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
26. Examples of EIA units for round hole and 63. Finger Holes on back side of 4U library I/O
square hole installations . . . . . . . . 43 station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
27. Rear view of Rack Kit A which shows the 64. 2U Library Control Keys . . . . . . . . 82
narrow part of the rail located at the rear of 65. 4U Library Control Keys . . . . . . . . 82
the rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 66. Operator Control Panel Menu Tree . . . . . 83
28. Rear view of Rack Kit B shows a different 67. Monitor: Library menu. . . . . . . . . 85
mounting method . . . . . . . . . . 44 68. Monitor: Drive menu . . . . . . . . . 87
29. Kit A (top picture with circles) showing rails 69. Example of a 4U Monitor: Inventory menu 89
installed. Rack Kit B is below showing the 70. Overview of inventoried cartridges: Left
front view of this kit installed. . . . . . . 45 magazines of a 4U Library . . . . . . . 89
30. 2U library rack anchors and mounting brackets 46 71. Detailed information on cartridges residing in
31. Close-up view of mounting of the anchors on a magazine. . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
both sides of the library . . . . . . . . 46 72. Control: I/O station menu . . . . . . . 90
32. 2U library side screws to remove . . . . . 47 73. Control: Move Cartridges menu. . . . . . 91
33. Sliding the 2U library into the rack . . . . 48 74. Control: Magazine menu . . . . . . . . 91
34. Sliding the 4U library into the rack . . . . 48 75. Control: Re-Inventory menu . . . . . . . 92
35. Securing the 2U library to the rack . . . . . 49 76. Configure: Logical Libraries menu . . . . . 93
36. Securing the 4U library to the rack . . . . . 50 77. Configure: Library menu . . . . . . . . 94
37. Attaching a SCSI host interface cable to the 2U 78. Configure: Drive menu. . . . . . . . . 96
library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 79. Configure: Network menu . . . . . . . 97
80. Configure: Set Access PIN menu . . . . . 98

xi
 81. Pound sign (#) shows accessible menus when 123. Service Library: Reboot page . . . . . . 135
access PIN is enabled but before it is entered . 99 124. The LTO Ultrium Data Cartridge . . . . . 139
82. Configure: Save/Restore menu. . . . . . 100 125. Ultrium Data and WORM Tape Cartridges 142
83. Configure: Set Date and Time menu . . . . 102 126. Sample bar code label on the LTO Ultrium 8
84. Configure: Path Failover . . . . . . . . 102 Tape Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . 144
85. Service: Library Verify menu . . . . . . 103 127. Setting the write-protect switch . . . . . 145
86. Service: Run Tests menu . . . . . . . . 103 128. Double-boxing tape cartridges for shipping 146
87. Service: Service menu . . . . . . . . . 104 129. Checking for gaps in the seams of a cartridge 147
88. Service: Display Contrast menu . . . . . 105 130. A 250w power supply with LEDs . . . . . 156
89. The 4U library Monitor Library: Library 131. A 80w power supply without LEDs . . . . 156
Identity page . . . . . . . . . . . 107 132. Access holes for the left magazine . . . . 175
90. The 4U library Monitor Library: Drive 133. Access holes for the right magazine . . . . 176
Identity page showing one Ultrium 3 SAS 134. Left magazine pulled out of the 2U library 176
half height V2 drive (#1) and one Ultrium 4 135. Left Magazines pulled out of the 4U Library 177
SAS half height drive (#2) . . . . . . . 109 136. ESD label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
91. The 4U library Monitor Library: Library 137. Shipping Lock and Label Storage Location 180
Status page . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 138. Shipping Lock and Label . . . . . . . 180
92. The 4U library Monitor Library: Drive Status 139. Library drive sled without ElectroStatic
page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Discharge (ESD) springs (SCSI sled shown) . 181
93. The 2U library Monitor Library: Inventory 140. Library drive sled with ESD springs [1] (SAS
page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 sled shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
94. The 4U library Monitor Library: Inventory 141. Drive sled components (full height fibre drive
page (Right Magazines) . . . . . . . . 114 in top position, half height SCSI drive in
95. Manage Library: Move Media page . . . . 115 middle position, half height SAS drive in
96. Manage Library: Perform Inventory page 115 bottom position) on back panel of a 4U
97. Manage Library: Release Magazine page 115 library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
98. The 4U library Configure Library: General 142. Pulling the drive sled out of the library (drive
and Extended page . . . . . . . . . 117 sled without ESD springs shown) . . . . . 183
99. The 4U library Configure Library: Logical 143. Pushing the drive sled into the library (drive
Libraries page . . . . . . . . . . . 118 sled without ESD springs shown) . . . . . 184
100. The 4U library Configure Library: Path 144. Diagrams for applying conductive tape for
Failover page . . . . . . . . . . . 118 ESD protection to the back of a drive sled
101. Path Failover license verification page 118 installed in a 2U or 4U library . . . . . . 184
102. Feature Activation Key screen . . . . . . 119 145. A power supply being removed from a 2U
103. Configure Library: Encryption Feature library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
configuration screen . . . . . . . . . 119 146. A Library Controller Card being removed
104. The Configure Library: Drives page for a 2U from the library . . . . . . . . . . . 188
library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 147. Removing the two mounting bracket screws
105. The Configure Library: Drives page for a 4U anchoring the library to the rack (one screw
library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 on each side of the library) . . . . . . . 190
106. Configure Library: Network Page . . . . . 122 148. Foot pads installed on the bottom of the
107. Warning Screen . . . . . . . . . . . 123 library enclosure . . . . . . . . . . 191
108. Configure Library: User Access page 124 149. Removing the shipping label and lock from
109. The Configure Library: Date & Time page 125 the top of the library and storing on the rear
110. Configure Library: Logs & Traces page 126 panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
111. Configure Library: Event Notification page 126 150. Library shipping lock and label storage
112. Configure Library: SNMP page . . . . . 127 location on the real panel of the library . . . 192
113. Configure Library: Save/Restore page 129 151. Removing a drive sled from the library (drive
114. No Cleaning Required . . . . . . . . 129 sled without ESD springs shown) . . . . . 193
115. No cleaning cartridge in library . . . . . 129 152. Drive sled taping diagrams . . . . . . . 194
116. Service Library: Clean Drive page. . . . . 130 153. A power supply being removed from a
117. Service Library: View Logs page . . . . . 131 library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
118. Service Library: View Drive Logs screen 131 154. Removing a Library Controller Card from the
119. Service: Save Drive Dump . . . . . . . 132 library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
120. Service Library: Perform Diagnostics page 132 155. Library front panel LEDs . . . . . . . 197
121. Service Library: Perform Key Path 156. Access hole for the left magazine (facing rear
Diagnostics page . . . . . . . . . . 133 of library) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
122. The Service Library: Upgrade Firmware page, 157. Access hole for the right magazine (facing
showing one Ultrium 3 SAS Half Height V2 rear of library) . . . . . . . . . . . 199
drive and one Ultrium 4 SAS Half Height 158. Left magazines pulled out of a 4U library
drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 (facing front of library) . . . . . . . . 200

xii Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
159. Mounting brackets and anchors for securing 162. Configuration of a two - partition system 206
the library in a rack (one bracket and anchor 163. Configuration of a three - partition system 207
on each side of the library) . . . . . . . 201 164. Configuration of a four - partition system 207
160. Front view of rack showing screw placement 201 165. Examples of SCSI element addressing 208
161. Configuration of a one - partition system 206

Figures xiii
xiv Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Tables
1. Minimum firmware levels for common library 31. Cartridge Types and Colors . . . . . . . 139
features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v 32. Cartridge Data Capacity and Recording
2. 2U library and 4U library front panel Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 33. Nominal Cartridge Life: Load/Unload Cycles 140
3. 2U library and 4U library rear panel 34. Ultrium data cartridge compatibility with
descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Ultrium tape drive . . . . . . . . . . 141
4. Tape drive model and host interface type 8 35. Bar code label requirements for Ultrium tape
5. Library storage capacity and data transfer rate 8 drives and libraries . . . . . . . . . 143
6. Physical Specifications . . . . . . . . . 12 36. Cartridges and VOLSERs compatible with the
7. Power Specifications . . . . . . . . . 12 Ultrium Tape Drives . . . . . . . . . 143
8. Operation Specifications: Ultrium 8 . . . . 12 37. Location of the write-protect switch . . . . 145
9. Operation Specifications: Ultrium 7 . . . . 12 38. Environment for operating, storing, and
10. Operation Specifications: Ultrium 6 . . . . 13 shipping the LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge . . 148
11. Operation Specifications: Ultrium 5 . . . . 13 39. Troubleshooting table . . . . . . . . . 149
12. Operation Specifications: Ultrium 4 . . . . 13 40. Power Supply LED Meanings . . . . . . 156
13. Operation Specifications: Ultrium 3 . . . . 14 41. Main Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . 162
14. Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . 14 42. Sub error codes . . . . . . . . . . . 167
15. Host Drive Interface Support. . . . . . . 30 43. Warning events . . . . . . . . . . . 171
16. Maximum bus length between terminators 31 44. Shipping Lock/Shipping Label. . . . . . 180
17. Recommended maximum quantity of drives 45. 2U library SCSI Element Types and Element
per SCSI bus . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
18. Location criteria . . . . . . . . . . . 35 46. 4U library SCSI Element Types and Element
19. Menu navigation shortcuts . . . . . . . 75 Addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
20. Library Control Keys . . . . . . . . . 82 47. 2U library SCSI element addresses for storage
21. Detailed information on cartridges residing in slots and drive slot (one logical partition with
a magazine. . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 one drive). . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
22. Factory Default Settings . . . . . . . . 100 48. 4U library SCSI element addresses for storage
23. Web User Interface Menus . . . . . . . 105 slots and drive slot (one logical partition with
24. Library Identity page elements. . . . . . 106 drives in slot 1 and slot 2) . . . . . . . 204
25. Drive Identity page elements . . . . . . 107 49. TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Ultrium
26. Library Status page elements . . . . . . 109 Tape Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
27. Drive Status page elements . . . . . . . 110 50. Library Sense Keys, ASC and ASCQ . . . . 215
28. Configure Library: General page elements 116 51. LTO Tape Drive Sense Data . . . . . . . 221
29. Configure Library: Specific page elements 116 52. SNMP Status Events . . . . . . . . . 237
30. Drive Identity page elements . . . . . . 120

xv
xvi Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Safety and environmental notices
When this product is used, observe the danger, caution, and attention notices that are contained in this
guide. The notices are accompanied by symbols that represent the severity of the safety condition.

The sections that follow define each type of safety notice and give examples.

Danger and caution notices

Danger Notice
A danger notice calls attention to a situation that is potentially lethal or extremely
hazardous to people. A lightning bolt symbol always accompanies a danger notice to
represent a dangerous electrical condition.

Caution Notice

A caution notice calls attention to a situation that is potentially hazardous to people because of some
existing condition. A caution notice can be accompanied by one of several symbols:

If the symbol is... It means...

A hazardous electrical condition with less severity than electrical danger.

A hazardous condition that is not represented by other safety symbols.

A hazardous condition due to the use of a laser in the product. Laser

symbols are always accompanied by the classification of the laser as defined
by the U. S. Department of Health and Human Services (for example, Class
I, Class II).

A hazardous condition due to mechanical movement in or around the

product.

A hazardous condition due to the weight of the unit. Weight symbols are
accompanied by an approximation of the product's weight.
svc00168

32-55 kg (70.5-121.2 lbs)

A hazardous condition due to the unit's susceptibility to electrostatic

discharge.

xvii
Laser Safety and Compliance
Before the library is used, review the following laser safety information.

Class I Laser Product

The product might contain a laser assembly that complies with the performance standards set by the US
Food and Drug Administration for a Class I laser product. Class I laser products do not emit hazardous
laser radiation. The library has the necessary protective housing and scanning safeguards to ensure that
laser radiation is inaccessible during operation or is within Class I limits. External safety agencies
reviewed the product and obtained approvals to the latest standards as they apply.

Performing the safety inspection procedure

Before you service the unit, complete the following safety inspection procedure.
1. Stop all activities between the host and the library’s tape drives.
2. Turn off the power to the library by pushing in the Power button on the rear of the tape library for 4
seconds.
3. If the drives are SCSI attached, disconnect the SCSI cable and check the SCSI bus terminator for
damage.
4. Unplug the library’s power cord from the electrical outlet and the library’s power supply unit.
5. Check the library’s power cords for damage, such as a pinched, cut, or frayed cord.
6. If drives are SCSI attached, check the tape drive's SCSI bus (signal) cable for damage.
7. If drives are FC/SAS attached, check the tape drive's FC/SAS cable for damage.
8. Check the cover of the library for sharp edges, damage, or alterations that expose its internal parts.
9. Check the cover of the library for proper fit. It should be in place and secure.
10. Check the product label at the rear of the library to make sure that it matches the voltage at your
outlet.

Rack safety
The following general safety information must be used for all rack-mounted devices.

DANGER

v Always lower the leveling pads on the rack cabinet.

v Always install stabilizer brackets on the rack cabinet.
v To avoid hazardous conditions because of uneven mechanical loading, always install the
heaviest devices in the bottom of the rack cabinet. Always install servers and optional
devices, starting from the bottom of the rack cabinet.
v Rack-mounted devices are not to be used as a shelf or workspace. Do not place any object
on top of rack-mounted devices.
v Each rack cabinet might have more than one power cord. Be sure to disconnect all power
cords in the rack cabinet before you service any device in the rack cabinet.
v Connect all devices that are installed in a rack cabinet to power devices installed in the
same rack cabinet. Do not plug a power cord from a device that is installed in one rack
cabinet into a power device that is installed in a different rack cabinet.
v An electrical outlet that is not correctly wired might place hazardous voltage on the metal
parts of the system or the devices that attach to the system. It is the responsibility of the
customer to ensure that the outlet is correctly wired and grounded to prevent an electrical
shock.

xviii Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
CAUTION:

v Do not install a unit in a rack where the internal rack ambient temperatures might exceed
the manufacturer's recommended ambient temperature for all your rack mounted devices.
v Do not install a unit in a rack where the air flow is compromised. Ensure that air flow is
not blocked or reduced on any side, front, or back of a unit that is used for air flow
through the unit.
v Consideration must be given to the connection of the equipment to the supply circuit so
that overloading of the circuits does not compromise the supply wiring or overcurrent
protection. To provide the correct power connection to a rack, refer to the rating labels on
the equipment in the rack to determine the total power requirement of the supply circuit.
v (For sliding drawers) Do not pull out or install any drawer or feature if the rack stabilizer
brackets are not attached to the rack. Do not pull out more than one drawer at a time. The
rack might become unstable if you pull out more than one drawer at a time.
v (For fixed drawers) This drawer is a fixed drawer and must not be moved for servicing
unless specified by the manufacturer. Attempting to move the drawer partially or out of
the rack might cause the rack to become unstable or cause the drawer to fall out of the
rack.

(R001)

Safety and environmental notices xix

CAUTION:

Removing components from the upper positions in the rack cabinet improves rack stability
during relocation. Follow these general guidelines whenever you relocate a populated rack
cabinet within a room or building:
v Reduce the weight of the rack cabinet by removing equipment, starting at the top of the
rack cabinet. When possible, restore the rack cabinet to the configuration of the rack
cabinet as you received it. If this configuration is not known, you must do the following:
– Remove all devices in the 32U position and above.
– Ensure that the heaviest devices are installed in the bottom of the rack cabinet.
– Ensure that there are no empty U-levels between devices that are installed in the rack
cabinet below the 32U level.
v If the rack cabinet you are relocating is part of a suite of rack cabinets, detach the rack
cabinet from the suite.
v Inspect the route that you plan to take to eliminate potential hazards.
v Verify that the route that you choose can support the weight of the loaded rack cabinet.
Refer to the documentation that comes with your rack cabinet for the weight of a loaded
rack cabinet.
v Verify that all door openings are at least 760 x 2032 mm (30 x 80 in.).
v Ensure that all devices, shelves, drawers, doors, and cables are secure.
v Ensure that the four leveling pads are raised to their highest position.
v Ensure that there is no stabilizer bracket that is installed on the rack cabinet during
movement.
v Do not use a ramp that is inclined at more than 10 degrees.
v When the rack cabinet is in the new location:
– Lower the four leveling pads.
– Install stabilizer brackets on the rack cabinet.
– If you removed any devices from the rack cabinet, repopulate the rack cabinet from the
lowest position to the highest position.
v If a long-distance relocation is required, restore the rack cabinet to the configuration of the
rack cabinet as you received it. Pack the rack cabinet in the original packaging material, or
equivalent. Also, lower the leveling pads to raise the casters off the pallet and bolt the
rack cabinet to the pallet.

(R002)

xx Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Preface
This manual contains information and instructions necessary for the installation, operation, and service of
the Dell™ PowerVault™ TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library.

Related Publications
Refer to the following publications for additional information.
v Dell™ PowerVault™ TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library Getting Started Guide provides
installation information.
v Dell™ PowerVault™ TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library SCSI Reference provides supported SCSI
commands and protocol governing the behavior of SCSI interface.
v IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager Knowledge Center, located at http://www-01.ibm.com/support/
knowledgecenter/SSWPVP/welcome?lang=en, contains information to help you install, configure, and
use the IBM® Security Key Lifecycle Manager.

xxi
xxii Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Product Description
The Dell™ PowerVault™ TL2000 Tape Library (2U library) and the Dell PowerVault TL4000 Tape Library
(4U library) provide compact, high-capacity, low-cost solutions for simple, unattended data backup. The
4U library houses up to 48 tape cartridges (or 45 and an elective 3-slot I/O Station) in a compact 4U form
factor with easy access to cartridges via four removable magazines. The 2U library houses up to 24 tape
cartridges (or 23 and an elective 1-slot I/O Station) in a compact 2U form factor with easy access to
cartridges via two removable magazines.

The TL2000/TL4000 Library supports LTO 3 tape drives with these interfaces: Small Computer Systems
Interface (SCSI), SAS, Fibre Channel interface (FC). LTO 4 to LTO 7 Full Height and Half Height drives
are Serial Attached SCSI interface (SAS), and Fibre Channel (FC). LTO 8 Half Height drives are Serial
Attached SCSI interface (SAS), or Fibre Channel (FC).

Front Panel

3 1 2 3

a77ug239

8 4 6 7 5 4

Figure 1. Front panel of a 2U library

1
 3 1 2 3

a77ug240
8 6 7 4 5

Figure 2. Front panel of a 4U library

Table 2 below contains front panel descriptions for both the 2U library in Figure 1 on page 1 and the 4U
library in Figure 2.
Table 2. 2U library and 4U library front panel descriptions
Number Item Description
▌1▐ Power button Pressing this button powers ON the library. Pressing and holding this button for 4
seconds will power OFF the unit (soft power down). No power switch or button can
be found on the back panel of the library.
▌2▐ Front panel v Ready/Activity (Green LED) - It is illuminated any time the unit is powered ON and
LEDs (left to able to function. It should blink whenever there is library or drive activity, or when
right) the library is in the process of powering up.
v Clean Drive (Amber LED) - It is illuminated when the drive needs to be cleaned.
The LED will be turned OFF after the drive is cleaned successfully.
v Attention (Amber LED) - It is illuminated when there has been a failure that
indicates a piece of media is incompatible with the drive, damaged, marginal, or
invalid. It will be cleared when all invalid cartridges have been exported from the
library. The amber LED may also be lit because a power supply or a power supply
fan is failing, or a drive sled is defective, missing, or has been replaced by a
different drive type.
v Error (Amber LED) - It is illuminated when there is an unrecoverable library or
drive failure. A message is displayed at the same time on the Operator Control Panel
display.
▌3▐ Cartridge v The 2U library contains two cartridge magazines.
magazines
– The left magazine can hold up to 12 cartridges (or 11 data cartridges and the
elective 1-slot I/O Station.)
– The right magazine can hold up to 12 cartridges.
v The 4U library contains four cartridge magazines.
– The upper left magazine can hold up to 12 cartridges.
– The lower left magazine can hold up to 12 cartridges (or 9 data cartridges and the
elective 3-slot I/O Station.)
– The upper right magazine can hold up to 12 cartridges.
– The lower right magazine can hold up to 12 cartridges.
▌4▐ Air vents These vents draw cooler air into the library enclosure and allow warm air to escape,
which helps keep the library at a normal operating temperature.

2 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Table 2. 2U library and 4U library front panel descriptions (continued)
Number Item Description
▌5▐ Control keys v UP (∧) - The upper left button is used to scroll upward through menu items.
v DOWN (∨) - The lower left button is used to scroll downward through menu items.
v CANCEL (X) - The upper right button is used to cancel a user action and return to
the previous menu screen.
v SELECT (') - The lower right button is used to display a sub-menu or force an
accessor action.
▌7▐ Operator This component is a 128 X 64 monochrome graphic display.
Control Panel
display
▌8▐ I/O Station The Input/Output (I/O) Station is used to import and export cartridges into and out
of the library.
v The 2U library has an elective 1-slot I/O Station.
v The 4U library has an elective 3-slot I/O Station.

Rear Panel

1 2 3

a77ug300
Figure 3. Rear panel (drive sled only) of a half height Fibre Channel drive

1 2 3 4
a77ug100

11 10 9 8 7 6 5

Figure 4. Rear panel of a 4U library with full height Fibre Channel drive and half height SAS drives.

Product Description 3
 1 2 3 4

a77ug135
11 10 9 8 7 6 5

Figure 5. Rear panel of a 2U library with a full height dual port SAS drive

4 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Table 3. 2U library and 4U library rear panel descriptions
Number Item Description
▌1▐ Power connector(s) Both libraries require a 110/220 volt AC power connection.
v The 2U library has one power supply.
v The 4U library has a minimum of one power supply, but has the capability of
adding a redundant power supply.
▌2▐ Host interface The library has one or more of the following host interface connectors on the drive
connectors sled:
v Fibre Channel connector
v SFF-8088 mini-SAS connector
▌3▐ Tape drive sled This library supports the Ultrium 3 to Ultrium 7 full height tape drives and the
Ultrium 8 half height tape drive. The tape drive in the library is packaged in a
container called a drive sled. The drive sled is a customer replaceable unit (CRU),
and is hot-pluggable, which is designed for easy removal and replacement.
▌4▐ Shipping lock and The shipping lock, which secures the accessor during shipping, and associated
label storage label are stored on the rear panel of the library for future use. See “Removing and
location Storing the Shipping Lock” on page 38.
Note: The shipping lock must be removed before powering ON the library to
allow the accessor to function properly.
▌5▐ USB port Used to save/restore library configuration information on a USB device.
▌6▐ Library Control An LED showing the status of the Library Control Board.
Board (LCC) LED
LED flashing (1 flash per second) - normal operation
▌7▐ Serial port This port is used to communicate serially with the library using an RJ-11 connector.
For use by Service Personnel.
▌8▐ Ethernet port This port is used to connect the library to a network.

LED
v 10/100 Link
– Description: Green: Link Integrity
– Flashing: Network synchronization/negotiation
– Steady (On): Good connection
– Off: No connection between NIC and hub
v Activity
– Description: Amber: Port traffic indicator
– Flashing: Network traffic present
– Steady (On): Heavy network traffic
– Off: No traffic
▌9▐ Tape drive LED This LED indicates the current status of the drive. When the LED is green, it
indicates normal drive activity.
▌10▐ Service Tag/Serial The service tag and serial number on the pull-out label links the library to your
Number warranty.
▌11▐ Fan vents These vents allow air to escape from the power supply and tape drive sled.

Bar Code Reader

The bar code reader is an integral part of the library accessor. The bar code reader provides inventory
feedback to the host application, Operator Control Panel display, and Web User Interface by reading
cartridge bar code labels. The library stores the customized inventory data in memory.

Product Description 5
Library firmware supports a 6 or 8 character volume serial number (VOLSER) on the bar code label on
the tape cartridge. Bar code selection is available for libraries with library code 4.50 or greater.

Encryption
The LTO Ultrium 4 and later Tape Drives support Application Managed Encryption (AME), and Library
Managed Encryption (LME), using T10 encryption methods, for SAS and Fibre Channel drives only. Data
encryption is supported with LTO Ultrium 4 and later Data Cartridges only. Encryption is also supported
with library firmware version 5.80 and higher and drive firmware version 77BE for LTO 4 and higher
drive code level.

The encryption enabled drive contains the necessary hardware and firmware to encrypt and decrypt host
tape application data. Encryption policy and encryption keys are provided by the host application or host
server. A drive digital certificate is installed at manufacturing time. Each drive receives a unique serial
number and certificate. The T10 application may validate each drive instance by checking the drive's
digital certificate.

CAUTION:
The library must be offline from any user and all media must be removed from the drives
before license keys are installed or any configuration modifications are made. Please refer
to “Power ON/OFF” on page 20 and “Removing Cartridges from Magazine Slots” on page
175 for instructions to take the library offline and to eject media from the drives.

To prevent possible data loss due to a key management server failure, Dell recommends the use of a
primary and secondary key management server. This configuration provides redundancy in the event the
primary key management server is down or unavailable. Please refer to IBM SKLM Knowledge Center
online at http://www-01.ibm.com/support/knowledgecenter/SSWPVP/welcome?lang=en for
information on configuring a primary and secondary key management server for your library.

If the backup job fails due to a key management server failure, the job recovers if connectivity is restored
to the key management server prior to expiration of the timeout set in the tape backup software
application.

Enabling library-managed encryption on a PowerVault TL2000 or TL4000 is a 6 step process.

1. Upgrade the library and drive firmware to the latest versions. The firmware can be found at
www.Dell.com/support.
2. Enable library-managed encryption on the library via the license key if not already licensed. Please
refer to “Configure Library: Encryption” on page 118 for activation instructions.
If you purchased library-managed encryption at the time you purchased your library, a hard copy of
the license key is provided with your library as a backup. If there are any issues with the license key
for library-managed encryption purchased with the library, please visit http://www.dell.com/
tapeautomation to obtain your license key. You will need the library serial number and worldwide
node name to obtain the license key. Please refer to the following tables in this document for
instructions on locating this information:
v Table 1.2 for library serial number
v Table 5.6 for library worldwide node name
If this does not resolve your issue, please contact Dell technical support.
3. Configure library-managed encryption on your library. Please refer to “Configure Library: Encryption”
on page 118 for instructions.
4. Install the IBM SKLM application on the server designated as the key manager. Refer to the IBM
SKLM Knowledge Center online for information.
5. Configure the IBM SKLM application. Refer to the IBM SKLM Knowledge Center online for information.

6 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
6. Start the IBM SKLM application. Refer to the IBM SKLM Knowledge Center online for information.

Note: All encryption settings should be configured or re-verified in the drive after any library or drive
reset. This is because a new drive may have been added or an existing drive may have been swapped
with another drive.

Supported Internet Protocols

The library supports the following Internet protocols:
v IPv4
v IPv6

To learn more about Internet protocols, visit http://www.iana.org/.

SNMP Messaging
Occasionally, the library may encounter a situation that you want to know about, such as an open
magazine or a fault that causes the library to stop. The library provides a standard TCP/IP protocol
called Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) to send alerts about conditions (such as need for
operator intervention) over a TCP/IP LAN network to an SNMP monitoring station. These alerts are
called SNMP traps. Using the information supplied in each SNMP trap, the monitoring station (together
with customer-supplied software) can alert operations personnel of possible problems or operator
interventions that occur.

SNMP Traps
SNMP traps are alerts or status messages that can be collected, monitored and used to proactively
manage attached libraries using SNMP protocol with the host server(s). In summary, each trap provides
the following information:
v Product Identification such as product name, description, manufacturer, model number, firmware
level, and the URL that the trap is designated for.
v Product Status such as the severity of the trap, status (current and previous) and the time the trap
occurred.
v Library State (physical device status) such as identification and status of devices that are monitored. In
the case of the library, it would include enclosure, power supply, controller, magazine status, drive
count, cartridge slot count, and I/O station count. Also included would be certain library statistics, and
where appropriate, the fault FSC (fault symptom code) including the severity and description of that
fault.
v Drive Status such as the identification of each drive in the library, firmware level, serial number and
other address and status information.
v Trap Definitions such as library status change, open magazine, I/O accessed, hard fault information,
drive cleaning requests, excessive retries and library returning to normal operations. For additional
information, refer to Appendix G. "SNMP Status MIB Variables and Traps" on page G-1.
v SNMP MIBs: The library's Management Information Base (MIB) contains units of information that
specifically describe an aspect of the system, such as the system name, hardware number or
communications configuration. Status and error data is also gathered by MIBs and sent to one or more
IP addresses defined during the SNMP configuration operation. Download the SNMP MIB file for this
library from www.Dell.com/support.

Product Description 7
Maximum Library Storage Capacity and Data Transfer Rate
Maximum library storage capacity and maximum data transfer rates are as follows:
Table 4. Tape drive model and host interface type
Tape Drive Model Host Interface
Ultrium 8 Half Height drives v 8 Gb/s Fibre Channel - single port
v 6 Gb/s Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) - dual port
Ultrium 7 Full Height and Half v 8 Gb/s Fibre Channel - single port
Height drives
v 6 Gb/s Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) - dual port
Ultrium 6 Full Height and Half v 8 Gb/s Fibre Channel - single port
Height drives
v 6 Gb/s Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) - dual port
Ultrium 5 Full Height and Half v 8 Gb/s Fibre Channel - single port
Height drives
v 6 Gb/s Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) - dual port
Ultrium 4 Full Height drives v 4 Gb/s Fibre Channel - single port
v 3 Gb/s Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) - dual port
Ultrium 4 Half Height V2 drives v 8Gb/s Fibre Channel - single port
v 6GB/s Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) - dual port
Ultrium 4 Half Height drives v 3 Gb/s SAS - single port
Ultrium 3 Full Height drives v Ultra160 SCSI LVD (depending on drive; single-ended (SE) is not
recommended as it will severely degrade performance)
v 4 Gb/s Fibre Channel - single port
Ultrium 3 Half Height V2 drives v 6GB/s Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) - dual port
Ultrium 3 Half Height drives v 3 Gb/s SAS - single port

Table 5. Library storage capacity and data transfer rate

Characteristic 2U Library Specification 4U Library Specification
Maximum storage capacity - v 24 data cartridges v 48 data cartridges
Ultrium 8 Data Cartridges
v Native: 288 TB v Native: 576 TB
v Compressed: 720 TB (2.5:1 v Compressed: 1440 TB (2.5:1
compression) compression)
Maximum storage capacity - v 24 data cartridges v 48 data cartridges
Ultrium 7 Data Cartridges
v Native: 144 TB v Native: 288 TB
v Compressed: 360 TB (2.5:1 v Compressed: 720 TB (2.5:1
compression) compression)
Maximum storage capacity - v 24 data cartridges v 48 data cartridges
Ultrium 6 Data Cartridges
v Native: 60 TB v Native: 120 TB
v Compressed: 150 TB (2.5:1 v Compressed: 300 TB (2.5:1
compression) compression)
Maximum storage capacity - v 24 data cartridges v 48 data cartridges
Ultrium 5 Data Cartridges
v Native: 36 TB v Native: 72 TB
v Compressed: 72 TB (2:1 compression) v Compressed: 144 TB (2:1
compression)

8 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Table 5. Library storage capacity and data transfer rate (continued)
Characteristic 2U Library Specification 4U Library Specification
Maximum storage capacity - v 24 data cartridges v 48 data cartridges
Ultrium 4 Data Cartridges
v Native: 19.2 TB v Native: 38.4 TB
v Compressed: 38.4 TB (2:1 v Compressed: 75.2 TB (2:1
compression) compression)
Maximum storage capacity - v 24 data cartridges v 48 data cartridges
Ultrium 3 Data Cartridges
v Native: 9.6 TB v Native: 19.2 TB
v Compressed: 19.2 TB (2:1 v Compressed: 38.4 TB (2:1
compression) compression)
Sustained native data transfer LTO 3 HH: 60 MBs,
rate
LTO 3 HH V2: 80 MBs

LTO 3 FH: 80 MBs

LTO 4 HH and FH: 120 MBs

LTO 5 : 140 MBs

LTO 6: 160 MBs

LTO 7: 300 MBs

LTO 8 HH: 300 MBs

Ultrium Tape Drives

This library supports the Ultrium 3 to Ultrium 8 Tape Drives. Each tape drive in the library is packaged
in a container called a drive sled. The drive sled is a customer replaceable unit (CRU), and is designed
for quick removal and replacement in the library.

The Ultrium 8 Half Height Tape Drive supports two SAS SFF-8088 connectors, or one LC Fibre Channel
connector. The SFF-8088 SAS connectors on the Ultrium 8 tape drives are compatible with SAS-1 or SAS-2
cables.

The Ultrium 7 Tape Drive supports two SAS SFF-8088 connectors, or one LC Fibre Channel connector.
The SFF-8088 SAS connectors on the Ultrium 7 tape drives are compatible with SAS-1 or SAS-2 cables.

The Ultrium 6 Tape Drive supports two SAS SFF-8088 connectors, or one LC Fibre Channel connector.
The SFF-8088 SAS connectors on the Ultrium 6 tape drives are compatible with SAS-1 or SAS-2 cables.

The Ultrium 5 Tape Drive supports two SAS SFF-8088 connectors, or one LC Fibre Channel connector.
The SFF-8088 SAS connectors on the Ultrium 5 tape drives are compatible with SAS-1 or SAS-2 cables.

The Ultrium 4 Full Height Tape Drives support SAS, or Fibre Channel interfaces. It features two SFF-8088
SAS connectors, or one LC Fibre Channel connector. The Ultrium 4 Half Height Tape Drive supports one
SAS SFF-8088 connector. The Ultrium 4 Half High V2 Tape Drives support two SFF-8088 SAS connectors,
or one LC Fibre Channel connector. The SFF-8088 SAS connectors on the Ultrium 4 tape drives are
compatible with SAS-1 cables.

The Ultrium 3 Full Height Tape Drive supports LVD Ultra160, or Fibre Channel interfaces. It features two
HD68 connectors or one LC Fibre Channel connector. The Ultrium 3 Half Height Drive supports one SAS
SFF-8088 connector. The Ultrium 3 Half High V2 Tape Drive supports two SFF-8088 SAS connectors. The

Product Description 9
SFF-8088 SAS connectors on the Ultrium 3 tape drives are compatible with SAS-1 cables.

a77ug008
Figure 6. Library drive sled without ESD springs (SCSI sled shown)

a77ug202

Figure 7. Library drive sled with ESD springs [1] (SAS sled shown)

Speed Matching
To improve system performance, the Ultrium 3 and later Tape Drives use a technique called speed
matching to dynamically adjust its native (uncompressed) data rate to the slower data rate of the attached
server.

Channel Calibration
The channel calibration feature of the Ultrium 3 and later Tape Drives customizes each read/write data
channel for optimum performance. The customization enables compensation for variations in the
recording channel transfer function, media characteristics, and read/write head characteristics.

10 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Power Management
The Ultrium 3 and later Tape Drive's power management function controls the drive's electronics so that
part of the electronics completely turn OFF when circuit functions are not needed for the drive's
operation.

Media
The library uses Ultrium Tape Cartridges that provide up to 6000 GB native capacity (up to 15000 GB
with 2.5:1 hardware data compression) for LTO 7 Tape Drives, up to 2500 GB native capacity (up to 6250
GB with 2.5:1 hardware data compression) for LTO 6 Tape Drives, up to 1500 GB native capacity (up to
3000 GB with 2:1 hardware data compression) for LTO 5 tape drives, up to 800 GB native capacity (up to
1600 GB with 2:1 hardware data compression) for LTO 4 tape drives, and up to 400 GB native capacity
(up to 800 GB with 2:1 hardware data compression) for LTO 3 tape drives.

Ultrium 8 Tape Drives can read and write LTO Ultrium 8 and Ultrium 7 Data Cartridges. Ultrium 7 Tape
Drives can read and write LTO Ultrium 7 Data Cartridges. Ultrium 7 tape drives can read and write LTO
Ultrium 6 Data Cartridges at original Ultrium 6 capacities, and can also read LTO Ultrium 5 Data
Cartridges with improved data rates. Ultrium 6 Tape Drives can read and write LTO Ultrium 6 Data
Cartridges. Ultrium 6 tape drives can read and write LTO Ultrium 5 Data Cartridges at original Ultrium 5
capacities, and can also read LTO Ultrium 4 Data Cartridges with improved data rates. Ultrium 5 tape
drives can read and write LTO Ultrium 5 Data Cartridges. Ultrium 5 tape drives can read and write LTO
Ultrium 4 Data Cartridges at original Ultrium 4 capacities, and can also read LTO Ultrium 3 Data
Cartridges with improved data rates. Ultrium 4 tape drives can read and write LTO Ultrium 4 Data
Cartridges. Ultrium 4 tape drives can read and write LTO Ultrium 3 Data Cartridges at original Ultrium 3
capacities, and can also read LTO Ultrium 2 Data Cartridges with improved data rates. Ultrium 3 Tape
Drives can read and write LTO Ultrium 3 Data Cartridges. Ultrium 3 Tape Drives can read and write LTO
Ultrium 2 Data Cartridges at original Ultrium 2 capacities, and can also read LTO Ultrium 1 Data
Cartridges with improved data rates of up to 20 MB/second native data transfer rate (40 MB/second
with 2:1 compression).

Note: Ultrium 4 tape drives cannot read or write to Ultrium 1 tapes. Ultrium 5 tape drives cannot read
or write to Ultrium 1 or Ultrium 2 tapes. Ultrium 6 tape drives cannot read or write to Ultrium 3,
Ultrium 2 and Ultrium 1 tapes. Ultrium 7 tape drives cannot read or write to Ultrium 4, Ultrium 3,
Ultrium 2 and Ultrium 1 tapes. Ultrium 8 tape drives cannot read or write Ultrium 6, Ultrium 5, Ultrium
4, Ultrium 3, Ultrium 2 and Ultrium 1 tapes.

Supported cartridges include:

v LTO Ultrium 12000 GB Data Cartridge (Ultrium 8)
v LTO Ultrium 6000 GB Data Cartridge (Ultrium 7)
v LTO Ultrium 2500 GB Data Cartridge (Ultrium 6)
v LTO Ultrium 1500 GB Data Cartridge (Ultrium 5)
v LTO Ultrium 800 GB Data Cartridge (Ultrium 4)
v LTO Ultrium 400 GB Data Cartridge (Ultrium 3)
v Write-Once-Read-Many WORM Data Cartridge (Ultrium 3, Ultrium 4, Ultrium 5, Ultrium 6, Ultrium 7,
Ultrium 8)
v LTO Ultrium 200 GB Data Cartridge (Ultrium 2)
v 100 GB Data Cartridge (Ultrium 1; read only)
v LTO Ultrium Cleaning Cartridge

Important: Cartridges placed in the library must be labeled with the correct bar code labels. For
additional information, see “Using Ultrium Media” on page 139.

Product Description 11
Library Specifications
Physical Specifications
Table 6. Physical Specifications
Specification 2U library 4U library
Rack mount 87.6 mm (3.44 in), Rack mount 175.2 mm (6.9 in),
Height stand-alone 97.6 mm (3.84 in) stand-alone 185.2 mm (7.3 in)
Width 447.5 mm (17.6 in.) 447.5 mm (17.6 in.)
Rack mount 740 mm (29.13 in), Rack mount 740 mm (29.13 in),
Depth stand-alone 810 mm (31.9 in) stand-alone 810 mm (31.9 in)
Weight with 1 drive and without
media 15.59 kg (34.37 lbs.) 21.32 kg (47 lbs.)
Weight with media 20.67 kg (45.57 lbs.) 31.71 kg (69.9 lbs.)

Power Specifications
Table 7. Power Specifications
AC power voltage 100-127 VAC; 200-240 VAC (4 - 2 A)
Line frequency 50-60 Hz

Operation Specifications
Table 8. Operation Specifications: Ultrium 8
Library with
2U Library 4U Library
Ultrium 8 drive(s)
Maximum number of data cartridges: 24 Maximum number of data cartridges: 48
Maximum storage
Native: 288 TB Native: 576 TB
capacity
Compressed: 720 TB (2.5:1 compression) Compressed: 1440 TB (2.5:1 compression)
Number of slots 24 (including I/O Station) 48 (Including 3 I/O Station slots)
Sustained native
Ultrium 8 Half Height Drive: 300 MB/s
data transfer rate
Ultrium 8 Half Height Drive:
Drive types
Fibre Channel, SAS
8 Gb/s Fibre Channel
Interfaces
6 Gb/s SAS
*Host Interface Drive Transfer Rates may vary depending on host usage and interface utilization.

Table 9. Operation Specifications: Ultrium 7

Library with
2U Library 4U Library
Ultrium 7 drive(s)
Maximum number of data cartridges: 24 Maximum number of data cartridges: 48
Maximum storage
Native: 144 TB Native: 288 TB
capacity
Compressed: 360 TB (2.5:1 compression) Compressed: 720 TB (2.5:1 compression)
Number of slots 24 (including I/O Station) 48 (Including 3 I/O Station slots)
Sustained native
Ultrium 7 Drive: 300 MB/s
data transfer rate
Ultrium 7 Half Height Drive:
Drive types
Fibre Channel, SAS

12 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Table 9. Operation Specifications: Ultrium 7 (continued)
Library with
2U Library 4U Library
Ultrium 7 drive(s)
8 Gb/s Fibre Channel
Interfaces
6 Gb/s SAS
*Host Interface Drive Transfer Rates may vary depending on host usage and interface utilization.

Table 10. Operation Specifications: Ultrium 6

Library with
2U Library 4U Library
Ultrium 6 drive(s)
Maximum number of data cartridges: 24 Maximum number of data cartridges: 48
Maximum storage
Native: 60 TB Native: 120 TB
capacity
Compressed: 150 TB (2.5:1 compression) Compressed: 300 TB (2.5:1 compression)
Number of slots 24 (including I/O Station) 48 (Including 3 I/O Station slots)
Sustained native
Ultrium 6 Drive: 160 MB/s
data transfer rate
Ultrium 6 Half Height Drive:
Drive types
Fibre Channel, SAS
8 Gb/s Fibre Channel
Interfaces
6 Gb/s SAS
*Host Interface Drive Transfer Rates may vary depending on host usage and interface utilization.

Table 11. Operation Specifications: Ultrium 5

Library with
2U Library 4U Library
Ultrium 5 drive(s)
Maximum number of data cartridges: 24 Maximum number of data cartridges: 48
Maximum storage
Native: 36 TB Native: 72 TB
capacity
Compressed: 72 TB (2:1 compression) Compressed: 144 TB (2:1 compression)
Number of slots 24 (including I/O Station) 48 (Including 3 I/O Station slots)
Sustained native Ultrium 5 Full Height Drive: 140 MB/s
data transfer rate Ultrium 5 Half Height Drive: 140 MB/s
Ultrium 5 Full Height Drive:
Fibre Channel, SAS
Drive types
Ultrium 5 Half Height Drive:
Fibre Channel, SAS
8 Gb/s Fibre Channel
Interfaces
6 Gb/s SAS
*Host Interface Drive Transfer Rates may vary depending on host usage and interface utilization.

Table 12. Operation Specifications: Ultrium 4

Library with
2U Library 4U Library
Ultrium 4 drive(s)
Maximum number of data cartridges: 24 Maximum number of data cartridges: 48
Maximum storage
Native: 19.2 TB Native: 38.4 TB
capacity
Compressed: 38.4 TB (2:1 compression) Compressed: 75.2 TB (2:1 compression)
Number of slots 24 (including I/O Station) 48 (Including 3 I/O station slots)
Sustained native Ultrium 4 Full Height Drive: 120 MB/s
data transfer rate Ultrium 4 Half Height Drive: 120 MB/s

Product Description 13
Table 12. Operation Specifications: Ultrium 4 (continued)
Library with
2U Library 4U Library
Ultrium 4 drive(s)
Ultrium 4 Full Height Drive:
Drive types Fibre Channel, SAS
Ultrium 4 Half Height Drive: SAS, Fibre Channel
Ultrium 4 HH Fibre Drive V2 (8Gb/s)
Ultrium 4 HH SAS Drive V2 (6Gb/s)
Interfaces
4 Gb/s Fibre Channel
3 Gb/s SAS
*Host Interface Drive Transfer Rates may vary depending on host usage and interface utilization.

Table 13. Operation Specifications: Ultrium 3

Library with
2U library 4U library
Ultrium 3 drive(s)
Maximum number of data cartridges: 24 Maximum number of data cartridges: 48
Maximum storage
Native: 9.6 TB Native: 19.2 TB
capacity
Compressed: 19.2 TB (2:1 compression) Compressed: 38.4 TB (2:1 compression)
Number of slots 24 (including I/O Station) 48 (Including 3 I/O station slots.)
Ultrium 3 Full Height Drive: 80 MB/s
Sustained native
Ultrium 3 Half Height V2 Drive: 80 MB/s
data transfer rate
Ultrium 3 Half Height Drive: 60 MB/s
Ultrium 3 Full Height
Drive types Drive: SCSI, Fibre Channel
Ultrium 3 Half Height Drive: Serial Attached SCSI (SAS)
Ultra160 SCSI LVD
4 Gb/s Fibre Channel
Interfaces
Ultrium 3 HH SAS Drive V2 (6Gb/s)
3 Gb/s SAS

Environmental Specifications
Table 14. Environmental Specifications
Temperature
Operating 10° to 35° C (50° to 95° F)
Storage, without cartridges -30° to 60° C (-22° to 140° F)
Wet bulb, operating 26° C (79.0° F) maximum
Temperature shock immunity - maximum rate of change 10° C (18° F) per hour
Miscellaneous
Dust concentration less than 200 microgram/cubic meter
Maximum acoustical noise sound power levels LwAd in bels 6.6/6.8
Humidity
Operating 15% to 80% RH non-condensing
Storage, without cartridges 10% to 90% RH non-condensing

14 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Product Environment
The library is designed to operate in a general business environment.

The library meets the acoustical requirements for general business area category 2D. Category 2D states
that the library should be installed a minimum of 4 m (13 ft.) from a permanent work station.

To allow for service access, install the library a minimum of 0.9 m (3 ft.) from all obstacles.

The library is a precision computer peripheral. To ensure maximum longevity of your library, locate the
library away from dust, dirt, and airborne particulates:
v Keep the library away from high-traffic areas, especially if the floor is carpeted. Carpeting harbors dust
and people walking on the carpet can cause the carpet fibers and the dust to become airborne.
v Keep the library out of printer/copier rooms because of toner and paper dust. Additionally, do not
store paper supplies next to the library.
v Keep the library away from moving air caused by doorways, open windows, fans, and air
conditioners.

Ensure that the machine covers are always kept closed to minimize any contamination from airborne
particles.

Supported Device Drivers

The latest levels of device drivers can be downloaded by visiting www.Dell.com/support.

Note: The TL2000 and TL4000 libraries utilize the generic SCSI drivers in RHEL 4 and 5. Depending on
the ISV you are using, you will use either the sg or st driver. Please refer to your ISV documentation for
more information on which driver to use.

Product Description 15
16 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
User Interfaces
This library has two user interfaces.
v Operator Control Panel - located on the front panel of the library
v “Web User Interface” on page 20 - accessed via a web browser

Operator Control Panel

The Operator Control Panel operates in two basic modes.
v User Interaction mode - This mode is employed when a user is pushing buttons on the Operator
Control Panel.
v System Driven mode - This is the normal mode of operation. In this mode, the Operator Control Panel
displays status associated with the actions that were caused from commands issued via the drive's
internal (drive to library) serial interface.

When an Operator Control Panel button is pressed and released, the Operator Control Panel
automatically transitions to User Interaction mode. User Interaction mode will continue until 3 minutes
after a user stops pushing buttons, or the requested accessor action stops - whichever is longer. At which
time, the Operator Control Panel will return to System Driven mode.

If necessary, the Operator Control Panel automatically transitions to the System Driven mode. When this
occurs, the library must remember the previous function before the display mode changed. Therefore the
next button pressed only transitions the Operator Control Panel to the User Interaction mode from the
System Driven mode.

In case of the activated user security feature, the User Interaction mode is restricted to Login and
Monitor menu items, until a user logs in with a correct password.

Operator Control Panel Philosophy

Operator Control Panel operation must obey some basic rules. These rules of operation constitute a
philosophy.
v Any operational conflict between commands received over the host interface or the Web User Interface
and those entered via the Operator Control Panel will be avoided with a reservation mechanism on a
first-come, first-served basis. Any reservation by the Operator Control Panel is canceled by an Operator
Control Panel logout or a timeout, which cancels the User Interaction Mode.
v Library firmware will not allow a user to select an impossible request. Those situations will include,
but are not limited to:
– Moving a cartridge from any source to a full slot
– Moving a cartridge from an empty slot
– Loading a cartridge from any source to a full drive
– Unloading a cartridge from an empty drive
v Any error detected by the library or drive controller and not recoverable through predetermined
firmware algorithms will be considered as fatal. An error code will be displayed on the Operator
Control Panel display and the error LED will become illuminated. The error code remains on the
Operator Control Panel until a push button is pressed, which causes the Operator Control Panel to
return to the Home Screen.
v Numeric error codes are only used for unrecoverable, fatal errors, otherwise text status messages are
displayed.

17
Power-ON Display
When the library powers ON or resets, it goes through several internally controlled processes that allow
it to get initialized and running. These processes are called Power-On-Self-Test (POST). During the POST
the Operator Control Panel displays information that may be meaningless until POST is complete. When
the POST is finished, the library displays the Startup screen, then the Home screen.

The Startup screen is the first screen that appears after powering ON the library. It contains the following
information:
v Firmware Rev: the current level of library firmware
v Drives: the total number of drives that the library can support
v Magazines: the total number of magazines in the library
v I/O Station: the current status of the I/O Station

While the library is going through its power up cycle you can monitor the state of the library via the
OCP; however, you may not be able to make any configuration changes until the unit has completed its
initialization routine. Attempts to make changes will be ignored.

Startup
Firmware Rev: 120R
Drive: 1
Magazines: 2
I/O Station: empty

Idle Random

TL4000

Accessor Drive 1 2
a77ug187

Idle Rand

Figure 8. Power-ON screens

Note about the Front Panel LEDs

All LEDs are updated during power ON and reset sequences. Upon power ON or software reset, the
library illuminates all LEDs as soon as POST allows. When initialization starts, all LEDs are extinguished
and the Ready/Activity LED flashes at a rate of approximately one second per cycle. When the
mechanical initialization is complete, the Ready/Activity LED will stop flashing and be constantly
illuminated.

If a library failure occurs, the Ready/Activity LED will turn OFF and the Error LED illuminates. The
Operator Control Panel will also display an appropriate error code to help identify the failure.

The following are additional operational details of LEDs:

v The Ready/Activity LED is illuminated any time the unit is powered ON and functional. The
Ready/Activity LED blinks whenever there is library or drive activity. This LED will also blink when
the unit is OFFLINE.
v The Clean LED is illuminated when either a cleaning requested or a cleaning required flag has been
issued by the drive. The LED is turned off after a successful drive cleaning operation.
v The Attention LED indicates one of the following conditions.

18 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Problem Action Required
Bad media 1. Go to Monitor > Inventory to locate the defective
cartridge.
2. Move the defective cartridge to the I/O Station.
(Operator Control Panel: Control > Move
Cartridges).
3. Open the I/O Station to remove the defective
cartridge. (Operator Control Panel: Control > Open
I/O).
Drive sled issues Do one of the following:

- Install a drive sled (see “Removing/Installing/Adding

a Tape Drive Sled” on page 181).

- Modify or resubmit Logical Library setting (Operator

Control Panel: Configure > Logical Libraries or Web
User Interface: Configure Library > Logical Libraries).

- Restore defaults (Operator Control Panel: Configure >

Restore Defaults or Web User Interface: Configure
Library > Restore Defaults).
Redundant power supply failed Complete the following steps:

1. Replace the failed power supply (see “Replacing a

Power Supply” on page 186).

2. Cycle library power.

Power supply fan failure Replace the power supply.

v The Error LED is illuminated when there is an unrecoverable (i.e. hard) drive or library failure. This
will happen at the same time the hard error message is displayed on the screen and the LED will
remain lit until the error state is resolved.

Note: From the Operator Control Panel, run Service > Library Verify. If Library Verify runs without
error, the Error LED turns off. If the error persists, recycle power.

Input Modes
There are several ways to enter values in the different menu items. These values are selectable predefined
values, toggle values (for example, ON/OFF) and numerical values like network addresses.

Selecting Predefined Values

1. To set the predefined values, press the SELECT button to select the menu item.
2. Using the UP and DOWN buttons, select one of the various predefined values for that item.
3. As soon as the Operator Control Panel display shows the correct value, press the SELECT button to
apply the value.

Toggling Values
Toggle values are used to switch between two different states like ON and OFF.
1. After navigating to the menu item, press the SELECT button to select the menu item.
2. Using the UP and DOWN buttons, select one of the various predefined states for that item.
3. Press the SELECT button to apply the new state.

Entering Numerical Values

Numerical values are needed for network addresses, password entries and other configuration entries.

User Interfaces 19
1. After navigating to the menu item, the current value is displayed and the cursor highlights the first
digit of the value that can be changed.
2. For each digit to be changed in the value:
a. Use the UP and DOWN buttons to increment / decrement the digit.
b. Press the SELECT button to highlight the next editable digit.
3. Press the SELECT button at the last digit to apply the complete entry, or press the CANCEL button to
cancel the whole edit process and maintain the original value.

Power ON/OFF
Part of the Operator Control Panel is the Power ON/OFF button. If the library is powered ON, pressing
this button for 4 seconds will initiate a controlled power down of the library (soft landing). The following
operations will take place before the library shuts down completely:
v The display indicates with an appropriate message that the shutdown is in progress.
v The library controller finishes all ongoing library and drive activities.
v The accessor is moved to its home position.
v The library controller switches OFF the power supply's secondary side.

Note: The shutdown process may be aborted by releasing the button before 4 seconds has passed.

Web User Interface

Many of the same operations performed from the Operator Control Panel can also be performed remotely
using the Web User Interface.

The Web User Interface lets you monitor and control your library from any terminal connected to your
network or through the World Wide Web (WWW). The Web User Interface hosts a dedicated, protected
Internet site that displays a graphical representation of your library.

For static IP Addresses only: After establishing a connection to the library, open any HTML browser and
enter the IP address of the library. To configure the Web User Interface, you must first set the IP address
using the Operator Control Panel. Refer to "Configure: Network" on page 5-23 or "Configure Library:
Network" on page 5-45.

Login
Important: Some options of the Web User Interface take the library OFFLINE. This inactive mode can
interfere with host-based application software, causing data loss. Make sure the library is idle before
attempting to perform any remote operations that will take the library OFFLINE.

To login, select the Role type and enter the correct password. The TL4000/TL2000 RMU screen shows
Welcome : User, superuser, admin, or service after a successful login. The user can log out at any time by
clicking on the "logout" text located in to top right corner of the RMU page.
v The User only has access to Monitor Library menus.The User account has only viewing privileges to
the unit, not able to make any configuration changes.
v Superuser - The Superuser has access to the Monitor Library and Manage Library sections.
v The Admin user has access to all menus except those restricted to Service only.The Admin account has
access to monitor, configure and run unit diagnostics (only exception is the advanced diagnostics
reserved for service personnel only).
v Service personnel have access to all menus. The Service account has all the same privileges as the
Admin account with the addition of advanced unit diagnostics.

20 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 Note: User and Superuser accounts must be enabled by the library administrator. These accounts are
disabled by default.

Note: Passwords are case-sensitive.

Use the following password for logging in as an Admin user: secure

Each level affects which areas you have access to and what actions you can initiate from those areas.

For DHCP, use the Operator Control Panel to determine the IP Address assigned to your library. Navigate
to Monitor > Library > Identity. Scroll down to IP Address and make note of the address. Enter the IP
Address in your internet browser address field to access your library with the Web User Interface.

For IPv4 or Dual Stack IPv4 + IPv6, enter your library's static IP Address using the 0.0.0.0 format (four
octets).

For IPv6, enter your library's static IP Address or Router Assigned IP Address using the following format:
http://[0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0]. To determine your Router Assigned IP Address, navigate to Monitor > Library >
Network on the Operator Control Panel.

If the dual IP stack is enabled (IPv4 + IPv6), IPv6 addresses cannot be configured in the OCP (Operator
Control Panel) and must be configured through the Web User Interface. IPv6 addresses can only be
configured in the OCP if the IPv6-only stack is enabled. In the case where the dual stack is enabled, the
IPv6 address must be configured through the web interface (either using the IPv4 address or a known
other IPv6 address).

a77ug070

Figure 9. Web User Interface login page

System Status
The System Status screen is always present after login giving current status of the library.
a77ug080

Figure 10. 2U library System Status screen

User Interfaces 21
 a77ug089
Figure 11. 4U library System Status screen

Status icons indicate the following conditions.

v The green check mark indicates that the library is fully operational and that no user intervention is
required.
v The yellow exclamation point indicates that user intervention is necessary, but that the library is still
capable of performing operations. This condition can be caused by a media, library, redundant power
supply, power supply fan, or a drive sled problem. To determine which, view the System Status screen.
v The red X indicates that user intervention is required and that the library is not capable of performing
operations.
v If Auto Clean is enabled and a cleaning cartridge is not present, or if a cleaning cartridge is present,
but not in a reserved slot, Auto Clean status will show Chk Media/Rsvd Slot? and Status will show a
green check mark and the words Media Attention. The Auto Clean status disappears from the system
status screen once Auto Clean has been properly configured. You will get messages if the cleaning
media expires.

Figure 12. 4U library System Status screen showing media attention status

v The Power Supply Status will only appear if redundant power is being utilized with a 4U library, and
the library was manufactured after March 14, 2008. If a redundant power supply fails, the System
Status screen will appear as shown in Figure 13 on page 23.

22 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Figure 13. 4U library System Status screen showing a power supply failure

Note: If your library has -04 level redundant power supplies (see label on top of power supply), it is
normal for the one in “Standby” mode to turn its “Green” LED off. You can test this power supply by
pulling the power connector from the other “Active” power supply. The power supply that was in
“Standby” mode will now become “Active”, and its “Green” LED should light. If it doesn’t, replace it
(refer to “Replacing a Power Supply” on page 186).

If your library has -05 level redundant power supplies, the "Green" LED will be ON on both power
supplies. If both "Green" LEDs are not ON, replace the failed power supply (refer to “Replacing a
Power Supply” on page 186).

Web User Interface Help Pages

Each screen on the Web User Interface has an associated Help page. To access a Help page, click on Help
in the upper right corner of the screen. A new web page will open. Using the left navigation pane, select
the desired Help page. To close the Help page, click the red X in the upper right corner of the screen.

Logging out of the Web User Interface

To log out of the Web User Interface, click Logout in the upper right corner of the current screen.

Important: If you click the X in the upper right corner of your internet browser window, you will not log
out of the Web User Interface.

User Interfaces 23
24 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Installation Planning
Before installing your library, take time to review the following information.

Determining the Number of Logical Libraries

You can partition the library into as many logical libraries as there are drives in the library.

Basic Guidelines
v Each logical library must contain at least one drive.
v A library configuration of exactly one logical library equals the entire physical library.
v The library issues a warning to the user if media is moved across logical libraries.

Library Sharing
The library's default configuration allows a single application to operate the library through a single
control path. Often, it is advantageous to be able to share a single library between heterogeneous
(dissimilar) or homogeneous (similar) applications. Some applications (and some servers) do not allow for
sharing a library between systems. Configurations can be created that enable the library to process
commands from multiple heterogeneous applications and multiple homogeneous applications.

From the library's Web User Interface or Operator Control Panel, the following actions can be performed:
v Configure the library so that it is partitioned into separate logical libraries that independently
communicate with separate applications through separate control paths. This configuration requires no
special capabilities from the server or application. (For more information, see “Using Multiple Logical
Libraries for Library Sharing.”)
v Configure any single logical library (including the entire physical library) so that it is shared by two or
more servers that are running the same application. Depending on the capabilities of the server and
application, there are several ways to set up this type of configuration. Three typical ways include:
– Configuring one server (host) to communicate with the library through a single control path; all
other servers send requests to that server through a network.
– Configuring all of the servers to communicate with the library through a single, common control
path. This configuration is used in high-availability environments. Multi-initiator configurations are
only supported by certain adapters and independent software vendors (ISVs). Check with your ISV.
– Configuring a single logical library to communicate with multiple servers through multiple control
paths. This configuration requires that control paths be added (see “Using Multiple Control Paths”
on page 26).

Library configuration is not limited to the examples given above. Many configurations are possible, and
can be designed according to your business needs. For additional information, refer to your host
application documentation.

Using Multiple Logical Libraries for Library Sharing

Multiple logical libraries are an effective way for the library to simultaneously back up and restore data
from heterogeneous applications. For example, the library can be partitioned so that it processes:
v Commands from Application A (about Department X) in Logical Library 1
v Commands from Application B (about Department Y) in Logical Library 2

25
In this configuration, the storage slots and drives in each logical library are dedicated to that library and
are not shared among other libraries. Commands issued by the applications travel to the library through
two unique control paths. Thus, the data processing for:
v Department X is confined to the storage slots and drives in Logical Library 1
v Department Y is confined to the storage slots and drives in Logical Library 2

Using Multiple Control Paths

In addition to creating multiple logical libraries, any logical library can be configured to have more than
one control path. When configuring additional control paths, additional library sharing configurations
and availability options are made possible. Access to the logical library is on a first-come, first-served
basis and each control path for a logical library can accept commands while the library is in use by
another control path. By default, only the first drive in a logical library will be LUN-1 enabled.

For a particular logical library, you can enable as many control paths as there are drives in that logical
library.

Using Multiple Control Paths for Path Failover

Command failures and timeouts are costly. You want your library to run smoothly and efficiently. To
ensure continued processing, the library offers an optional path failover feature that enables the host
device driver to resend the command to an alternate control path for the same logical library. With
control path failover installed, the alternate control path can include another HBA, SAN, or library
control path drive. The device driver initiates error recovery and continues the operation on the alternate
control path without interrupting the application.

Path Failover is a combination of two previous features: Control Path Failover (key entered at the library
user interface) and Data Path Failover (key entered at the device driver interface). Go to “Minimum
firmware levels for common library features” on page v to find the minimum firmware levels for path
failover on your library.

The Path Failover feature can be installed by the customer.

For more information about using the path failover feature, see the Dell PowerVault TL4000 Failover
Configuration Guide, included with the library documentation if purchased at point of sale and with the
customer kit if purchased later.

Library Partitioning and Element Addressing

Library 4U systems with firmware versions of .80 and higher, and containing at least 2 drives, have the
ability to configure two logical libraries (create two partitions). This partitioning has been expanded with
the new library firmware and half-high drive integration. Now it is possible to configure 1, 2, 3 or 4
partitions in the 4U library. Additionally the 2U library can now be configured into one or two partitions.
Each library must contain at least one drive per logical library (partition). In a partitioned library, the
Operator Control Panel (OCP) only reports the status of logical library 1 in the main menu due to space
limitations. The user must navigate to the logical libraries status in the OCP to get the information on the
additional library partitions.

Partitioning of 2U Libraries
When two half height drives are installed in a 2U library, the library firmware will support partitioning
in the same way that the 4U supports partitioning with two full height drives today. The first partition
will contain the first magazine and the first drive. The second partition will contain the second magazine
and the second drive. The I/O station (if configured as I/O) will be shared, as is done with the
partitioned 4U library.

26 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
One full height drive is "Drive 1". When using half height drives, the first half height drive position will
be called "Drive 1", The second half height drive position will be called "Drive 2."

Partitioning of 4U Libraries

When one or more half height drives are added to a 4U library, the drive naming will change. Currently,
the first full height drive is "Drive 1" and the second full height drive is "Drive 2". When you consider
that each full height drive slot may contain one or two half height drives, there are four potential drives
in the space that used to occupy two. As a result, the first half height drive position, or the first full-high
drive position, will be called "Drive 1". The second half height drive position will be called "Drive 2". The
third half height drive position, or the second full height drive position, will be called "Drive 3". The
fourth half height drive position will be called "Drive 4".

Important: In a 4U library a full height drive sled may be installed in drive slot 1 (drive will occupy slot
1 and slot 2) or drive slot 3 (drive will occupy slot 3 and slot 4). A full height drive sled should never be
installed in drive slot 2 (drive will occupy slot 2 and slot 3).

Mixing of Drives
The library supports a mix of full height and half height drives in the same physical library and the same
logical library. They support a mix of drives in the same physical library and the same logical library.
They will also support a mix of SCSI, SAS, and Fibre Channel in the same physical library and the same
logical library; however, mixing drive interface types in the same logical library is not recommended.

Important: Drives that do not share a common media type cannot be mixed in the same logical library.
For instance, Gen 4 and Gen 7 drives cannot use the same media and so they cannot be mixed. LTO 4
media cannot be read on an LTO 7 drive.

Configuration of a 1 - Partition System

A one partition system configured for a 4U library contains any and all drives present in any drive
positions, and it will contain all four magazines.

When configured with one logical partition, the Element Address assignments will be as follows: DTE
assignments will be as shown in Figure 14.

STE assignments:
v Logical Library 1: Slot1 through 23 4096 (0x1000) through 4118 (0x1016) as shown in Figure 17 on page
29

Drive 4 Drive 4
Element Address Element Address
Drive 2 259 Drive 3 259 Magazine Magazine
Element Address Element Address
Drive 3 Drive 3 2 4
257 258
Element Address Element Address
258 258
Drive 2 Drive 2
Element Address Element Address Magazine Magazine
Drive 1 Drive 1 257 257 1 3
Element Address Element Address
a77ug161

Drive 1 Drive 1
256 256
Element Address Element Address
256 256 Front side

Figure 14. Configuration of a one - partition system

Configuration of a 2 - Partition System

A two partition system must have at least two drives installed. One drive must be installed in either
drive position 1 or drive position 2, and another drive must be installed in either drive position 3 or
Installation Planning 27
drive position 4. Partition 1 contains any drives in drive position 1 and drive position 2. Partition 1 will
also contain magazine 1 and magazine 2. Partition 2 contains any drives in drive position 3 and drive
position 4. Partition 2 will also contain magazine 3 and magazine 4.

When configured with two logical partitions, the Element Address assignments will be as follows: DTE
assignments will be as shown in Figure 15.

STE assignments
v Logical Library 1: Slot 1 through slot 21 4096 (x1000) through 4116 (0x1014)
v Logical Library 2: Slot 22 through slot 45 4096 (x1000) through 4019 (0x1017)

Drive 4 Drive 4
Element Address Element Address
Drive 2 257 Drive 3 257 Magazine Magazine
Element Address Element Address
Drive 3 Drive 3 2 4
256 256
Element Address Element Address
256 256
Drive 2 Drive 2
Element Address Element Address Magazine Magazine
Drive 1 Drive 1 257 257 1 3
Element Address Element Address

a77ug162
Drive 1 Drive 1
256 256
Element Address Element Address
256 256 Front side

Figure 15. Configuration of a two - partition system

Configuration of a 3 - Partition System

A three partition system must have at least three drives installed. A drive must be installed in drive
position 1, another drive must be installed in drive position 2, and another drive must be installed in
either drive position 3 or drive position 4. Partition 1 will contain the first drive and the first magazine.
Partition 2 will contain the second drive and the second magazine. Partition 3 will contain any drives in
drive position 3 and drive position 4. Partition 3 will also contain magazine 3 and magazine 4.

STE assignments
v Logical Library 1: Slot 1 through slot 9 4096 (x1000) through 4104 (0x1008)
v Logical Library 2: Slot 10 through slot 21 4096 (x1000) through 4107 (0x100B)
v Logical Library 3: Slot 22 through slot 45 4096 (x1000) through 4119 (0x1017)

Drive 4
Element Address
Drive 3 257 Magazine Magazine
Element Address 2 4
256 Drive 3
Element Address
256
Drive 2 Drive 2
Element Address Element Address Magazine Magazine
256 256 1 3
a77ug163

Drive 1 Drive 1
Element Address Element Address
256 256 Front side

Figure 16. Configuration of a three - partition system

Configuration of a 4 - Partition System

A four partition system must have four drives. Each partition contains one drive and one magazine.

When configured with four logical partitions, the Element Address assignments will be as follows: DTE
assignments will be as shown in Figure 17 on page 29.

28 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
STE assignments
v Logical Library 1: Slot 1 through slot 9 4096 (x1000) through 4104 (0x1008)
v Logical Library 2: Slot 10 through slot 21 4096 (x1000) through 4107 (0x100B)
v Logical Library 3: Slot 22 through slot 33 4096 (x1000) through 4107 (0x100B)
v Logical Library 4: Slot 34 through slot 45 4096 (x1000) through 4107 (0x100B)

Drive 4
Element Address
256 Magazine Magazine
Drive 3 2 4
Element Address
256
Drive 2
Element Address Magazine Magazine
256 1 3

a77ug164
Drive 1
Element Address
256 Front side

Figure 17. Configuration of a four - partition system

SCSI Element Addressing

Every logical library starts at the first drive slot with the current assigned element start address (default
value 256). It will be incremented from the bottom to the top slots for every drive slot. There is one
exception to this addressing scheme to accommodate libraries currently in the field. A 4U library
containing only full height drives will continue to have the addresses assignments 256 and 257, thus
causing no interruptions to their operation. Drive slots will still be incremented by 1 for each drive slot
position.

Note: Exchanging drives with different form factors will result in the library needing to be reconfigured.

4U Unit with only FH drives

(1 logical library)

SCSI Element Slot

4
257
3
2
256
1

4U Unit with FH and HH drives

(1 logical library)
SCSI Element Slot
4
258
3
a77ug165

257 2
256 1

Figure 18. Examples of SCSI element addressing

The SCSI specification does not allow gaps in the SCSI element addressing. Special handling is needed
for empty drive slots to fulfill the specification. Also temporarily removed drives need to have their
addresses preserved to not confuse the attached host and host application. Generally only drives which
are currently physically available or temporarily removed are reported. Empty (unused) slots located at
the bottom or the top should not be reported, with an exception in case of a “removed” condition. A

Installation Planning 29
drive slot which does not contain a drive, and has a position between used slots, needs to be reported as
a SCSI element. To signal the host application that this slot is not usable, its ACCESS bit will be disabled.

Note: When reducing the number of drives in your library, update the Logical Library configuration.
This will remove the Attention LED on the front panel and the exclamation mark on the Home screen
indicating that a drive is missing.

Updating the Logical Library configuration will also update the drive element addressing and drive
numbering. Replacing LTO half height drives with full height drives may require you to execute Restore
Factory Defaults to correctly update the drive element addressing and drive numbering. See “Configure
Library: Save/Restore Configuration” on page 128.

Logical Unit Number (LUN) Scanning

The library uses a single SCSI or Loop ID per drive and dual LUNs to control the tape drive (LUN 0) and
library accessor (LUN 1). The library requires a Host Bus Adapter (HBA) that supports LUN scanning. If
it is not enabled, your host system will not scan beyond LUN 0 and will fail to discover the library. It
will only see the tape drive.

Important: Some HBAs, such as RAID controllers, do not support LUN scanning.

Host Interfaces
The 2U library and the 4U library can be attached to servers using the following interfaces:
v SCSI (LVD Ultrium 160)
v Serial Attached SCSI (SAS)
v Fibre Channel
Table 15. Host Drive Interface Support
Drive SCSI (LVD Ultra 160) SAS FC
Ultrium 3 FH X X
Ultrium 3 HH X*
Ultrium 3 HH v2 X*
Ultrium 4 FH X* X
Ultrium 4 HH X* X
Ultrium 4 HH v2 X* X
Ultrium 5 HH X* X
Ultrium 6 HH X* X
Ultrium 7 HH X* X
Ultrium 8 HH X* X
Note: * = Dual Port SAS

SCSI Interface
Note: Although the LVD hardware in the library is capable of operating in single-ended (SE) mode, SE
operation is not recommended.

The library supports SCSI LVD attachments by using SCSI cables with 68-pin, HD-connectors. SCSI
adapters must be properly terminated.

30 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Before installing the SCSI cables, inspect all cables for damage. Do not install a cable if it is damaged.
Report the damage immediately by contacting Dell customer care.

The maximum allowable length of your bus cabling depends on the type of SCSI bus that you use (LVD).
v For a server with an LVD SCSI bus:
– Use a maximum system-to-device cable length of 10 m (33 ft) when attaching to the host interface
board (SCSI) and one or two daisy-chained drives.
– Use a maximum system-to-device cable length of 5 m (17 ft) when attaching to the host interface
board (SCSI) and three to six daisy-chained drives.

Note: For maximum performance, it is recommended to have a maximum of one drive per SCSI
bus.
– Only use the maximum system-to-device cable length of 25 m (82 ft) when attaching directly to one
device (a point to point interconnection).

Note: Daisy-chaining is NOT recommended due to potential issues with SCSI bus performance, SCSI
cables/connectors, and host bus adapters.

Physical Characteristics of the SCSI Interface

The library operates as a set of SCSI-3 devices. The Ultrium Tape Drives attach to servers using an LVD
Ultra160 SCSI interface. Each SCSI drive sled uses shielded, HD68-pin connectors, and can attach directly
to a 2-byte-wide SCSI cable.

Any combination of up to two initiators (servers) and up to four targets (devices) is allowed on a single
SCSI bus if the following conditions are met:
v The SCSI bus is terminated properly at each end
v Cable restrictions are followed according to the SCSI-3 specification

Under the SCSI-3 protocol, this type of attachment allows cable lengths of up to 25 m (81 ft) with the
appropriate cable and terminator. The table below gives the maximum bus length between terminators
for the LVD interface.
Table 16. Maximum bus length between terminators
Type of Interconnection Maximum Bus Length Between Terminators (in meters)
Point-to-point (1 server and 1 drive) 25
Multi-drop/daisy-chain (1 server and multiple
12 (LVD)
drives)
Note: The maximum bus lengths stated in this table include the internal length of the bus.

For maximum performance, multiple SCSI buses may be required (see “Using Multiple SCSI Buses” on
page 32), and Ultrium Tape Drives must be the only target devices that are active on the bus.

Note: Daisy-chaining is NOT recommended due to potential issues with SCSI bus performance, SCSI
cables/connectors, and host bus adapters.

Note: For maximum performance, the quantity of tape drives that you can attach to one SCSI bus is
limited, and is based on the type of bus that you have and the amount of data compression achieved.
Ultra160 SCSI buses have a bandwidth of 160 MB per second. The table below lists the types of SCSI
buses and gives the recommended maximum quantity of drives that you can attach.

Installation Planning 31
Table 17. Recommended maximum quantity of drives per SCSI bus
Type of Drive Ultra 160 SCSI Bus
LVD Ultrium 3 1 drive at 2:1 compression

Using Multiple SCSI Buses

The library has two SCSI connectors for each tape drive in the library. Each drive can be daisy-chained
using a SCSI bus jumper.

Note: Daisy-chaining is NOT recommended due to potential issues with SCSI bus performance, SCSI
cables/connectors, and host bus adapters.

Removal of any jumpers will create a SCSI bus for each drive installed in your library for attachment to
multiple servers or to multiple SCSI adapter cards on one server. Remember that each SCSI bus must be
terminated. Multiple SCSI buses may be required for maximum performance, depending on the
application and data compression ratio. Note, however, that library (Medium Changer) control is required
on at least one SCSI bus.

The Medium Changer device is required to be addressed via LUN 1 of the lowest-numbered drive
position of each logical library. The Medium Changer device may additionally be addressed via LUN 1 of
other drives in any logical library.

Any bus containing a Medium Changer device via LUN 1 of a drive is referred to as a control and data
path. Any other bus is referred to as a data path. For information about control paths, see “Using
Multiple Control Paths” on page 26.

Terminating the Bus

The SCSI bus and all of the wires in the SCSI cable must be properly terminated according to the SCSI
standard.

You can plug an external terminator into one of the SCSI connectors. A terminator must be installed on
the last device on each end of a string of multiple devices. A terminator is included with each SCSI
Ultrium Tape Drive.

SCSI Differential - LVD

LVD tape devices support a bus length of 25 meters (82 ft.) point-to-point, and 12 meters (39 ft.) using
multi-drop interconnection (daisy-chaining). For each daisy-chained device, the maximum cable length
must be reduced by 0.5 meters (1.6 ft).

Important: A faster bus does not imply that an attached device will support that data rate, but that
multiple devices can operate on the bus at that maximum speed. For a detailed table of SCSI terms and
related specifications, refer to the SCSI Trade Association Web site at http://www.scsita.org/terms/
scsiterms.html. To ensure best performance, if possible, avoid daisy-chaining.

SAS Interface
A drive sled with a SAS (Serial Attached SCSI) interface can be linked directly to controllers. SAS is a
performance improvement over traditional SCSI because SAS enables multiple devices (up to 128) of
different sizes and types to be connected simultaneously with thinner and longer cables; its full-duplex
signal transmission supports up to 6.0 Gb/s. The SFF-8088 SAS connectors on the Ultrium 5 and later
tape drives are compatible with SAS-1 or SAS-2 cables. The SFF-8088 SAS connectors on the Ultrium 3
and Ultrium 4 tape drives are compatible with SAS-1 cables. In addition, SAS drives can be hot-plugged.

SAS drives will auto-negotiate speed. There are no configurable topologies thus no feature switches
associated with SAS. The SAS Ultrium 3 and Ultrium 4 half height drive sleds are single ported and can
only be attached to one host. The Ultrium 4 and 5 full height, and the Ultrium 6, 7, and 8 half height

32 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
drives are dual ported, and are attached to a maximum of two hosts. Sharing between these two hosts is
limited to active/passive cluster failover. LAN-free drive sharing is not supported. Ultrium 3 and Ultrium
4 SAS drive sleds use the SFF-8088 connection at the drive sled end and SFF-8088 or SFF-8470 at the host
adapter end.

Fibre Channel Interface

Fibre Channel allows for an active intelligent interconnection scheme, called a Fabric, to connect devices.
Everything between the ports on Fibre Channel is called the Fabric. The Fabric is most often a switch or
series of switches that takes the responsibility for routing.

The library allows the selection of the following Fibre channel port behaviors:
v LN Port: (default setting) - an automatic configuration that tries arbitrated loop first, then switched
fabric
v L Port - arbitrated loop
v N Port - point to point protocol in a switched fabric topology

Cables and Speeds

Ultrium 3 and later Fibre Channel tape drives use LC duplex fiber optics cables.

The maximum distances that the library supports on a Fibre Channel link is determined by the link
speed, the type of fiber (50-micron or 62.5-micron), and the device to which the library is attached.

If the library attaches to an HBA (Host Bus Adapter), refer to the distances that are supported by the
HBA. If the library attaches to a switch, the supported distances are:
v For a multi-mode 50-micron cable:
– 1-Gbit link speed = up to 500 m (1640 ft)
– 2-Gbit link speed = up to 300 m (984 ft)
– 4-Gbit link speed = up to 175 m (574 ft)
– 8-Gbit link speed = up to 150 m (492 ft)
v For a multi-mode 62.5-micron cable:
– 1-Gbit link speed = up to 300 m (984 ft)
– 2-Gbit link speed = up to 90 m (295 ft)
– 4-Gbit link speed = up to 50 m (164 ft)
– 8-Gbit link speed = up to 21 m (68 ft)

Note: Minimum distance for both 50 micron and 62.5 micron is 2 m (6 ft).

The library uses 50-micron cables internally. Therefore, you must use a 50-micron cable to attach to the
library's port. To attach to a 62.5-micron SAN, you must attach the 50-micron cable to an active port, such
as a port on a switch.

Using Zoning to Isolate Devices and Enhance Security

For security reasons, it is important to limit the devices that a server or servers can recognize or access.
Also, some performance configurations and SAN configurations can result in a device being seen
multiple times from the same server. For example, if you have two HBAs from the same server connected
to an Ultrium Tape Drive in the library, the drive will be detected and appear as two logical devices. That
is, there will be two special files for one physical device. Zoning can address these issues.

Zoning allows you to partition your SAN into logical groupings of devices so that each group is isolated
from the other and can only access the devices in its own group. Two types of zoning exist: hardware
zoning and software zoning. Hardware zoning is based on physical fabric port number. Software zoning
is defined with a World Wide Node Name (WWNN) or World Wide Port Name (WWPN). While zoning

Installation Planning 33
can be reconfigured without causing an outage, some zoning configurations can become complicated. The
advantage of the library's WWNN implementation is that you can avoid the exposure of introducing
zoning errors because you do not have to change the zoning configuration if a drive needs service or
replacement.

Sharing on a Storage Area Network

With Storage Area Network (SAN) components, the possibilities for connecting multiple systems and
multiple drives have increased. Not all software and systems are designed to share drives. Before you
install a drive that would allow two systems to share it, check that the systems and their software
support sharing. If your software does not support sharing, note that Fibre Channel switches have a
zoning capability to form a SAN partition. For systems that do not cooperate, use zoning to prevent the
systems from sharing the same drive. You can remove zoned partitions as you upgrade software and
system levels.

34 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Installation and Configuration
Note: Review the information in "Installation Planning" before installing your library.

To install a desktop or rack mounted 2U library or 4U library, perform the procedures in this chapter in
the order they are presented.

Using the Library Configuration Form

Before beginning the installation and configuration of your library, make a copy of the Appendix G,
“Library Configuration Form,” on page 239. Enter library information (such as serial numbers, types of
drives, etc.) and configuration settings on the Library Configuration Form and store in a safe location for
future reference. Be sure to update this form any time changes are made to your library hardware or
configuration.

Installing Your Library

Complete these procedures to install your library hardware.
1. “Choosing a Location.”
2. “Unpacking the Library” on page 36.
3. “Verifying the shipment” on page 36.
4. “Installing the Library Foot Pads (for Desktop Installation ONLY)” on page 37.
5. “Removing and Storing the Shipping Lock” on page 38.
6. “Rackmounting the Library (for Rack Installation ONLY)” on page 40.
7. “Connecting the Host Interface Cable” on page 50.
8. “Connecting a Power Cord” on page 52.

Choosing a Location
Choose a location that meets the following criteria:
Table 18. Location criteria
Criteria Definition
Room temperature 10° - 35° C (50° - 95° F )
Note: If the temperature in the room where the library will be installed varies by 15° C (30°
F) from the room where the library was stored, allow the library to acclimate to the
surrounding environment for at least 12 hours before unpacking it from the shipping
container.
Power source v AC power voltage: 100-127 VAC; 200-240 VAC (4 - 2 A)
Note: The 4U library requires two separate power sources to implement redundant
power.
v Line frequency: 50-60 Hz

Place the library near an AC outlet. The AC power cord is the product's main AC
disconnect device and must be easily accessible at all times. Two separate power sources
must be available for redundant power.
Air quality The library should be placed in an area with minimal sources of particulate contamination.
Avoid areas near frequently used doors and walkways, stacks of supplies that collect dust,
printers, and smoke-filled rooms. Excessive dust and debris can damage tapes and tape
drives.
Humidity 15-80 % RH non-condensing

35
Table 18. Location criteria (continued)
Criteria Definition
Clearance v Back: Minimum of 15.4 cm (6 inches)
v Front: Minimum of 30.8 cm (12 inches)
v Sides: Minimum of 5.08 cm (2 inches)
Rack requirements Standard 19-inch rack with:
v 2U (88.90 mm/3.5 in.) of clearance for a 2U library
v 4U (177.8 mm/7 in.) of clearance for a 4U library

Rackmounting the library is optional.

Unpacking the Library

1. Clear a work surface to unpack the library.
2. Open the shipping container and carefully remove the shipping materials from the top of the library.
Remove the accessory package and set it aside.

Note: Once the drive is unpacked, save and store the packaging materials for future moves or
shipping.
3. Lift the library out of the carton and remove the bag from the library. Remove the foam cushion from
the back of the library. Save the packaging materials for future use.

Important: Do not place the library on the front panel or the rear panel as this may damage the
library. The display should NOT be touched during the removal of the unit from the packaging.
4. Remove all clear plastic protective sheets from the library.
a77ug194

Figure 19. Removing the plastic protective sheets from the library

Verifying the shipment

Verify that the following items are included in your library shipment:
v With every library:
– Power cord
– Bar code labels
– Foot pads (for desktop installation)
v With every library that contains a SCSI drive:
– SCSI terminator (one per SCSI drive)
– SCSI library-to-host cable (if ordered by customer)
v With every library that contains a Fibre Channel drive:
– Fibre Channel library-to-host/switch cable (if ordered by customer)

36 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
v With every library that contains a SAS drive:
– SAS library-to-host cable (if ordered by customer)
v Rack Mount Kit

Important: If your library did not contain preinstalled drives, then install them now. Refer to
“Removing/Installing/Adding a Tape Drive Sled” on page 181 for instructions on installing your tape
drives.

Installing the Library Foot Pads (for Desktop Installation ONLY)

If you intend to install your library in a rack, skip this step and proceed to “Removing and Storing the
Shipping Lock” on page 38.

Important: Operating your library on a flat surface without foot pads may damage your library or cause
it not to function properly.

Six foot pads must be installed on the bottom of the library before the library can be used as a desktop
unit.

To install the library foot pads:

1. Being very careful, lay the library on its side.
2. Peel the adhesive from the back of each foot pad.
3. Install the foot pads on the bottom of the library enclosure by pressing each foot into one of the six
areas (▌1▐) as shown in the figure below.

Installation and Configuration 37

 1

a77ug085

Figure 20. Installing foot pads on the bottom of the library enclosure

4. Carefully return the library to an upright position.

Important: Do not place any objects on top of the library.

Removing and Storing the Shipping Lock

Important: The shipping lock, which prevents the library accessor from moving during shipment, must
be removed before the library is powered ON.

The shipping lock is held in place with a label and is located in the top center of the library. After the
shipping lock is removed, it should be stored on the right side of the back panel of the library for future
use.

To remove and store the shipping lock:

1. Remove the blue label ( 2 ) that is securing the lock ( 1 ) to the top of the library, then remove the
lock (see Figure 21 on page 39).

38 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 1

a77ug018
Figure 21. Shipping lock and label
a77ug195

Figure 22. Removing the Shipping lock and label

2. Store the lock ( 1 ) and label ( 2 ) on the rear panel of the library as shown in Figure 23 on page 40.

Installation and Configuration 39

 1

a77ug019
Figure 23. Library shipping lock and label storage location on rear panel of library

Rackmounting the Library (for Rack Installation ONLY)

The 2U library and the 4U library are easily installed into a standard 19-inch rack system. The 2U library
requires 2U (3.5 in.) of space. The 4U library requires 4U (7 in.) of space.

If you are not rackmounting your library, skip this procedure and go to “Attaching the Library to a
Server” on page 50.

Important: A 2U library weighs 15.59 kg (34.37 lbs.) with one drive and without media. A 4U library
weighs 21.32 kg (47 lbs.) with one drive and without media.

To reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to the library:

1. observe local health and safety requirements and guidelines for manual material handling,
2. obtain adequate assistance to lift and stabilize the library during installation or removal, and
3. always remove all cartridges to reduce the overall weight of the library.

To install your library in a rack, perform the following steps.

1. Verify which rack kit was included in your shipment. Although there are two different rack kits, the
steps to install them are the same. After verifying which Rack Kit you received, see Figure 24 on page
41 for the installation steps.

40 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 4 8

2
1

a77ug275
5 7 6
Figure 24. Rack Kit A mounting hardware

a. Rack Kit A: The following parts make up Rack Kit A.

v Packaged in cardboard material:
– 2 rails (not shown) See Figure 27 on page 43 for a graphic of the rails.
– 2 mounting brackets (▌1▐ in Figure 24)
v Packaged in the small bag with no label:
– 1 Torx wrench (▌5▐ in Figure 24)
– 2 anchors (▌4▐)
– 2 countersunk screws for securing the anchors (▌6▐)
– 2 small countersunk screws for securing the tops of the mounting brackets (▌7▐)
– 2 large screws to secure the mounting brackets to the rack (▌8▐)
v Packaged in the small bag with "Round Hole" on the label: 9 screws to be used on racks with
round holes. (▌2▐)
v Packaged in the small bag with "Square Hole" on the label: 9 screws to be used on racks with
square holes. (▌3▐)

Note: Eight (8) screws are needed for the installation. One additional screw is provided for
security.

Installation and Configuration 41

 8

1 2

a77ug292
4 7 6 5
Figure 25. Rack Kit B mounting hardware

b. Rack Kit B: The following parts make up Rack Kit B.

v Packaged in plastic material:
– 2 rails (not shown) See Figure 28 on page 44 for a graphic of the rails.
– 2 mounting brackets with captive thumb screws (▌1▐ in Figure 25)
v Packaged in small bags and labeled with part numbers:
– 1 Torx wrench (▌5▐ in Figure 25)
– 2 anchors (▌4▐)
– 2 countersunk screws for securing the anchors (▌6▐)
– 2 small countersunk screws for securing the tops of the mounting brackets (▌7▐)
v Packaged in the small bag 4 rail mounting screws to be used on racks with round or square
holes (▌8▐) .
v 12 black plastic square plugs for covering rack holes for the 4U library application (▌2▐)
v 12 black plastic round plugs for covering rack holes for the 4U library application (▌3▐)
2. Determine the location in your rack for your library to be installed and, using a pencil, mark the
location on each vertical rail in your rack.

Note: A 2U library requires 2U (3.5 in.) of rack space. A 4U library requires 4U (7 in.) of rack space.

42 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 1 3 2

1 4 2

a77ug133
Figure 26. Examples of EIA units for round hole and square hole installations

▌1▐ Two EIA units for round hole and ▌3▐ Wide Gaps within the EIA unit
▌2▐ square hole installation ▌4▐ Narrow Gaps between EIA units

3. Using the screws for your rack type (round holes or square holes) and a #2 Phillips screwdriver and
ensuring that the flange on each rail points toward the other to form a shelf, secure one rail to each
side of the rack in your chosen rack location. Secure both the front and back of each rail to the rack.
The narrow end of each rail goes to the rear of the rack. The rails extend to fit a variety of rack
depths. Each rail requires 2U of rack space (▌1▐ in Figure 27).

1
a77ug009

Figure 27. Rear view of Rack Kit A which shows the narrow part of the rail located at the rear of the rack.

Installation and Configuration 43

 a77ug274
Figure 28. Rear view of Rack Kit B shows a different mounting method

44 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 a77ug196

a77ug271

Figure 29. Kit A (top picture with circles) showing rails installed. Rack Kit B is below showing the front view of this kit
installed.

Note: The rail must be fastened with the bottom of the rail parallel to floor and at the same level.
4. Using the Torx wrench included in your shipment, remove the screws (▌1▐) as shown in Figure 30 on
page 46. Screw locations on the 4U library are similar.

Installation and Configuration 45

 1

a77ug269
Figure 30. 2U library rack anchors and mounting brackets

5. Install the library rack anchors (▌2▐) as shown in Figure 30 on each side of your library using the
longest counter-sunk screws included in the rack kit.

a77ug270

Figure 31. Close-up view of mounting of the anchors on both sides of the library

46 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 a77ug267
Figure 32. 2U library side screws to remove

6. Install the library mounting brackets (▌1▐) as shown on the 2U library on each side of the library
using the screw that was removed from your library and an additional short, counter-sunk screw
included in the rack kit. (The 4U rack anchors and mounting brackets are similar.)
7. With library rack anchors and mounting brackets installed, slide the library onto the rails (as shown
in Figure 33 on page 48 and Figure 34 on page 48). Gently push the library into the rack to lock the
REAR anchors installed on each side of the library. When the library stops, the front mounting
brackets will be flush with the vertical rack rails.

Installation and Configuration 47

 a77ug267
Figure 33. Sliding the 2U library into the rack

a77ug266

Figure 34. Sliding the 4U library into the rack

8. Using a #2 Phillips screwdriver, secure the library to the rack (see Figure 35 on page 49 or Figure 36
on page 50) by placing a screw in the center hole of each mounting bracket and tightening them (▌1▐).

48 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 a77ug268
1

Figure 35. Securing the 2U library to the rack

Installation and Configuration 49

 a77ug265
1

Figure 36. Securing the 4U library to the rack

9. Install either the round or the square rack hole covers for the 4U library as shown in Figure 36. There
are 6 covers for each side for a total of 12.

Attaching the Library to a Server

The 2U library and the 4U library can be attached to servers using the following interfaces:
v SCSI (LVD Ultra 160)
v Fibre Channel
v Serial Attached SCSI (SAS)

Connecting the Host Interface Cable

To connect the host interface cables to the library:
1. It is recommended that you shut down and turn OFF the associated server. Turn OFF all attached
devices. Remove the power cables from the server and all attached accessories.

Important: Failure to remove the power cords from these devices before connecting the host interface
cable could result in damage to the library.
2. For a SCSI library, attach one end of the host interface cable to one of the connectors on the back
panel of the library (see ▌1▐ in Figure 37 on page 51). For a Fibre Channel library, attach one end of
the host interface cable to the connector on the back panel of the library (see ▌4▐ in Figure 38 on page
51). For a Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) connected library, attach the host end of the SAS cable to the
SAS HBA (see ▌2▐ in Figure 39 on page 51). Full high drives will have dual SAS connectors. Half high
drives will have one SAS connector. Unused SAS connectors do not need to be terminated.

50 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 1

a77ug017
4 3 2

Figure 37. Attaching a SCSI host interface cable to the 2U library

a77ug101
6 1 3 2 5

Figure 38. Attaching host interface cables to the 4U library. THE CONFIGURATION SHOWN IN THIS FIGURE IS
USED FOR EXAMPLE ONLY. THIS CONFIGURATION IS NOT SUPPORTED.

1 2 3
a77ug134

Figure 39. Attaching a SAS interface cable to the 2U library

3. Attach the other end of the host interface cable as follows:

v For a SCSI library, connect the host interface cable to the connector on the SCSI host bus adapter or
to the connector on the previous device on the SCSI bus. Attach the terminator ( 3 in Figure 37) to
the remaining SCSI connector on the back panel of the library, if the library is the last or only

Installation and Configuration 51

 device on the SCSI bus. Otherwise, attach one end of a SCSI cable to the remaining port and the
other end to the next device on the SCSI bus. Make sure that the last device on the SCSI bus is
properly terminated.

Note: Only cables and terminators specified for Ultra160 or Ultra320 use or labeled as Multi Mode
should be used.

Note: The host bus adapter should be LVD SCSI. A single-ended (SE) SCSI host bus adapter will
work, but will severely degrade performance, and limit cable length. If there are any SE devices on
the same SCSI bus, the entire SCSI bus will negotiate down to SE speed and severely degrade
performance.
v For a Fibre Channel library, connect the host interface cable to the host or to a switch.
v For a SAS library, connect the Host Interface Cable to the host HBA, using a direct SFF-8088
connection, or an interposer as required. Unused SAS connectors do not need termination.
4. Plug the network ethernet cable (▌2▐ in Figure 37 on page 51, ▌5▐ in Figure 38 on page 51, or ▌3▐ in
Figure 39 on page 51) into the ethernet port on the back panel of the library. If the ethernet connection
is directly attached to a server or laptop, a crossover ethernet cable may be required.

Note: It is the customer's responsibility to supply the crossover cable if one is required.

Connecting a Power Cord

Attention: This product can ONLY be used with an approved power cord for your specific geographic
region. Use of an unapproved power cord may result in:
v not meeting individual country specific safety requirements;
v overheating with potential personal injury and/or property damage; and
v a fracture resulting in the internal contacts being exposed, which potentially could subject the user to a
shock hazard.

For every power supply in the library, complete the following steps.
1. Remove the protective label from the power receptacle on your library.
a77ug197

Figure 40. Removing the protective label from the power receptacle

2. Plug one end of the power cord (▌6▐ in “Connecting the Host Interface Cable” on page 50) into each
power supply connector on the back panel of the library.
3. Plug the other end of each power cord into the nearest properly grounded power outlet. Use separate
power sources for each power supply for redundant power.
Attention: To disconnect all power from the library, remove the power cord from each outlet. The
power button removes power from portions of the library and the drives, but the power supplies still
have AC power at their inputs.
4. Remove the protective plastic on the exterior surfaces of the library.

52 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
5. Turn ON the library using the power button. Check the Operator Control Panel display to make sure
the library is receiving power. If it is not, check the power connections and your power source.
During the Power-On Self Test (POST), all four LEDs are illuminated briefly, followed by a flashing
Ready LED. When the initialization sequence is complete, the Home screen (see “Power-ON Display”
on page 18) will be displayed.

Configuring Your Library

Note: Review the information in "Installation Planning" before configuring your library.

The library can be configured using the Operator Control Panel and/or the Web User Interface. The
recommended method for configuring your library is using the Web User Interface.

For complete detailed configuration information on all of the functions available on your library using
both the Operator Control Panel and the Web User Interface, see “Operations” on page 75. For default
library settings, see “Configure: Save/Restore” on page 99

Choosing Your Configuration Method

If you choose to use the factory defaults for your library configuration, go to “Using Factory Defaults as
Your Configuration.”

If you choose to use the Web User Interface for configuring your library, go to “Configuring Your Library
using the Web User Interface.”

If you choose to use the Operator Control Panel for configuring your library, go to “Configuring Your
Library using the Operator Control Panel” on page 68.

Write down all library configuration settings on the Appendix G, “Library Configuration Form,” on page
239 for future reference.

Using Factory Defaults as Your Configuration

The table below shows the main default library settings. If you wish to use the defaults, no other changes
need to be made before using your library

Item Default Setting

Logical Libraries 1
Active Slots Maximum
I/O Slots Enabled
DHCP Enabled
Internet Protocol IPv4 Only
Bar Code Label Length 8
Library Mode Random
AutoClean Disabled
Encryption Application Managed Encryption (AME)

For a full list of factory defaults, see “Configure: Save/Restore” on page 99.

Configuring Your Library using the Web User Interface

To configure your library using the Web User Interface, complete the following procedures:
1. “Establishing Remote Access to Your Library” on page 54

Installation and Configuration 53

 2. “Logging on to the Web User Interface” on page 55
3. “Verifying/Updating Firmware” on page 56
4. “Choosing General Library Settings” on page 57
5. “Choosing the Number of Logical Libraries for Your Library” on page 58
6. “Entering Path Failover Feature Activation Key” on page 59
7. “Setting Up Encryption” on page 60
8. “Choosing Drive(s) Interface Identification/Settings” on page 61
9. “Entering Library Network Settings” on page 62
10. “Entering User Access Information using the Web User Interface” on page 64
11. “Entering Date and Time using the Web User Interface” on page 65
12. “Configuring Logs and Traces using the Web User Interface” on page 65
13. “Entering Email Notification Information using the Web User Interface” on page 66
14. “Configuring SNMP settings” on page 66
15. “Testing encryption configuration for Library Managed encryption” on page 68
16. “Restoring Factory Default Settings using the Web User Interface” on page 68
17. “Logging out of the Web User Interface” on page 23
18. “Setting the Operator Control Panel Access PIN using the Operator Control Panel” on page 98

Establishing Remote Access to Your Library

Static library network settings must be entered using the Operator Control Panel before the library can be
accessed remotely using the Web User Interface. If your system is serviced by DHCP (Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol) server, the network parameters will be automatically set. Once remote access has
been established, you can complete the configuration of your library using the Web User Interface.
1. Access the Configure menu using the Operator Control Panel.
a. From the screen that shows the library logo (Home screen), press either the UP or DOWN button
to get to the Main Menu.
b. Press the DOWN button to select Configure.
c. Press the SELECT button to display the Configure menu.
2. Press the DOWN button to highlight the Network menu.
3. Press the SELECT button to display the Network screen.
4. Select IP STACK, and press the SELECT button to highlight the Internet Protocol field.
a. Press the DOWN or UP button to scroll through the Internet Protocol options.
b. Press the SELECT button on the desired Internet Protocol.
If you select IPv6 protocol, the Configure Network menu will include options for Stateless
Autoconfig and Prefix length.
v Stateless Autoconfig:
– Press the DOWN button to highlight Stateless Autoconfig.
– Press the SELECT button to highlight the Stateless Autoconfig option field.
– Press the DOWN button to scroll through the Stateless Autoconfig options.
– Press the SELECT button to apply the option.
v Prefix Length:
– Press the DOWN button to highlight Prefix Length.
– Press the SELECT button to highlight the Prefix Length option field.
– Press the UP or DOWN buttons to scroll through the Prefix Length digits.
– Press the SELECT button to apply the Prefix Length digits.
5. If you do not want to select DHCP as your library network setting, skip this step and proceed to the
next step. If you want to select DHCP as your library network setting, complete the following steps:

54 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 a. Press the DOWN button to highlight DHCP.
b. Press the SELECT button to highlight the DHCP field.
c. Press the DOWN button to select ON.
d. Press the SELECT button to apply your selection.
e. Skip to Step 7.
6. Press the DOWN button to select IP Address. For IPv4 only, enter only an IPv4 address. For IPv6
only, enter only an IPv6 address. For IPv4 & IPv6, enter an IPv4 address and an IPv6 address.
a. Press the SELECT button to highlight the IP Address field.
b. Press the UP or DOWN button to select the digit(s) in the first octet of your library's IP Address.
c. Press the SELECT button to highlight the digit(s)in the next octet of your IP Address.
d. After entering the digits for the last octet, press the SELECT button to apply your entries.
7. Press the DOWN button to select Netmask. For IPv4, enter only an IPv4 Netmask address. For IPv6,
enter only an IPv6 Netmask address. For IPv4 & IPv6, enter both IPv4 and IPv6 Netmask addresses.
a. Press the SELECT button to highlight the Netmask field.
b. Press the UP or DOWN button to select the digit(s) in the first octet of your library's Netmask
address.
c. Press the SELECT button to highlight the digit(s) in the next octet of your library's Netmask
address.
d. After entering the digits for the last octet of your Netmask address, press the SELECT button to
apply your entries.
8. Press the DOWN button to select Gateway. For IPv4, enter only an IPv4 Gateway address. For IPv6,
enter only an IPv6 Gateway address. For IPv4 & IPv6, enter a Gateway address for both IPv4 and
IPv6.
a. Press the SELECT button to highlight the Gateway field.
b. Press the UP or DOWN button to select the digit(s) in the first octet of your library's Gateway
address.
c. Press the SELECT button to highlight the digit(s) in the next octet of your library's Gateway
address.
d. After entering the digits for the last octet in your Gateway address, press the SELECT button to
apply your entries.
9. Press the DOWN button to select Ethernet.
a. Press the DOWN button to highlight the Ethernet field.
b. Press the SELECT button to highlight the Ethernet setting.
c. Press the DOWN button to select a new setting.
d. Press the SELECT button to apply the new setting.
10. Press the DOWN button to highlight SAVE. Press the DOWN again to highlight CANCEL. Continue
to press the DOWN button to switch between SAVE and CANCEL.
v If SAVE is highlighted, press the SELECT button to apply your new configuration. If changes
were made to the Network settings, a pop-up menu will display the option to reboot the library or
cancel the reboot. If you select CANCEL in the pop-up menu, you will need to power cycle the
library for the network changes to be applied.
v If CANCEL is highlighted, press the SELECT button to cancel all of your entries and return to the
Configure menu.

Logging on to the Web User Interface

To complete the configuration of your library using the Web User Interface, follow the steps below.
1. On your host computer, open an Internet browser.
2. In the browser address field, enter your library's IP Address.

Installation and Configuration 55

 a. For DHCP and/or Stateless Autoconfig, use the Operator Control Panel to determine the IP
Address assigned to your library. Navigate to Monitor > Library > Network. Scroll down to the
library address information and make note of the address. Enter the IP Address in your internet
browser address field to access your library with the Web User Interface. The library address
information may include one or more of the following address types:
v IP Address (IPv4 static or DHCP)
v Static IPv6 Address
v Link Local IPv6 Address
v Assigned IPv6 address (DHCP or Stateless Autoconfig)
b. For IPv4, enter your library's IP Address using the 0.0.0.0 format (four octets).
c. For IPv6, enter your library's IP Address using the following format: http://[0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0].
d. For Dual Stack IPv4 + IPv6, enter your library's IP Address for either IPv4 or IPv6.
3. When the login screen appears,
a. Select admin for a User ID.
b. Enter secure for a Password.
a77ug070

Figure 41. Log in screen on the Web User Interface

Verifying/Updating Firmware
It is important to run the latest level of firmware. To ensure that you are running the latest levels of
library firmware, drive firmware, and SNMP MIB (Management Information Base) file, complete this
procedure.
1. Verify the SNMP MIB file currently installed on your SNMP server. Verify the levels of library and
drive firmware currently installed on your library by completing the following steps:
a. Expand Monitor Library in the left navigation pane of the Web User Interface.
b. Click Library Identity and make note of the Firmware revision.
c. Click Drive Identity and make note of the Firmware revision.
d. Log out of the Web User Interface.

Note: The SNMP MIB file is an optional feature.

2. Download the latest library firmware, drive firmware, and SNMP MIB (Management Information
Base) file from www.Dell.com/support.

Note: The SNMP MIB file is an optional feature.

a. Enter in your internet browser address field and press Enter on your keyboard.
b. Compare the firmware level available on the web to those that you made note of in step 1. If you
are running the latest levels of library and drive firmware, proceed to the next step. If you are not
running the latest levels of library and drive firmware, download the firmware that needs to be
updated to your library host.
3. Update library and drive firmware on your library, if necessary.
a. Enter the IP Address of your library in your internet browser address field and press Enter on
your keyboard.

56 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 b. Log in to your library's Web User Interface.
c. Expand Service Library in the left navigation pane of the Web User Interface.
d. Click Upgrade Firmware.
e. Browse to the new firmware level on your host, then click Update. Do this for both library and
drive firmware, if necessary.
4. Install the MIB file on your SNMP server. Refer to your server application documentation for
instructions.

Choosing General Library Settings

If your library contains only one drive or logical library, both general and specific settings will be
combined into one table (see Figure 42 on page 58).
1. Expand Configure Library in the left navigation pane of the Web User Interface.
2. Click General and enter the following:
v Library Name - Enter a name for your library.
v Library Mode (select one of the following per logical library):
– Random: In random mode, the library allows the server's (host's) application software to select
any data cartridge in any order.
– Sequential: In sequential mode, the library's firmware predefines the selection of the cartridges.
After initialization, the firmware causes the library to select the first available cartridge found
(counting from the I/O Station through the last slot in your library) for loading into the drive.

Important: A Logical Library in Sequential Mode supports only one tape drive. If it contains
more than one drive, only the first drive in the Logical Library is used and the other drives are
not supported.
- Autoload: Sequential mode with autoload mode ON loads the first available cartridge (slot
with the lowest numerical value that contains a cartridge) automatically if the library powers
ON with an empty drive.
- Loop: Sequential mode with loop mode ON loads the cartridge in the lowest numerical slot
after the cartridge in the highest numerical slot has been filled and sent back to its home slot.
This allows endless backup operations without user interaction.
v Active Slots - Select the number of active slots you would like to assign in your library. This item
will affect the number of Res. (Reserved) Slots in your library. For more information refer to
“Configuring I/O Stations and Reserving Slots” on page 136.

Note: Slots can be reserved so that they are invisible to the host. It may be necessary to reserve
slots in order to match the number of available slots to the ISV software licensing. Slots will be
reserved starting with the highest element address. If your library does not have a dedicated
cleaning cartridge slot, and you desire to enable Auto Clean, you must designate a reserved slot
which can be used to hold the cleaning cartridge.
v I/O Station Enabled - If checked, the I/O Station is enabled. If not, the first 3 slots (in a 4U library
or the 1st slot in a 2U library) are configured as storage. See “Configure Library: General” on page
116.
v Auto Clean Enabled - Automatically cleans drive when drive requests cleaning and cleaning
cartridge is present in a reserved slot or a dedicated cleaning slot. All cleaning cartridges must have
CLN as part of the bar code. The Universal Cleaning Cartridge has the bar code label CLNUxxLx.

Note: It is recommended that the Auto Clean function is enabled on the library. With the Auto
Clean function enabled, drive cleaning occurs automatically. The only time Auto Cleaning must be
disabled is when your Backup Application requires that it has control.

Installation and Configuration 57

 v Bar Code Label Length Reported to Host - Choose between 6 and 8. With 6, the first six characters
of the cartridge VOLSER (Volume Serial Numbers) will be reported to the host. With 8, All
characters in the VOLSER (first six characters plus the two character media type identifier) will be
reported to the host.
v Click one of the following:
– Refresh - Click this button to update the current screen.
– Apply Selections - Click this button to submit the changes made to the screen.

Figure 42. The 2U library Configure Library: General screen

Figure 43. Example: The 4U library Configure Library: General screen

3. If your library has more than one drive, proceed to “Choosing the Number of Logical Libraries for
Your Library.” If your library has one drive, proceed to “Entering Path Failover Feature Activation
Key” on page 59.

Choosing the Number of Logical Libraries for Your Library

Note: Review the information in “Determining the Number of Logical Libraries” on page 25 before
completing the procedure in this section.

58 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
If you have a 2U or 4U library with only one drive, or do not wish to partition your library, proceed to
the next section, “Entering Path Failover Feature Activation Key.”

One cartridge magazine cannot be assigned to two logical libraries. If you partition a multi-drive library,
each of the magazines must be assigned to a logical library on a magazine boundary. The entire magazine
must be part of one logical library only.

Note: If you have a 2U library with two drives, you have the capability to have two logical libraries.

In a fully populated 4U library with four half height drives and four logical libraries, resource
assignments will be as follows:
v Logical Library 1 will contain Drive 1 and the lower left cartridge magazine.
v Logical Library 2 will contain Drive 2 and the upper left cartridge magazine.
v Logical Library 3 will contain Drive 3 and the lower right cartridge magazine.
v Logical Library 4 will contain Drive 4 and the upper right cartridge magazine.

The I/O Station and slots reserved for cleaning cartridges, if any, are shared among all logical libraries.
1. Click Configure Library > Logical Libraries in the left navigation pane.

a77ug098
Figure 44. The 4U library Configure Library: Logical Libraries page

2. Select the number of logical libraries you would like to create in your library.
3. Click Submit to create the logical libraries.

Entering Path Failover Feature Activation Key

For more information, refer to the Dell PowerVault TL4000 Failover Configuration Guide, included with the
library documentation.
1. Click Configure Library > Path Failover in the left navigation pane.
a77ug117

Figure 45. The Configure Library: Path Failover Feature Activation screen

2. Enter the Control Path Failover 12-digit feature key in the spaces provided.
3. Click Activate to save the feature key. The following screen will display if you have correctly entered
the feature key.

Installation and Configuration 59

Figure 46. Feature Key verification screen

Note: Follow the instructions in the Dell PowerVault TL4000 Failover Configuration Guide to configure
your environment for failover.

Setting Up Encryption
Note: Application Managed Encryption (AME) does not require a key. Library Managed Encryption
requires a license key. The customer should contact their TSR (technical sales representative) to purchase
this feature.

For information on minimum firmware levels for Application Managed and Library Managed Encryption,
see “Minimum firmware levels for common library features” on page v.

Setting a Drive's Method of Encryption

1. Click Configure Library > Encryption in the left navigation panel.

a77ug199

Figure 47. Feature Activation Key screen

2. On the Encryption screen, enter the Feature Activation Key to make available the library managed
encryption options.
3. Click Activate to save the key and expand the screen for additional encryption settings.
a77ug192

Figure 48. Configure Library: Encryption Activation screen

4. Select Enable SSL for EKM to enable Secure Sockets Layer for the IBM SKLM application.
5. Select an Encryption method for each logical library.
v Without an encryption license key, select None or Application Managed Encryption.
v With an encryption license key, select Library Managed Encryption.
6. Select an Encryption policy for each logical library.

60 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 v Encrypt All: This is the default policy. It encrypts all cartridges using the default data keys
specified in the key manager. This setting applies to all drives in a TL2000/TL4000 logical library.
v Internal Label - Selective Encryption: Check your tape backup software application documentation
to see if this feature is supported.
v Internal Label - Encrypt All: Check your tape backup software application documentation to see if
this feature is supported.
7. A primary and secondary key management server can be set for each logical library. Each partition
has its own Encryption and key management settings. Maintaining primary and secondary key
management servers is desired for maximum availability of encrypted backup and recovery. These
settings are required for Library Managed Encryption only. Enter the EKM Server Setting
information.

Note: The IP address of the key management host must be consistent with the library Network
settings. This means if the library is set to IPV4 only network support, the key management host
must be an IPV4 address. If the Dell PowerVault library is required to function in a mixed network
environment the library must be set to IPv4 + IPv6.
v Primary IP address (IPv4 or IPv6): Enter the IP address of the primary key management server.
v Primary TCP port: After entering the Primary IP address, the library will automatically set the
value of the Primary TCP port.
v Secondary IP address (IPv4 or IPv6): Enter the IP address of the secondary key management
server.
v Secondary TCP port: After entering the Secondary IP address, the library will automatically set the
value of the Secondary TCP port.

Note: The Default Port for TCP (SSL disabled) is 3801. The Default Port for SSL is 443. These values
are the default values set by the library. They can be changed depending on the user configuration
but the user has to make sure they match the EKM properties file.

Note: If SSL is enabled the encryption host configuration will request a SSL port instead of a TCP
port. Review your IBM SKLM Knowledge Center online at http://www-01.ibm.com/support/
knowledgecenter/SSWPVP/welcome?lang=en for instructions to locate the appropriate port
settings.
8. Click Submit to apply the changes.
9. Install the IBM SKLM application on your host. Refer to the IBM SKLM Knowledge Center online for
information on locating the appropriate IP address and port.

Choosing Drive(s) Interface Identification/Settings

1. Click Configure Library > Drives in the left navigation pane.

Installation and Configuration 61

 Topology

FC-AL Loop ID

a77ug095
Figure 49. The Configure Library: Drive screen

2. Select the desired settings for each drive listed (either SCSI, SAS, or Fibre Channel). See Figure 49.
3. Click one of the following:
v Refresh - to update the current screen
v Submit - to apply the changes made to the screen

Entering Library Network Settings

This page shows the current network configuration of the library and allows modification to the
configuration. When a change is requested, a pop-up box confirms the request.
1. Click Configure Library > Network in the left navigation pane, to display the Network page.

a77ug074

Figure 50. Configure Library: Network Page

Important: Do not click the Submit button until all changes have been made to the Network page.
Once the Submit button has been clicked, no other changes can be made until after the library has
applied the current changes.

After the Submit button has been clicked, depending on the changes made, you will either be
disconnected and need to login again or reboot the library.

Clicking the Refresh button will refresh the page and any changes made will not be retained.
2. Select a Protocol Stack - Choose IPv4 only, IPv6 only, or Dual Stack IPv4 & IPv6.

62 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 If you choose Dual Stack IPv4 & IPv6, you must be prepared to enter both IPv4 and IPv6 IP
addresses. The sections below will gray out depending on the choices made here.
3. Enter the Host Name.

Note: The underscore (_) is not allowed as part of a host name.

4. Enter the Domain Name.
5. DNS Primary - Enter the IP address of your primary DNS server.
6. DNS Secondary - Enter the IP address of your secondary DNS server.
7. Enable SSL for Web - If you desire to have SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) enabled, place a check in this
box.

Note: If you get a security certificate alert when logging in to the Web User Interface, you can install
the certificate or allow an exception (depending on the internet browser you are using). SSL is
enabled when the URL begins with https:// and some browsers will show a lock.
8. Ethernet Settings - Ethernet Settings choices are: Auto (the default), 10 Mbit/Half, 10 Mbit/Full, 100
Mbit/Half, 100 Mbit/Full. Please refer to www.Dell.com/support to determine the availability of
manual Ethernet settings in your library's firmware.
9. Enter IPv4 settings (if applicable).
a. Enable DHCP - Click this item ON to have the IP Address of your library automatically set by
the DHCP server.
b. Static Address - Enter the assigned IPv4 address. The format of an IPv4 IP address is a 32-bit
numeric address written as four numbers separated by periods.
c. Network Mask - Enter the assigned IPv4 Network Mask.
d. Gateway address - Enter the assigned IPv4 Gateway address. This address allows access outside
the local network.
10. Enter IPv6 settings (if applicable).
a. Enable DHCP - Click this item ON to have the IP Address of your library automatically set by
the DHCP server.
b. Enable Stateless Auto Config - Stateless Auto config is ALWAYS on (not defeatable).
c. Static Address - Enter the assigned IPv6 address. The format of an IPv6 IP address is a 128-bit
numeric address written as 8 groups of four numbers separated by colons.
d. Prefix length - The default prefix length is set to 64, but can be set to any length, depending
upon the address used.
e. Gateway address - Enter the assigned IPv6 Gateway address. This address allows access outside
the local network.
11. Click one of the following:
v Refresh - to cancel the changes made to the screen.
v Submit - to apply the changes made to the screen.

Note: Depending on the changes made, you will either be disconnected and need to login again, or
reboot the library. If a reboot is required, the following Warning message will appear after the
Submit button is clicked.

Figure 51. Warning Screen

The library must be rebooted or the changes will not take place.

Installation and Configuration 63

Entering User Access Information using the Web User Interface
The Configure Library > User Access page is only accessible to the Admin and Service login. Access is
denied to User and Superuser logins.

The Admin login has access to all library functions except Service Library > Advance Diagnostics.

The Service login has access to all library functions including Service Library > Advance Diagnostics.
1. Click Configure Library > User Access in the left navigation pane.

a77ug082
Figure 52. The Configure Library: User Access screen

2. Check the Disable Superuser checkbox to disable the Superuser role for this library. Check the
Disable User checkbox to disable the User role for this library. Uncheck these boxes to allow these
roles access to your library.
3. Choose a Role.

Note: Admin can select User, Superuser, and Admin roles. Service can select User, Superuser, Admin,
and Service roles.
v User (if enabled)
v Superuser (if enabled)
v Admin
v Service

Note: Only one password can be set for each Role.

4. Enter the New Password . The password has a maximum of 10 characters (A-Z, a-z, 0-9, @,
<hyphen>, <space>, <period>).
5. In Repeat Password, enter the new password again.
6. In Support Name, enter the name of the person that will be able to offer the user help with the
library.

Note: Only one support person can be configured for the entire tape library. The support person may
or may not be one of the user, superuser, or admin account holders.
7. In Support Phone, enter the phone number of the person that will be able to offer the user help with
the library.

64 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
8. In Support Email, enter the email address of the person that will be able to offer the user help with
the library.
9. Click one of the following:
v Refresh - to update the current screen.
v Submit - to apply the changes made to the screen.

Entering Date and Time using the Web User Interface

1. Click Configure Library > Date & Time in the left navigation pane.

a77ug061
Figure 53. The Configure Library: Date and Time screen

2. Enter the current Time using the HH:MM:SS 24-hour format.

3. Enter the current Date using the MMDDYYYY format.
4. Click one of the following:
v Refresh - to cancel all of your entries and leave the settings as they were.
v Submit - to apply the changes made to the screen.

Configuring Logs and Traces using the Web User Interface

This function is not available on the Operator Control Panel.
1. Click Configure Library > Logs & Traces in the left navigation pane.

Figure 54. The Configure Library: Logs and Traces screen

2. For Error Log Mode, select Continuous so all information for logs and traces will be captured.
3. Trace Level and Trace Filter options can be changed by Service personnel only.
4. Click one of the following:
v Refresh - to cancel all of your entries and leave the settings as they were.
v Submit - to apply the changes made to the screen.

Installation and Configuration 65

Entering Email Notification Information using the Web User Interface
This function is not available on the Operator Control Panel.

Use this menu item to set up email notification of library errors and warnings.
1. Click Configure Library > Email Notification in the left navigation pane.

a77ug065
Figure 55. The Configure Library: Email Notification screen

2. If you would like to be notified when an error occurs, select Notify Errors.
3. If you would like to be notified when a warning occurs, select Notify Warnings.
4. In To Email Address, enter the email address to which the information will be sent.
5. In SMTP Server Address (IPv4 or IPv6), enter the IP Address of the SMTP server associated with the
email address.
6. Enter the Domain Name for your library. This field cannot be blank when using event notification.

Note: If you attempt to enter a blank value for the Domain Name, a warning message will appear. It
will say If you are using Event Notification then a value is required for the Domain Name.
7. Click one of the following:
v Refresh - to cancel all of your entries and leave the settings as they were.
v Submit - to apply the changes made to the screen.

Configuring SNMP settings

This page shows the current SNMP configuration of the library and allows modification to the
configuration. When a change is requested, a box checks to confirm the changes.

Click SNMP in the left navigation pane to display the SNMP page.

66 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 a77ug278
Figure 56. Configure Library: SNMP page

Note: For information about SNMP, see “SNMP Messaging” on page 7 and Appendix F, “SNMP Status
MIB Variables and Traps,” on page 237.

Note: If SNMP is not enabled (cleared), all SNMP fields are disabled.

SNMP
v Enabled - Check this box to have SNMP traps sent to an SNMP Management console.
v Community Name - An SNMP community name is a text string that acts as a password to authenticate
messages that are sent between the SNMP remote management application and the library. Enter your
preferred name, or leave as "public".

SNMP DESTINATIONS
v Target 1 - IP Address - If SNMP traps are enabled, enter an IP address where SNMP traps are sent.
v Target 2 - IP Address - Enter an optional second IP address where SNMP traps are sent, or leave as
0.0.0.0.
v Target 3 - IP Address - Enter an optional third IP address where SNMP traps are sent, or leave as
0.0.0.0.
v Version - The library offers three versions of the SNMP protocol; v1, v2, and v3. Select a version for
each Target IP address.
v Audit Logging - If SNMP is enabled and Audit Logging is enabled, the library sends SNMP traps to
an SNMP Management console when the library or tape drive configuration changes.

Note: This option is available only if the library firmware is 9.00 or higher, and the latest library MIB
file is added to the SNMP Management console.

SNMP V3 SECURITY
v User Name - Enter your preferred name, or leave as "initial".
v Authentication - The options for Authentication are none, MD5, or SHA.
v Authentication Password - The Authentication Password must be at least 8 characters in length. If
Authentication is set to none, this field and the Privacy and Privacy Password fields are disabled.
v Privacy - The options for Privacy are none, or DES. If Privacy is set to none, then the Privacy
Password field is disabled.

Installation and Configuration 67

v Privacy Password - The Privacy Password must be at least 8 characters in length.

Note: The factory default settings for SNMP V3 Security are

v User Name - initial
v Authentication - none
v Privacy - none

Testing encryption configuration for Library Managed encryption

Refer to www.Dell.com/support to determine the availability of this feature.

If you purchased an encryption activation key and any LTO 4 or higher Fibre Channel or SAS drive for
your library, and the library is configured for library managed encryption, run the Key Path Diagnostic to
ensure that your encryption configuration is correct.

Important: Ensure that library firmware and drive firmware are up to date before the Key Path
Diagnostic procedure is run. Library firmware level must be greater than 6.xx. See “Verifying/Updating
Firmware” on page 56.

For information about running the diagnostic procedure, refer to “Service Library: Key Path Diagnostics”
on page 133.

Restoring Factory Default Settings using the Web User Interface

If you would like to erase your current configuration and restore factory default settings, do so by
selecting Restore Factory Defaults in the Configure Library > Save/Restore menu. See “Configure
Library: Save/Restore Configuration” on page 128.

The factory default settings are listed in Table 22 on page 100.

Logging out of the Web User Interface

To log out of the Web User Interface, click Logout in the upper right corner of the current screen.

Important: If you click the X in the upper right corner of your internet browser window, you will not log
out of the Web User Interface.

Configuring Your Library using the Operator Control Panel

If you choose to use the Operator Control Panel for configuring your library, go to “Configure Menu” on
page 92 for information on configuring the following items:
v Logical Libraries
v Library Settings
v Drive(s)
v Network
v Set Access PIN
v Set Date and Time
v Path Failover

To complete the configuration of your library, the following items will have to be accessed from the Web
User Interface:
v Encryption (if purchased) (see “Configure Library: Encryption” on page 118)
v User Access Information (see “Configure Library: User Access” on page 123)
v Logs and Traces (see “Configure Library: Logs & Traces” on page 125)
v Event Notification Information (see “Configure Library: Event Notification” on page 126)

68 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
v Key Path Diagnostic (if Encryption was purchased) (see “Service Library: Key Path Diagnostics” on
page 133)
v Updating Firmware (see “Service Library: Upgrade Firmware” on page 134)

Preparing the Host

Follow these general guidelines:
1. Ensure that your backup application supports the SCSI, SAS, or Fibre Channel host bus adapter
(HBA).
2. Ensure that all the required or latest available Operating System files and/or updates (dll’s, PTF’s,
etc.) have been installed and applied.
3. If the host server is connected to a network, check with the system administrator before turning host
power OFF.
4. Install a suitably rated HBA. Remember that if there are any single-ended (SE) devices on the same
SCSI bus, the entire SCSI bus will negotiate down to SE speed and severely degrade performance and
limit cable length.
5. Ensure that LUN scanning is enabled on the SCSI host adapter.
6. Ensure that Fibre Channel Tape Support is enabled on the Fibre Channel HBA if installing a library
with a Fibre Channel drive.
7. Ensure that SAS support is enabled on the SAS HBA if installing a library with a SAS drive.
8. For library managed encryption, install the IBM SKLM application on your host. Refer to the IBM
SKLM Knowledge Center online at http://www-01.ibm.com/support/knowledgecenter/SSWPVP/
welcome?lang=en for information.

Verifying the Connection

1. Depending on the server configuration, you may need to change the SCSI ID or Fibre Channel Loop
ID of the library, if the current ID is the same as another device on the bus.
2. When the host server is powered ON, install the software and/or driver(s) that are compatible with
the library. Backup software packages may require additional software or licensing to communicate
with the library accessor.
3. If this is a SCSI attachment, ensure the library is properly terminated. If the library is the only SCSI
device, other than the SCSI host adapter on the selected SCSI bus, it must be terminated. Likewise, if
the library is physically the last SCSI device on the SCSI bus, it must be terminated. Only the devices
physically located at the beginning and end of the SCSI bus should be terminated.
4. Confirm that the host server operating system recognized the library. In Microsoft Windows Server
2003, you can verify this by going to: Settings > Control Panel > System > Hardware > Device
Manager > Tape Drive and/or Medium Changer .

For more information on verifying the connection of SCSI devices, see the operating system
documentation.

Cartridge magazines
The library has removable magazines. Magazine access is password protected. For safety reasons, the
accessor motion is stopped when a magazine is removed.

The magazines are released with the Operator Control Panel or the Web User Interface. In case the
Operator Control Panel or Web User Interface initiated process failed or the library no longer has power,
a manual emergency release is available.

Installation and Configuration 69

Important: To manually release a magazine, see “Releasing the Magazines Manually” on page 175. This
manual process is used only if the magazine cannot be released with the Operator Control Panel or the
Web User Interface.

2U library cartridge magazines

The 2U library has two cartridge magazines. The left cartridge magazine (see Figure 57) has 11 storage
slots and houses the elective 1-slot I/O station. The right magazine (see Figure 58) has 12 storage slots.
For information about Element Addressing, see “2U Library I/O Slot, Storage Slots and Drive Slot
Element Addresses and Physical Locations” on page 203.

a77ug241
Figure 57. 2U library left magazine

a77ug242

Figure 58. 2U library right magazine

2U Library I/O station

The I/O (input/output) station (see Figure 59 on page 71) in a 2U library is part of the left magazine. To
open the I/O station, select Control > Open I/O Station. The I/O station slot opens, and the "Unlocking
I/O station" message displays. Wait for the "Insert/remove cartridge and close I/O station" message to
insert or remove the cartridge, then close the I/O station by gently pushing the slot back into the left
magazine.

Note: It is recommended to wait for the messages before you insert or remove cartridges to ensure that
the library is ready to handle the cartridges.

70 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 a77ug248
Figure 59. 2U library I/O station in the left magazine

4U library cartridge magazines

The 4U library has four cartridge magazines, two on each side (see Figure 60 and Figure 61). The upper
left magazine has 12 storage slots. The lower left magazine has 9 storage slots and houses the elective
3-slot I/O station (▌1▐ in Figure 60). The upper right magazine has 12 storage slots. The lower right
magazine has 12 storage slots. For information about Element Addressing, see “4U Library I/O Slots,
Storage Slots, and Drive Slots Element Addresses and Physical Locations” on page 204.

a77ug245

Figure 60. 4U library left magazines

a77ug249

Figure 61. 4U library right magazines

Installation and Configuration 71

4U library I/O station

The I/O station in a 4U library (see Figure 62) is part of the lower left magazine. To open the I/O station,
select Control > Open I/O Station. The I/O station slot opens, and the "Unlocking I/O station" message
displays. Wait for the "Insert/remove cartridge and close I/O station" message to insert or remove the
cartridge, then close the I/O station by gently pushing the slot back into the left magazine.

Note: It is recommended to wait for the messages before you insert or remove cartridges to ensure that
the library is ready to handle the cartridges.

Figure 62. 4U library I/O station in the lower left magazine a77ug246

There are finger holes on the back side of the I/O station (see ▌1▐ in Figure 63 on page 73) that allow the
user to push the cartridges out of the I/O station.

72 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 1

a77ug247
Figure 63. Finger Holes on back side of 4U library I/O station

Populating the Library with Data Cartridges

Important: Cartridges placed in the library must be labeled with the correct bar code labels. For
additional information, see “Using Ultrium Media” on page 139.

For information on working with the cartridge magazines, see “Cartridge magazines” on page 69.
1. Properly label the data cartridges. Refer to “Using Ultrium Media” on page 139.
2. Unlock the cartridge magazines.
v Using the Operator Control Panel: Control > Magazines select Left or Right.
v Using the Web User Interface: Manage Library > Release Magazine select Left or Right.

Note: The magazines will relock after 15 seconds if they have not been removed.
3. Remove the selected magazines from the library.
4. Insert cartridges in the magazine(s). Do not store cartridges in the I/O Station or in the dedicated
cleaning cartridge slot. See “2U Library I/O Slot, Storage Slots and Drive Slot Element Addresses and
Physical Locations” on page 203 or “4U Library I/O Slots, Storage Slots, and Drive Slots Element
Addresses and Physical Locations” on page 204 for determining slot location.
5. Put magazines back into the library. The library will automatically start up and perform an inventory
check.

Installation and Configuration 73

Inserting the Cleaning Cartridge
Important: Cleaning cartridges placed in the library must be labeled with the correct bar code labels. For
additional information, see “Using Ultrium Media” on page 139.

Note: Earlier versions of the 4U library contained a Dedicated Cleaning Slot (DCS). This DCS can be
retained and is supported by future library firmware updates. However, library firmware later than 3.90
will allow removal of the DCS, thus enabling this slot to be used as a storage slot. Once the DCS is
removed, the Auto Clean cleaning cartridge slot must be configured as described below. If the DCS has
been removed, it can only be reinstated by restoring factory default settings. To remove the DCS, perform
the following procedure using the Operator Control Panel (OCP): OCP->Configure->Library
Settings->General->Remove DCS->No/Yes->Save.
The following criteria must be followed for Auto Clean to function:
1. A storage slot must be reserved (Res or RSVD).
v Reserving a slot is accomplished by reducing the Active Slot count in any particular logical library.
A reserved slot (or slots) is always the last slot in the last magazine of any particular logical library.
A cleaning cartridge that is in a reserved slot is available to any logical library drive even if the
reserved slot is not in that particular logical library. If the library contains multiple logical libraries,
typically, the last logical library is chosen to be the reserved slot containing the cleaning cartridge.
As with a library with a single logical library, this slot is the last physical slot in the library (top
right magazine, uppermost rear slot).
2. The Auto Clean function must be Enabled.
v Operator Control Panel: Configure->Library Settings->Auto Clean: Enabled
v Web User Interface: Configure Library->General->Auto Clean Enabled->check box

Note: Enabling Auto Clean without first reserving a slot for the cleaning cartridge will result in the
library System Status screen (web UI) reporting the following attention conditions:
v Media Attention
v Chk Media/Rsvd Slot
3. To install a cleaning cartridge in the 2U or 4U library:
a. Properly label the cleaning cartridge (CLNxxxLx). Refer to “Using Ultrium Media” on page 139.
b. Place the cleaning cartridge in the library using the same procedure described in “Populating the
Library with Data Cartridges” on page 73. Ensure the cleaning cartridge is placed in a reserved
slot or the DCS (if one exists, 4U only).
c. If the cleaning cartridge is not in a reserved slot, use the Operator Control Panel: Control > Move
Cartridge or the Web User Interface: Manage Library > Move Media to move the cleaning
cartridge into the reserved slot or the DCS (if one exists, 4U only).

Note: A user has the option to perform manual cleaning by navigating in the RMU to Service >
Clean Drive. In units with more than one drive to be cleaned, the user must manually refresh the
screen after the clean has completed in order to be able to select an additional drive to be cleaned.
4. Replace the cleaning cartridge, if needed.
v A cleaning cartridge must be replaced after 50 uses. To determine the number of cleaning uses
remaining, click on the Web User Interface, Monitor Library->Inventory .
v Click on the (+) located under that magazine presentation to expand the detail of resident
cartridges.
v Cleaning cartridges are labeled as CLNxxxLx. Observe the information displayed for the slots
containing a cleaning cartridge. The number of Media Loads represent how many times the
cleaning cartridge has been used. The number 50, minus that Media Load number represents the
number of uses remaining.

74 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Operations
The following table lists menu navigation shortcuts to activities that can be performed via the Operator
Control Panel and/or the Web User Interface.

Before using the Operator Control Panel or the Web user Interface, please review the information in
Chapter 3: User Interfaces.
Table 19. Menu navigation shortcuts
Menu Navigation Shortcuts
Information/
Activity Operator Control Panel For More Info Web User Interface For More Info
Accessor, number Monitor > Library > Status > “Monitor: Monitor Library > Library “Monitor Library:
of cartridge Cycles Library” on Status Library Status” on
moves page 84 page 109
Auto Clean, Configure > Library Settings > “Configure: Configure Library > “Configure
enable Auto Clean Library” on General Library: General”
page 94 on page 116
Cartridge, Monitor > Library > Status > “Monitor: Monitor Library > Library “Monitor Library:
currently Act. Cart Library” on Status Library Status” on
active/moving page 84 page 109
Cartridge, Not available with this interface Monitor Library > “Monitor Library:
determine Inventory Inventory” on
encryption page 112
Cartridge, Monitor > Inventory > “Monitor: Manage Library > “Manage Library:
Inventory Magazines Inventory” on Perform Inventory Perform
page 88 Inventory” on
page 115
Cartridge, Move Control > Move Cartridges “Control: Manage Library > Move “Manage Library:
Move Media Move Media” on
Cartridges” on page 114
page 91
Cartridge Monitor > Inventory > Drive “Monitor: Monitor Library > Drive “Monitor Library:
currently in drive (n) Inventory” on Status Drive Status” on
(n), Cartridge page 88 page 110
label and slot
source
Cartridge in Monitor > Drive > Status > “Monitor: Monitor Library > Drive “Monitor Library:
drive (n), Drive (n) Drive” on Status Drive Status” on
cartridge slot page 86 page 110
source
Configuration, Configure > Save/Restore “Configure: Configure Library > “Configure
save and restore* Save/Restore” Save/Restore Library:
on page 99 Save/Restore
Configuration” on
page 128
* Note: From this location, you can not only save and restore your library configuration, but you
can also restore factory defaults.
Control path, Configure > Drive > Control “Configure: Configure Library > “Configure
enable Path Drive” on Drives Library: Drives”
page 96 on page 120

75
Table 19. Menu navigation shortcuts (continued)
Menu Navigation Shortcuts
Information/
Activity Operator Control Panel For More Info Web User Interface For More Info
Date and time, Monitor > Library > Status > “Monitor: Current date and time “System Status”
current setting Date/Time Library” on displayed in System Status on page 21
page 84 screen.
Date and time, Configure > Set Date and “Configure: Configure Library > Date “Configure
set Time Set Date and & Time Library: Date &
Time” on page Time” on page
101 125
Dedicated Configure > Library Settings “Configure: Not available with this
Cleaning slot, Library” on interface
removing, page 94
reinstating
Note: Dedicated Cleaning Slot (DCS) only available on earlier versions of the 4U library. Refer to
“Inserting the Cleaning Cartridge” on page 74.
DHCP, current Monitor > Library > Network “Configure: Configure Library > “Configure
status > DHCP Network” on Network Library: Network”
page 97 on page 122
DHCP, modify Configure > Network > DHCP “Configure: Configure Library > “Configure
Network” on Network Library: Network”
page 97 on page 122
Diagnostics, run Service > Service > Drive Tests “Service: Run Not available with this
drive Head test Tests” on page interface
103
Diagnostics, run Service > Service > Drive Tests “Service: Run Not available with this
drive Media test Tests” on page interface
103
Diagnostics, run Service > Service > Drive Tests “Service: Run Not available with this
drive Normal Tests” on page interface
Read/Write test 103
Diagnostics, run Service > Service > Drive Tests “Service: Run Not available with this
drive POST Tests” on page interface
103
Diagnostics, run Not available with this interface Service Library > Key “Service Library:
Key Path Path Diagnostics Key Path
diagnostics (if Diagnostics” on
feature is page 133
available)
Diagnostics, run Service > Library Verify “Service: Not available with this
Library Verify Library interface.
test Verify” on
page 102
Diagnostics, run Service > Run Tests “Service: Run Service Library > Perform “Service Library:
Slot to Slot test Tests” on page Diagnostics Perform
103 Diagnostics” on
page 132
Diagnostics, run Service > Run Tests “Service: Run Service Library > Perform “Service Library:
System Test Tests” on page Diagnostics Perform
103 Diagnostics” on
page 132

76 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Table 19. Menu navigation shortcuts (continued)
Menu Navigation Shortcuts
Information/
Activity Operator Control Panel For More Info Web User Interface For More Info
Display Contrast Service > Display Contrast “Service: Not available with this
Display interface.
Contrast” on
page 104
DNS, modify Not available with this Configure Library > “Configure
settings interface. Network Library: Network”
on page 122
Drive, change Configure > Drive > Drive “Configure: Configure Library > “Configure
interface Interface Drive” on Drives Library: Drives”
configuration page 96 on page 120
Drive, change Configure > Drive > Drive “Configure: Configure Library > “Configure
SCSI/Loop ID Interface Drive” on Drives Library: Drives”
page 96 on page 120
Drive, clean Service > Service > Clean “Service: Service Library > Clean “Service Library:
Drive Service Drive Clean Drive” on
(Drives)” on page 129
page 104
Drive, current Monitor > Drive > Identity “Monitor: Monitor Library > Drive “Monitor Library:
SCSI/Loop ID Drive” on Identity Drive Identity” on
page 86 page 107
Drive, current Monitor > Drive > Status “Monitor: Monitor Library > Drive “Monitor Library:
status Drive” on Status Drive Status” on
page 86 page 110
Drive, data Not available with this Monitor Library > Drive “Monitor Library:
compression interface. Identity > Data Drive Identity” on
status Compression page 107
Drive, Fibre, Monitor > Drive > Identity > “Monitor: Monitor Library > Drive “Monitor Library:
Worldwide Node Drive (n)/WWNN Drive” on Identity Drive Status” on
Name page 86 page 110
Drive, Hashed Not available with this Monitor Library > Drive “Monitor Library:
SAS Address interface. Status Drive Status” on
page 110
Drive, Interface Configure > Drive > Drive “Configure: Monitor Library > Drive “Monitor Library:
type Interface Drive” on Identity Drive Identity” on
page 96 page 107
Drive, SCSI Monitor > Drive > Identity “Monitor: Monitor Library > Drive “Monitor Library:
Inquiry string Drive” on Identity Drive Identity” on
page 86 page 107
Drive, turn Service > Service > Drive “Service: Configure Library > Drive “Configure
power ON/OFF Power Service Library: Drives”
(Drives)” on on page 120
page 104
Drive activity, Monitor > Drive > Status > “Monitor: Monitor Library > Drive “Monitor Library:
current Drive (n)/Activity Drive” on Status Drive Status” on
page 86 page 110
Drive fan, status Not available with this interface Monitor Library > Drive “Monitor Library:
Status Drive Status” on
page 110

Operations 77
Table 19. Menu navigation shortcuts (continued)
Menu Navigation Shortcuts
Information/
Activity Operator Control Panel For More Info Web User Interface For More Info
Drive Dump, Not available with this Service Library > Save “Service Library:
save interface. Drive Dump Save Drive
Dump” on page
131
Encryption, Not available with this Configure Library > “Configure
activate interface. Encryption Library:
Encryption” on
page 118
Encryption, Not available with this Configure Library > “Configure
configure interface. Encryption Library:
Encryption” on
page 118
Encryption, Not available with this Service Library > Key “Service Library:
testing interface. Path Diagnostics Key Path
configuration (if Diagnostics” on
feature is page 133
available)
Encryption, Not available with this Monitor Library > Drive “Monitor Library:
determine interface. Status Drive Status” on
method, current page 110
method
Ethernet settings Monitor > Library > Network “Monitor: Configure Library > “Configure
Library” on Network Library: Network”
page 84 on page 122
Email Not available with this Configure Library > Email “Configure
notifications: add, interface. Notification Library: Event
modify, and Notification” on
delete page 126
Error log, view Monitor > Library > Error log “Monitor: Service Library > View “Service Library:
Library” on logs View Logs” on
page 84 page 130
Error logs and Not available with this interface Configure Library > Logs “Configure
traces, set mode & Traces Library: Logs &
Traces” on page
125
Factory Default Configure > Save/Restore “Configure: Configure Library > “Configure
settings, restore Save/Restore” Save/Restore Library:
on page 99 Save/Restore
Configuration” on
page 128
Fibre Channel, Monitor > Drive > Status > “Monitor: Monitor Library > Drive “Monitor Library:
speed Drive (n) Drive” on Status Drive Status” on
page 86 page 110
Fibre Channel Configure > Drives > Drive “Configure: Configure Library > “Configure
speed, change Interface Drive” on Drives Library: Drives”
page 96 on page 120
Fibre Channel, Monitor > Drive > Status > “Monitor: Monitor Library > Drive “Monitor Library:
topology Drive (n) Drive” on Status Drive Status” on
page 86 page 110

78 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Table 19. Menu navigation shortcuts (continued)
Menu Navigation Shortcuts
Information/
Activity Operator Control Panel For More Info Web User Interface For More Info
Fibre Channel Configure > Drives > Drive “Configure: Configure Library > “Configure
topology, change Interface Drive” on Drives Library: Drives”
page 96 on page 120
Fibre Channel Monitor > Drive > Status > “Monitor: Monitor Library > Drive “Monitor Library:
link, status Drive (n)/Link Drive” on Status Drive Status” on
page 86 page 110
Firmware, drive, Monitor > Drive > Identity “Monitor: Monitor Library > Drive “Monitor Library:
current level Drive” on Identity Drive Identity” on
page 86 page 107
Firmware, library, Monitor > Library > Identity “Monitor: Monitor Library > Library “Monitor Library:
identify current Library” on Identity Library Identity”
level page 84 on page 106
Firmware, library Not available with this Service Library > Upgrade “Service Library:
or drive update interface. Firmware Upgrade
Firmware” on
page 134
Gateway, current Monitor > Library > Network “Monitor: Configure Library > “Configure
address > Gateway Library” on Network Library: Network”
page 84 on page 122
Gateway Configure > Network > “Configure: Configure Library > “Configure
Address, modify Gateway Network” on Network Library: Network”
page 97 on page 122
Inventory, Control > Re-Inventory “Control: Manage Library > “Manage Library:
perform Re-Inventory” Perform Inventory Perform
on page 92 Inventory” on
page 115
I/O Station, Configure > Library Settings > “Configure: Configure Library > “Configure
configuring I/O Station Library” on General Library: General”
page 94 on page 116
I/O Station, Monitor > Library > Status “Monitor: System Status screen
current status Library” on
page 84
I/O Station, open Control > Open I/O Station “Control: Not available with this
Open I/O interface
Station” on
page 90
IP Address, Monitor > Library > Network “Monitor: Monitor Library > Library “Monitor Library:
current Library” on Identity Library Identity”
page 84 on page 106
IP Address, Configure > Network > IP “Configure: Configure Library > “Configure
modify Address Network” on Network Library: Network”
page 97 on page 122
Library, current Monitor > Library > Status “Monitor: Monitor Library > Library “Monitor Library:
status Library” on Status Library Status” on
page 84 page 109
Logical libraries, Configure > Logical Libraries “Configure: Configure Library > “Configure
configure Logical Logical Libraries Library: Logical
Libraries” on Libraries” on page
page 92 117

Operations 79
Table 19. Menu navigation shortcuts (continued)
Menu Navigation Shortcuts
Information/
Activity Operator Control Panel For More Info Web User Interface For More Info
Logs, library, Monitor > Library > Error Log “Monitor: Service Library > View “Service Library:
view Library” on Logs View Logs” on
page 84 page 130
Magazines, Monitor > Inventory > “Monitor: Monitor Library > “Monitor Library:
graphical Magazines Inventory” on Inventory Inventory” on
representation page 88 page 112
Magazines, Control > Magazines “Control: Manage Library > Release “Manage Library:
Unlock Magazine” on Magazine Release
page 91 Magazine” on
page 115
Mode, library, Configure > Library Settings > “Configure: Configure Library > “Configure
change Mode Library” on General Library: General”
page 94 on page 116
Mode, library, Monitor > Library > Identity “Monitor: Monitor Library > Library “Monitor Library:
current Library” on Identity Library Identity”
page 84 on page 106
Netmask, current Monitor > Library > Network “Monitor: Configure Library > “Configure
address Library” on Network Library: Network”
page 84 on page 122
Netmask Configure > Network > “Configure: Configure Library > “Configure
Address, modify Netmask Network” on Network Library: Network”
page 97 on page 122
Network Configure > Network “Configure: Configure Library > “Configure
configuration, Network” on Network Library: Network”
change page 97 on page 122
Network Monitor > Library > Network “Monitor: Configure Library > “Configure
configuration, Library” on Network Library: Network”
view page 84 on page 122
Path Failover, Configure > Control Path “Configure: Configure Library > Path “Configure
enter activation Failover Path Failover” Failover Library: Path
key on page 102 Failover” on page
118
Restart, library, Not available with this Service Library > Reboot “Service Library:
interface. Reboot” on page
135
SCSI Inquiry Monitor > Drive > Identity “Monitor: Monitor Library > Drive “Monitor Library:
string, drive Drive” on Identity Drive Identity” on
page 86 page 107
Serial Number, Monitor > Drive > Identity “Monitor: Monitor Library > Drive “Monitor Library:
drive Drive” on Identity Drive Identity” on
page 86 page 107
Serial Number, Monitor > Library > Identity “Monitor: Monitor Library > Library “Monitor Library:
library Library” on Identity Library Identity”
page 84 on page 106
Slots, number Monitor > Library > Identity “Monitor: System Status screen
active Library” on
page 84

80 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Table 19. Menu navigation shortcuts (continued)
Menu Navigation Shortcuts
Information/
Activity Operator Control Panel For More Info Web User Interface For More Info
Slots, number Monitor > Library > Status “Monitor: System Status screen
empty Library” on
page 84
Slots, reassign Note: Varies according to the “Configure: Configure Library > “Configure
number of active, number logical libraries. Library” on General Library: General”
reserving page 94 on page 116
Single partition: Configure >
Logical Library Settings

Multiple partitions: Configure

> Logical Library Settings >
Logical Library (n)
SNMP, modify Not available with this Configure Library > “Configure
settings interface. SNMP Library: SNMP”
on page 127
Telnet Service Service > Telnet Service Port “Service: Not available with this
Port, activate Telnet Service interface.
Port” on page
105
Time elapsed Monitor > Library > Status “Monitor: Monitor Library > Library “Monitor Library:
since power ON Library” on Status Library Status” on
page 84 page 109
Operator Control Configure > Set Access PIN “Configure: Not available with this
Panel, access Set Access interface.
PIN, PIN” on page
enable/disable 98
Web User Not available with this Configure Library > User “Configure
Interface, user interface. Access Library: User
access, create or Access” on page
modify 123

Operator Control Panel Navigation

The four control keys on the front of a 2U or 4U library enable the user to navigate through the library
settings and make changes as needed to configure the library.

Operations 81
 1 2

a77ug254
4 3
Figure 64. 2U Library Control Keys

1 2

a77ug253

4 3

Figure 65. 4U Library Control Keys

Table 20. Library Control Keys

Control Description
Keys
▌1▐ UP (∧) - Upper-left button

Used to scroll upward through menu items.

▌2▐ CANCEL (X) - Upper-right button

Used to cancel a user action and return to the previous menu screen.
▌3▐ SELECT (') - Lower-right button

Used to display a sub-menu or force an accessor action.

▌4▐ DOWN (∨) - Lower-left button

Used to scroll downward through menu items.

1. Press the UP (▌1▐) or DOWN(▌4▐) keys to enter Interaction Mode. The Main Selection Menu will
appear. The Main Selection screen shows Monitor, Control, Configure, and Service.

82 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
2. Scroll to your selection, then press the SELECT (▌3▐) key. The sub-menu for the selected menu item
will appear.
3. Use the UP (▌1▐) or DOWN(▌4▐) and SELECT (▌3▐) keys to scroll until you get to the area/screen you
wish to configure.
4. Use the CANCEL (▌2▐) key if you wish to move backwards through the menu selections.

Operator Control Panel Menu Tree

The Operator Control Panel Main menu is made up of the following items:
v Monitor
v Control
v Configure
v Service

The table below shows each Main menu item and the associated sub menu items.

Monitor Control Configure Service

Logical
Library Open I/O Station Library Verify
Libraries

Drive Move Cartridges Library Run Tests

Settings

Inventory Magazines Drive Service (Drives)

Re-Inventory Network Display Contrast

Set Access PIN Telnet Service

Port

Save/Restore

Set Date and

Time
a77ug050

Control
Path Failover

Figure 66. Operator Control Panel Menu Tree

Note: Depending on the version of library firmware, there may be differences between the Menu Tree
description in this document and the OCP Menu Tree on your library.

Operations 83
Monitor Menu
The Monitor menu contains information about the following sub menu items:
v Library
v Drive
v Inventory

Monitor: Library
This menu item displays current library information and settings.

84 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 Monitor

Library

Status Identity Error Log Network

Status Serial Number IPv4 IPv6

IP Stack IP Stack
Act. Cart. Version

DHCP DHCP
ON-OFF ON-OFF
On Time Vendor ID

IP Address Stateless
autoconfig
Slots Empty Product ID

Netmask Prefix Length

Moves Active Slots

Static IPv6
Address
I/O Station WWNN

Gateway Link Local IPv6

Address
Date/Time Lib. x Mode

Note: x = number of logical libraries Ethernet Assigned IPv6

(1-4 partitions) An example with a Address
library with 4 partitions: Note: This will display
Lib.1 Mode when Stateless Auto
Lib.2 Mode Config is enabled
Lib.3 Mode
Lib.4 Mode

IPv6 Gateway
a77ug051

Ethernet

Figure 67. Monitor: Library menu

Under Monitor > Library are the following items:

v Status

Operations 85
v Identity
v Error Log
v Network

Under Monitor > Library > Status are the following items:
v Status - Status of the library
v Act. Cart - The serial number of the cartridge currently active in the library
v On Time - The amount of time the library is powered ON
v Slots Empty - The number of empty slots in the library/total number of active slots in the library
v Moves - The total number of cartridge moves that are carried out by the library accessor
v I/O Station - Indicates whether the I/O station is open or closed
v Date/Time - Gives the current date and time that is set in the library

Under Monitor > Library > Identity are the following items.
v Service Tag - the service tag of the library
v Version - the current level of library firmware installed
v Vendor ID - Dell
v Product ID - TL2000/TL4000
v Active Slots - Number of active slots in each logical library
v WWNN - Worldwide Node Name of the library
v Lib.x Mode - Current library mode (Random or Sequential)

Note: X = the number of logical libraries (1 - 4 partitions).

Under Monitor > Library > Error Log, a list of errors is logged by the library. The errors are displayed
beginning with the most recent error.

Under Monitor > Library > Network are the following items:
v IP Stack - Internet Protocol used by the library
v DHCP - (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) - records whether DHCP is ON or OFF
v IP Addresses - IP (Internet Protocol) addresses of the library
v Stateless auto configuration - Indicates whether stateless auto configuration is enabled
v Prefix Length - The length of the IP address prefix
v Netmask - The Network Mask address of the library
v Static IPv6 Address - The static IPv6 address of the library
v Link Local IPv6 Address - Local link-only IPv6 address of the library
v Assigned IPv6 Address - IPv6 address or addresses that are discovered by the network router. The
addresses display only when DHCP is OFF and Stateless auto configuration is ON.
v Gateway - The Gateway address of the library
v Ethernet - The speed of the ethernet interface

Monitor: Drive
This menu item displays drive information and settings.

86 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 Monitor

Drive

Status Identity

Drive (n) Drive (n)

Status Firmware Rev

Activity Vendor ID

Source Product ID

Encryption Serial Number

Topology Port A
(A) Status PID
WWNN (A) SCSI ID

SCSI Drive
Speed Speed
(A) (A) Topology PID
(A) (B)

Loop ID Hashed
Version*
Speed
(A) Address (A) (A) SAS Drive
Fibre Channel Drive
Port B Loop ID
Status (A)

Version*
Speed (B)
Fibre Channel Drive

*Ultrium 3 and 4 half height SAS drive sleds and Ultrium 4

Hashed
Address (B) Fibre Channel drive sled might be listed as Version 2.
a77ug035

SAS Drive

Figure 68. Monitor: Drive menu

Important: Encryption is not supported on Gen3 drives or SCSI drives. With Gen3 or SCSI drives,
Encryption will not appear in the OCP menu.

Operations 87
Under Status and Drive (n) are the following items:
v Status - the current status of the drive
v Activity - the current action being performed by the drive
v Source - the serial number of the cartridge currently in the drive
v Encryption - indicates the type of data encryption currently set for the selected drive (will not appear
on Gen3 or SCSI drives)
v Topology - the topology chosen for a fibre library (see “Fibre Channel Interface” on page 33)
v Speed - indicates the speed of the fibre channel (fibre library)
v Link - indicates the status of the fibre channel (fibre library)
v Hashed Address - an address calculated from the WWID

Under Identity and Drive (n) are the following items:

v Firmware Rev - the current level of drive firmware
v Vendor ID - Dell
v Product ID - drive inquiry string
v Serial Number - the drive serial number
v Version - Ultrium 3 and 4 half high SAS drives and Ultrium 4 Fibre Channel drives may be listed as
Version 2.
v SCSI ID - the unique identifier assigned to a SCSI drive
v WWNN - the fibre channel drive's World Wide Node Name
v Topology - the topology chosen for the fibre channel drive
v Speed - indicates the speed of the fibre channel tape drive
v Loop ID - unique identifier assigned to a fibre channel tape drive
v PID - port identification (SAS only)

Monitor: Inventory
This menu item displays the current library inventory of a 4U library.

88 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 Monitor

Inventory

Magazines Drive (n)

(Drive
status)
Upper Left Upper Right

Lower Left Lower Right

a77ug036
(Graphic of left (Graphic of right
magazine) magazine)

Figure 69. Example of a 4U Monitor: Inventory menu

Note: 2U has a single right-side magazine.

Under Magazine choose one of the following to see a graphical representation of the cartridge
magazine(s). Slots containing cartridges will be highlighted.

Magazines > Lower Left

I/O 3 7 8 9
I/O 2 4 5 6
I/O 1 1 2 3

Idle Rand

Magazines > Upper Left

18 19 20 21
14 15 16 17
10 11 12 13
a77ug166

Idle Rand
Figure 70. Overview of inventoried cartridges: Left magazines of a 4U Library

Note: Left magazine of a 2U Library has a 1-slot I/O Station.

Operations 89
The black boxes are inventoried cartridges. Press the up and down keys to scroll. Note that this magazine
has a 3-slot I/O Station. These slots can be changed to storage slots if needed. See “Configuring I/O
Stations and Reserving Slots” on page 136.

Press SELECT to display all empty slots and cartridge serial numbers in the associated magazine.

Figure 71. Detailed information on cartridges residing in a magazine

Table 21. Detailed information on cartridges residing in a magazine

▌1▐ Magazine slot number ▌3▐ Media type (generation of cartridge)
▌2▐ Cartridge volume serial number ▌4▐ Encryption abbreviation for LTO4 cartridges:
or “Empty” (meaning no v EC - encryption capable (The LTO 4 cartridge does not
cartridge currently residing in contain encrypted data).
slot)
v ED- encrypted data (The LTO 4 cartridge does contain
encrypted data).

Control Menu
The Control Menu contains the following items:
v Open I/O Station
v Move Cartridges
v Magazine
v Re-Inventory

Control: Open I/O Station

Use this menu item to open the I/O station.

Control
a77ug052

Open I/O Station

Figure 72. Control: I/O station menu

Important: Wait for the messages before you insert or remove cartridges to ensure that the library is
ready to handle the cartridges. After the I/O station is closed, you must wait for the library to complete
its inventory before normal library operations commence.

90 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Control: Move Cartridges
Use this menu item to move cartridges in the library.

Control

Move Cartridges

a77ug053
Source Source Volume Destination Destination
Type Serial Type

Figure 73. Control: Move Cartridges menu

To move a cartridge from point A to point B, you must make the following choices:
v Source Type - Drive, I/O station, magazine. Only the source type(s) that contain cartridges will be
listed.
v Source - the choices start with the choice made in the preceding item and then advances through all
available choices.

Note: If the Attention LED is ON due to a suspect cartridge, that cartridge will be identified by an
exclamation point (!) when scrolling through the source cartridges.
v Volume Serial - the serial number of the cartridge
v Dest Type - the destination Drive, I/O station, magazine
v Dest - the choices start with the choice made in the preceding item and then advances through all
available choices.

Control: Magazine
Use this menu item to unlock the cartridge magazines.

Control

Magazine

Left Right
a77ug054

"Left magazine "Right magazine

unlocking" unlocking"

Figure 74. Control: Magazine menu

Choose "Left" or "Right" to unlock the corresponding cartridge magazine(s). The magazines can now be
removed from the library by gently pulling each magazine out of the library. To replace a magazine,

Operations 91
insert the back of the magazine into the front of the library and gently push the magazine into the library.
The magazine will lock when inserted into the library.

Attention: After inserting the magazines into the library, you must wait for the library to complete its
inventory before proceeding with normal library operations.

If the magazines are not pulled out of the library within 15 seconds after they are unlocked, the
command will cancel and you will have to repeat the process to unlock the magazines.

Control: Re-Inventory
Use this menu item to initiate a scan of the cartridges currently in the library.

Control

a77ug055
Re-Inventory

Figure 75. Control: Re-Inventory menu

Note: It may take up to five minutes to complete the library inventory.

Configure Menu
The Configure Menu is used during the initial setup of your library and when changes need to be made
to your library's configuration. This menu contains the following items:
v Logical Libraries
v Library Settings
v Drive
v Network
v Set Access PIN
v Save/Restore
v Set Date and Time

Configure: Logical Libraries

Use this menu item to select the number of logical libraries. The Currently Configured - x section shows
the number of logical libraries currently configured.

92 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Figure 76. Configure: Logical Libraries menu

Note: The maximum number of Logical Libraries in a 2U is two.

Note: This menu is only available on libraries with multiple drives.

Note: Whenever there is a hardware configuration change such as drives being swapped with different
form factors (i.e. HH to FH or FH to HH), a library configuration change is needed. Reconfiguring the
library by reassigning the amount of logical libraries will clear this issue.

Operations 93
Configure: Library

Configure

Logical Library Settings

Logical Lib Settings

General

1 2 3 4

Auto Clean

I/O Station(s) Mode

enabled

Host Label
Length
Random Sequential

Autoload

Loop
a77ug056

Active Slots

Figure 77. Configure: Library menu

Note: The Remove DCS No is only available on libraries with the DCS feature.

The following library configuration items are in this menu:

v Mode:
– Random: In random mode, the library allows the server's (host's) application software to select any
data cartridge in any order.
– Sequential: In sequential mode, the library's firmware predefines the selection of the cartridges.
After initialization, the firmware causes the library to select the first available cartridge found
(counting from the I/O Station through slot 23) for loading into the drive.

Important: A Logical Library in Sequential Mode supports only one tape drive. If it contains more
than one drive, only the first drive in the Logical Library is used and the other drives are not
supported.

94 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 - Autoload: Sequential mode with autoload mode ON loads the first available cartridge (slot with
the lowest numerical value that contains a cartridge) automatically if the library powers ON with
an empty drive.
- Loop: Sequential mode with loop mode ON loads the cartridge in the lowest numerical slot after
the cartridge in the highest numerical slot has been filled and sent back to its home slot. This
allows endless backup operations without user interaction.
- Starting Sequential Mode
v Autoload Option:
– If the Autoload option is set to ON (Configure > Library Settings > Autoload), the accessor
will load the first cartridge (cartridge located in the slot with the lowest numeric value)
found in the storage inventory area into the drive upon power ON of the library. If the
library powers on with a cartridge already in the drive, sequential mode will start with that
cartridge unless the host issues a rewind and unload command to the drive. In that case, the
next cartridge in sequence will be loaded into the drive.
– If the Autoload Option if OFF, sequential mode must be started by selecting the Move
Cartridges option (Control > Move Cartridges) to load the first cartridge (or any cartridge)
into the drive. Whatever cartridge is loaded into the drive, that is where the sequence starts
from. For example, if a cartridge from the fifth lowest numeric storage slot containing a
cartridge is loaded using the Move Cartridges option, after the host issues a rewind/unload
command, the next cartridge loaded will be the cartridge from the next higher numeric slot.
Cartridges need not be in contiguous slots.
v Loop Option:
If the Loop option is set to ON (Configure > Library Settings > > Loop), when the last
cartridge (cartridge in the highest numeric slot) is unloaded and placed back into storage, the
accessor will immediately start over again loading the first cartridge into the drive.
- Stopping Sequential Mode: To stop sequential mode, use the Move Cartridges option from the
Control menu (Control > Move Cartridges) to unload the drive. the next sequential cartridge will
NOT be loaded. To restart sequential mode, use the same Control menu command to load a
cartridge. The loading sequence will resume from that numeric slot in the cartridge inventory.
v Active Slots - the number of active slots in each logical library.

Note: Slots can be reserved so that they are invisible to the host. It may be necessary to set the number
of Active Slots to match the number of slots that are available to the ISV software. Reserved slots are
created by reducing the number of active slots.
v Auto Clean - Use this menu item to enable the Auto Clean function. All cleaning cartridges must have
"CLNxxxLx" as part of the bar code.
With Auto Clean disabled, the cleaning tape can be stored in any data slot if you wish to manually
clean the drives. This is not recommended.
With Auto Clean disabled, the cleaning tape can be stored in any data slot if it was put there under
Backup Application control. In other words, the Backup Application is controlling the cleaning of the
tape drives and the cleaning tape would be imported into this library under its control.

Note: The universal cleaning cartridge has a bar code CLNUxxLx. This cleaning cartridge is used to
clean all LTO generation tape drives.
For Auto Clean to function, the following criteria must be met:
– On 4U libraries with library firmware of .80 or lower that still contain a Dedicated Cleaning Slot
(DCS), or 4U libraries with library firmware higher than 1.95 that chose to retain the DCS in their
library, a CLN cartridge must be present in that slot.
– On libraries that don't have a DCS, a storage slot must be reserved (RSVD) by reducing the active
slot count by one.
– A cleaning cartridge (CLNxxxLx) must be placed or moved to the reserved slot.
– Auto Clean must be enabled.

Operations 95
 Note: Cleaning cartridges must be replaced after 50 cleanings. The Web User Interface inventory screen
will show the number of times the media has been loaded, not the number of cleaning sessions
remaining. Subtract this number from 50 to determine the number of cleanings remaining.
v I/O Station(s) enabled - The I/O Station(s) can be enabled (the default), or disabled so the stations can
be utilized as storage slots.
v Remove DCS - If the DCS has been removed, it cannot be reinstated. This option will no longer appear
in the Operator Control Panel.
v Host Label Length - The Host Label Length is related to the Bar Code Labels appearing on the media
being used. The default value is 8, but 6 can also be chosen.

Configure: Drive

Configure

Drive

Drive Interface Control Path

SAS drives SCSI ID A Speed

do not
require user
configuration
A Type

A Loop ID
a77ug299

Fibre Channel Drive

Figure 78. Configure: Drive menu

The following items are in this menu:

v Drive Interface - use this to assign a SCSI ID to a SCSI drive or to assign a Port Speed, Port Type, and
Loop ID to a Fibre Channel drive. SAS drives do not require user configuration. For more information
on drive interfaces, refer to “Host Interfaces” on page 30.
v Control Paths - use this to enable the drive as a control path drive. Each logical library must have a
control path drive; however, all drives in a logical library can be designated as control path drives.

96 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Configure: Network

Configure

Network

IP Stack

DHCP-OFF DHCP-OFF
DHCP-ON (IPv4 & IPv4+IPv6) (IPv6)

IP Address Stateless
autoconfig

Netmask Prefix Length

Static IPv6
Address

Gateway
Gateway

a77ug043

Ethernet Ethernet

Figure 79. Configure: Network menu

Use these menu items to change the current network settings which allow you to access the library
remotely via a web browser.
v IP Stack - Choose IPv4 only, IPv6 only, or IPv4 & IPv6.
v IPv6 Only and Dual Stack IPv4 & IPv6 - Choose Enable Stateless Auto Config Address (Web User
Interface) or Stateless Autoconfig (Operator Control Panel) if assigned IPv6 IP addresses are desired. To
view the assigned IPv6 addresses after enabling Stateless Auto Config Address, do the following:
– Operator Control Panel (IPv6 Only): Monitor > Library > Network
If you choose Dual Stack IPv4 & IPv6, you must be prepared to enter both IPv4 and IPv6 IP
addresses.
v DHCP - (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) If this is enabled, your library host will negotiate the
connection with the library. If DHCP is disabled, the following information is necessary to establish the
remote access.
v IP Address - the IP address of the library
v Netmask - the Network Mask address of the library

Operations 97
v IP Stack - the IP Stack manages static IP addresses
v Stateless autoconfig - allows IPv6 hosts to be configured automatically when connected to a routed
IPv6 network
v Prefix length - the length of the IP address prefix
v Static IPv6 address - a static IPv6 address that has been assigned to the library
v Gateway - the Gateway address of the library
v Ethernet - the current speed setting of the ethernet interface
v DNS Server 1 - the first DNS server address
v DNS Server 2 - the second DNS server address

Note: If a host and domain name are entered instead of an address, the IPv4 or IPv6 address will be
resolved from the DNS using that name. That address will be stored in the library rather than the name.
Therefore, if the address changes, the name or a new address will have to be entered.

Configure: Set Access PIN

Use this menu item to enable/disable, set or change the Access PIN (personal identification number)
which is used to restrict access to the Control, Configure, and Service menus.

Note: Record the Access PIN and store this in a secure location for future reference. Library configuration
files, saved with the Save Library Config menu, do not include the Access PIN.

The Operator Control Panel (OCP) pin is turned off by default, but it is strongly recommended to be
enabled if your environment requires unit security. Enabling the OCP pin feature prevents the unit
settings from being tampered with. Users will be allowed to review the library status and manipulate
media without entering the OCP pin.

If a unit administrator needs to make a configuration change in the unit, the OCP will ask for the 4-digit
code in order to allow access to make changes. Once all the changes are completed the pin access will
expire after 5 minutes of inactivity in the OCP (there is no log-out function in the library for this feature).
A library reboot is recommended after making configuration changes to the library.

Figure 80. Configure: Set Access PIN menu

Setting the Operator Control Panel Access PIN using the Operator Control Panel:
1. Navigate to Configure > Set Access PIN.
2. Press the SELECT button to highlight the first digit of the 4-digit Access PIN.
3. Use the UP and DOWN buttons to select each digit.
4. Press the SELECT button to move to the next digit.
5. Repeat these steps for repeating the Access PIN.
6. After entering the final digit, press the DOWN button and select one of the following:
v Save - to apply your settings.

98 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 v Cancel - to delete your settings.

Note: In Figure 81, menus with the pound sign (#) are the only menus accessible when the Access
PIN is enabled, but entered incorrectly or before it is entered. To gain access to all menus, disable the
Access PIN or enter the correct PIN number when requested.

Figure 81. Pound sign (#) shows accessible menus when access PIN is enabled but before it is entered

Configure: Save/Restore
Use this menu item to restore the factory default settings.

Operations 99
 Configure

Save/Restore

a77ug045
Restore Passwords Restore All Restore Library Config. Save Library Config.

Figure 82. Configure: Save/Restore menu

v Restore Passwords - This menu item restores the factory default for both the RMU Admin user access
password and the service password.
v Restore all - This menu item restores all factory default settings (refer to Table 22).
v Restore Library Config - This menu item restores your saved library configuration from a USB device.
If you have more than one saved configuration file (.dbb) on your USB device, press Select, then use
the up and down keys to move between the different files. When the correct configuration file is
displayed, press Select again.
v Save Library Config - This menu item saves your library configuration to a USB device.

Note: Ensure the USB device is formatted for FAT12, FAT16, or FAT32 and does not use autorun files.

Note: Configuration files saved with one version of library firmware may not be compatible with other
versions of firmware. It is recommended to save a configuration file each time the library firmware is
upgraded. Restore the library using a configuration file that was saved with the same version of firmware
currently installed in the library.

Important: Restoring factory defaults will wipe out all the previous configuration data. Factory defaults
must be restored when the library drive is changed from a LTO half height to full height configuration, in
order for the library to correct the element addressing and drive numbering. If a new drive is added to
the library configuration, a restore factory default is not required.
Table 22. Factory Default Settings
Restored Item Default Setting* Comments
Autoclean Disabled
Logical Libraries 1
Active Slots Maximum number of slots in library
minus I/O Station
I/O Station Enabled 2U library has 1-slot I/O Station.4U
library has 3-slot I/O Station.
Encryption None License Key is protected, if
previously entered.
Ethernet Setting Auto
DHCP Enabled Note: DNS server addresses, if
available, will be automatically
assigned. If the DHCP server does
not find any DNS server, the DNS
fields will be set to "0.0.0.0".
Network IP Mode IPv4 Only

100 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Table 22. Factory Default Settings (continued)
Restored Item Default Setting* Comments
Bar Code Label Length Reported to 8
Host
SNMP Disabled
Email Notifications None
User Access Restore from Operator Control Panel
or Web User Interface
Admin secure (default)
Library Mode Random
Library Name (Blank)
Host Name (Depends on MAC Address)
Logs & Traces Error Log Mode Continuous
Path Failover Key No change License Key is protected, if
previously entered.
OCP Access PIN Disabled If OCP Access PIN has been enabled
Note: The initial Factory Default the default PIN is "1234".
setting is disabled. If the OCP Access
PIN setting is changed, executing
"Restore Defaults" will not change the
setting.
SSL for Web Disabled
Drives
Power Power On (All drives)
Drive 1 SCSI-ID 4 SCSI Drives
Drive 2 SCSI-ID 5 SCSI Drives
Drive 3 SCSI-ID 6 SCSI Drives
Drive 4 SCSI-ID 8 SCSI Drives
Drive 1 Loop-ID 4 FC Drives Arbitrated Loop
Drive 2 Loop-ID 5 FC Drives Arbitrated Loop
Control Path Drive Drive 1 only
Partitions None
Reserved Slots 2U:24, 4U:48
IPv6 Stateless Autoconfig Enabled
Note: * = all settings at library firmware level 4.xx and greater

In some cases, (such as Library Mode), the entry of one option precludes any other options from being
selected. In such cases, the details of the non-applicable options are not shown.

Configure: Set Date and Time

Use this menu item to set the current date and time in your library.

Operations 101
 Configure

a77ug046
Set Date
and Time

Figure 83. Configure: Set Date and Time menu

Configure: Path Failover

Use this menu item to enter the Path Failover Feature Activation key (Supported on 4U library only for
library firmware levels at or below 8.xx. Supported on both the 2U and 4U libraries with library firmware
levels above 8.xx).

Configure

a77ug119
Path Failover

Figure 84. Configure: Path Failover

For information on minimum firmware levels for path failover, see “Minimum firmware levels for
common library features” on page v. For more information, refer to the Dell PowerVault TL2000/TL4000
Failover Configuration Guide, included with the library documentation.

Service Menu
The 2U/4U library is always online, except for when the user enters the Service Library area. A warning
message appears stating that the library should be taken offline from the host before performing any
Service functions. It is up to the operator to ensure that it is taken offline by phoning the host operator or
other means of communication. Before performing any service functions, ensure the host is not
performing any data writing or retrieval.

The Service Menu contains the following items:

v Library Verify - an overall library diagnostic
v Run Tests - other library diagnostics
v Service - diagnostics and procedures for servicing the drive
v Display Contrast - setting the display from light to dark
v Telnet Service Port

Service: Library Verify

This is an overall diagnostic that exercises all library components. To run the Library Verify test, complete
the following procedure.

102 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 Service

a77ug047
Library Verify

Figure 85. Service: Library Verify menu

1. On the Operator Control Panel, navigate to Service > Library Verify and start diagnostic.
v Push the Select key to highlight the drive field. Use the Up/Down keys to select the drive. Push the
Select key to complete the selection.
v Push the Down key to highlight <Run>.
v Push the Select key to execute Library Verify.
2. When prompted by the Operator Control Panel display and the I/O Station opens, insert a blank or
scratch data cartridge.
3. Close the I/O Station by pushing it back into the library.
4. While the test is running, the Operator Control Panel will display library status.
v If the test PASSES, resume normal library operations.
v If the test FAILS, an error code will be displayed. Make note of the error, then refer to
“Troubleshooting” on page 149.

Note: Library Verify requires a piece of scratch media to perform the test. Once the test has been
initiated, the user must complete the test.
5. When prompted by the Operator Control Panel display and the I/O Station opens, remove the
cartridge used in the test.
6. Close the I/O Station by pushing it back into the library.
7. Use the Up/Down keys to highlight <Cancel>. Press the Select key to exit the Library Verify screen.

Service: Run Tests

Service
a77ug048

Run Tests

Figure 86. Service: Run Tests menu

The following library diagnostics are available in this menu:

v System Test - this test exercises library components by moving customer data cartridges from slots to
drives and back to slots. No data is written or read from the customer tapes. To run this test
successfully, the library must contain at least one data cartridge for every drive present in the library.
v Slot to Slot Test - The Slot To Slot test will move each resident data cartridge from one slot to another,
for each test cycle requested. When completing the Slot To Slot test, you will need to Inventory your
library before placing it back online, since this test scrambles the cartridge slot locations.

Note: After running the System Test or the Slot to Slot Test, the library will need to be re-inventoried.
It might be required to reboot the library after library diagnostics completes to ensure proper library
re-detection on some backup applications.

Operations 103
Service: Service (Drives)

Service

Service

a77ug058
Clean Drive Drive Tests Drive Power

Figure 87. Service: Service menu

The following drive diagnostics and service procedures are available in this menu:
v Clean Drive - The accessor takes the cleaning cartridge from the dedicated cleaning cartridge slot
(DCS), or previously reserved slot if no DCS is available, and inserts it into the drive. After the
cleaning is complete, the accessor removes the cleaning cartridge from the drive and returns it to the
dedicated cleaning cartridge slot or reserved slot.
v Drive Tests - Power On Self Test (POST), Normal Read/Write Test, Head Test, Media Test
1. Navigate to the desired test (Service > Service > Drive Tests).
a. Select the drive if more than one is installed.
b. Press the Enter button.
c. Press either + or - to toggle drive test options.
d. Move the cursor to the <Run> option.
e. Press the Enter button to apply the test.
2. Follow the instructions displayed on the Operator Control Panel, and, if required, insert a blank or
scratch cartridge into the I/O Station when requested.
3. The test will execute.
– If the test PASSES, resume normal library operations.
– If the test FAILS, an error will be displayed. Make note of the error, then refer to “Isolating Drive
Sled Problems” on page 157.
4. Remove the cartridge from the I/O Station, if needed, then close the I/O Station.
5. Press Cancel to exit the screen.
v Drive Power - use this item to turn drive power ON and OFF

Note: When configuration changes of a disabled drive are made from the Operator Control Panel
(OCP), the drive powers ON after committing changes. When configuration changes of a disabled
drive are made from the Web Interface (RMU), the drive does not power ON after committing changes.

Service: Display Contrast

104 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 Service

a77ug170
Display Contrast

Figure 88. Service: Display Contrast menu

The following display contrast settings are available in this menu:

v The numbers 1 through 10 will display, with 10 being the lightest shade and 1 being the brightest.

Service: Telnet Service Port

The Telnet Service Port menu item is to be used under the direction of Dell Technical Support.

Web User Interface Menus

Note: Depending on the version of library firmware, there may be differences between the Menu
description in this document and the web user interface menus on your library.

The following menus are available on the Web User Interface.

Table 23. Web User Interface Menus
▌-▐Monitor Library
Library Identity
Drive Identity
Library Status
Drive Status
Inventory
▌-▐Manage Library
Move Media
Perform Inventory
Release Magazine
▌-▐Configure Library
General
Logical Libraries
Path Failover
Encryption
Drives
Network
User Access
Date & Time
Logs & Traces
Email Notification
SNMP
Save/Restore
▌-▐Service Library

Operations 105
Table 23. Web User Interface Menus (continued)
Clean Drive
Advance Diagnostic (for Service Personnel only)
View Logs
View Drive Logs
Save Drive Dump
Perform Diagnostics
Key Path Diagnostics (if feature is available)
Upgrade Firmware
Reboot

Monitor Library Menu

The Monitor Library menu contains the following sub-menu items.
v “Monitor Library: Library Identity”
v “Monitor Library: Drive Identity” on page 107
v “Monitor Library: Library Status” on page 109
v “Monitor Library: Drive Status” on page 110
v “Monitor Library: Inventory” on page 112

Monitor Library: Library Identity

This page provides access to the static information about the library. No changes can be made from this
page. Table 24 lists all available elements on the Library Identity page. An "X" indicates that the element
displays for the specified library type.
Table 24. Library Identity page elements
Menu Item Description 2U 4U
Service Tag This is the unique identification number assigned by the manufacturer. X X
Product ID Machine Type and Model (this is the SCSI inquiry string of the Library) X X
Currently This is the current level of firmware installed on the library. For X X
Installed Library information on updating your firmware, refer to “Service Library:
Firmware Upgrade Firmware” on page 134.
Bootcode This is the level of bootcode firmware currently installed on the library. X X
Firmware Bootcode is the firmware that allows the library to begin initialization
Revision when it is powered ON.
Barcode Reader This is the version of barcode reader in the library. X X
IPv4 Address This is the Internet Protocol v4 Address assigned to your library. X X
Link local IPv6 This is the local IPv6 address assigned to your library. X X
address Note: It can verified with library firmware of A.40 or higher.
IPv6 static This is your library's IPv6 static assigned address. X X
assigned address
Router discovery This is the IPv6 router discovery address assigned to your library. X X
IPv6 address Note: There may be more than one IPv6 discovery address if there is
more than one IPv6 router available in your network environment.
MAC Address This is the machine's access code assigned to your library. X X
WWide Node This is the Worldwide Node Name assigned to your library. X X
Name

106 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Table 24. Library Identity page elements (continued)
Menu Item Description 2U 4U
Logical Library x The Extended Logical Libraries Information table displays information X X
Library Mode about the logical libraries currently assigned in your library. For each
logical library in your library, either Random or Sequential Loop
Autoload will be displayed.

a77ug090
Figure 89. The 4U library Monitor Library: Library Identity page

This view is correct for a library with multiple logical partitions. The Library Identify screen will be
different for a library with a single logical partition.

Monitor Library: Drive Identity

This page provides the following detailed information about the drive. No changes can be made from
this page. The displayed information will vary depending on the library model and drive type (SCSI,
SAS, or Fibre Channel). Table 25 lists all available elements on the Drive Identity page. An "X" indicates
that the element displays for the specified drive type.
Table 25. Drive Identity page elements
Menu Item Description 2U Library 4U Library
SCSI Fibre SAS SCSI Fibre SAS
Vendor ID This identifies the manufacturer of the tape drive. X X X X X X
Product ID This is the Type and Model of the Library. X X X X X X
Note: HH means Half-High drive, and TD means
Full-High drive.
Serial This is the unique identification number of the tape X X X X X X
Number drive that was assigned by the manufacturer.
Version Only Version 2 (V2) half-high drives will have a X X X X
separate version line with the number 2.
Firmware This is the current level of firmware installed on the X X X X X X
Revision drive. For information on updating your firmware, refer
to “Service Library: Upgrade Firmware” on page 134.
SCSI ID This is the unique identifier assigned to the SCSI drive X X
to enable it to receive communications from the host
computer.

Operations 107
Table 25. Drive Identity page elements (continued)
Menu Item Description 2U Library 4U Library
SCSI Fibre SAS SCSI Fibre SAS
Element This is the unique identifier assigned to the drive that X X X X X X
Address allows the host to recognize and communicate with the
drive.
Control Path If the drive communicates all messages from the host to X X X X X X
Drive the library, then it is considered the control path drive.
If the drive is the control path drive, this element
displays "Yes." If not, this element displays "No." All
drives in a logical library may be a control path drive.
Data If the drive is compressing data, this element displays X X X X X X
Compression "Yes." If not, this element displays "No."
Interface This identifies the drive host interface. X X X X X X
Type
Node Name This is the Worldwide node Name assigned to a Fibre X X
drive.
Worldwide This is the Worldwide ID assigned to a SAS drive. X X
ID (Ports A and B)
Port A This provides information about Port A. X X
Port Name This is the name assigned to a Fibre channel port that is X X
"enabled".
Topology This is the type of connection to the host. X X
FC-AL Loop This is the Fibre Channel - Arbitrated Loop ID of the X X
ID drive. Options are: LN, L or N.
Speed This is the current speed setting of the drive. Choices X X
are Auto (where the drive will automatically negotiate
the speed of the drive to match that of the server),
1Gb/s, 2Gb/s, 4Gb/s, or 8 Gb/s for Fibre Channel; 3
Gb/s or 6 Gb/s for SAS..
Port B This provides information about Port B. For Fibre X X
Channel drives, Port B is Disabled.

108 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 a77ug288
Figure 90. The 4U library Monitor Library: Drive Identity page showing one Ultrium 3 SAS half height V2 drive (#1) and
one Ultrium 4 SAS half height drive (#2)

Monitor Library: Library Status

This page displays the dynamic information about the library, such as the current status of the
components. No changes can be made from this page. Table 26 lists all available elements on the Library
Identity page. An "X" indicates that the element displays for the specified library type.
Table 26. Library Status page elements
Menu Item Description 2U 4U
Status Library status is displayed using icons with text. A checkmark with the X X
word "Ready" indicates the library is functioning properly. An
exclamation point with the word "Caution" indicates the library can
function, but is experiencing a problems. An X with the word "Error"
indicates the library is not functioning because of a serious problem.
Cartridge in This identifies a cartridge that is currently being moved by the accessor. X X
Transport "None" is displayed if no cartridge is being moved.
Number of Moves This is the number of times the accessor has moved a cartridge from X X
Point A to Point B (for example, from a storage slot to a drive).
Total Power On This is the total amount of time that the library has been powered ON. X X
Time
Accessor Status This is the current status of the accessor. X X
Left Magazine This displays whether the left magazine is "Present" or "Not Present". X
Right Magazine This displays whether the right magazine is "Present" or "Not Present". X
1. Left Magazine This displays whether the lower left magazine is "Present" or "Not X
Present".
1. Right Magazine This displays whether the lower right magazine is "Present" or "Not X
Present".

Operations 109
Table 26. Library Status page elements (continued)
Menu Item Description 2U 4U
2. Left Magazine This displays whether the upper left magazine is "Present" or "Not X
Present".
2. Right Magazine This displays whether the upper right magazine is "Present" or "Not X
Present".

Figure 91. The 4U library Monitor Library: Library Status page

Monitor Library: Drive Status

This page provides the following detailed dynamic information about the drive in the library. No changes
can be made from here. The displayed information varies depending on the library model and drive type
(SCSI, SAS, or Fibre Channel). Table 27 lists all available elements on the Drive Status page. An "X"
indicates that the element displays for the specified drive type.
Table 27. Drive Status page elements
Menu Item Description 2U Library 4U Library
SCSI Fibre SAS SCSI Fibre SAS
Status The status of the drive. A check mark indicates X X X X X X
that the drive is operating properly. An
exclamation point indicates that the drive is
operating but has a problem. An X indicates that
the drive is not operational because of a serious
problem.
Cartridge in The serial number of the cartridge currently in X X X X X X
Drive the drive. If the drive does not contain a
cartridge, "None" is displayed.
Drive Error If the drive generated an error code, it is X X X X X X
Code displayed here. If the drive did not generate an
error, "No Error" is displayed.
Cooling Fan Displays whether the drive 's cooling fan is ON X X X X X X
Active (checked) or OFF.
Drive Indicates whether the drive is operating. X X X X X X
Activity
Port A Indicates whether Port A is logged on or out. X X X X
Status
Port B Indicates whether Port B is logged on or out. X X
Status
Port Name The name that is assigned to the Port on the X X
drive.

110 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Table 27. Drive Status page elements (continued)
Menu Item Description 2U Library 4U Library
SCSI Fibre SAS SCSI Fibre SAS
Speed The speed setting of the drive. Choices are Auto X X X X
(where the drive automatically negotiates the
speed of the drive to match that of the server), 1
Gb/s, 2 Gb/s, 4 Gb/s, or 8 Gb/s for Fibre
Channel; 3 Gb/s or 6 Gb/s for SAS.
Topology The type of connection to the host. The choices X X
are LN-port, N-port, and L port.
Hashed SAS The Hashed SAS address is a value that is X X
address calculated from the WWID for use on the SAS
interface
FC-AL Loop The loop position number; it shows the numeric X X
ID ID.
Encryption The following entries show the current encryption X X X X
Status* status for this drive (method, key path, BOP,
density report).
Encryption The type of encryption that is enabled on the X X X X
method* drive.
Key path* The path that is used for transferring an X X X X
encryption key. This setting is dependent upon
the encryption method selected.
BOP policy* Indicates whether the Beginning of Partition X X X X
(BOP) policy is enabled or disabled. If encryption
is enabled, the policy type might display
depending on the encryption method used. Policy
types include Internal label select, Internal label
always, Enabled, or Disabled. Other type
designations might display if Advanced
Encryption Settings are set (Engineering Support
use only).
Density LTO drives do not support settings changes to X X X X
reporting* report various densities, thus LTO drives always
report (Other).
*These features are not supported on Gen3 SAS drive types or any SCSI drive types.

Operations 111
 a77ug093
Figure 92. The 4U library Monitor Library: Drive Status page

Term Definitions:
v BOP (Beginning of Partition): BOP (Beginning of Partition) is a SCSI term, which in a single partition
format is the same as beginning of tape. It means that policy is determined on writes at LB zero.
Appending to a tape [or overwriting at a non-zero LB] does not change the policy already in use for
that tape.
v Key Path: The avenue where key resolution is completed. This avenue is left to be determined by
method (and is the same), but can be set differently for some hybrid modes.
v Density Reporting: Affects host reporting of density and is included to support legacy needs for
transparency. The default of not masking encrypted densities means that the host can see a different
density code for encrypted vs non-encrypted tapes (x72 [enc] as opposed to x52 [non-enc]). This feature
masks this code so the drive reports the primary density only. Normally this feature is set to the drive
default (which is to show encr density).

Note: LTO drives do not support setting or reporting various densities, thus LTO drives always report
0xFE (Other).

Monitor Library: Inventory

This page provides detailed information about the tape inventory in the library. A summary of each
magazine is shown. To get detailed information about the cartridges that reside in a magazine, click on
the + button. This will expand the display for the magazine. To determine whether a cartridge is
encrypted, refer to the Comments column in the Cartridge Details screen. See Figure 94 on page 114.

112 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 Inventory As Of 14:02:04 Library Time
Drive Inventory
Drive Status Label Source
1 Empty -------------

Magazine Inventory
8 9 10 11 +

4 5 6 7
IO-Station 1 2 3

22 21 20 +
23
19 18 17 16
15 14 13 12

a77ug067
Refresh

Figure 93. The 2U library Monitor Library: Inventory page

Operations 113
 a77ug099
*Res*

Figure 94. The 4U library Monitor Library: Inventory page (Right Magazines)

Note: The 4U graphic shows the Slot Inventory for the right magazines of this library as an example. The
left magazines are similar.

Manage Library Menu

The Manage Library menu contains the following sub-menu items.
v “Manage Library: Move Media”
v “Manage Library: Perform Inventory” on page 115
v “Manage Library: Release Magazine” on page 115

Manage Library: Move Media

This page allows the user to move tape cartridges within the library. The source and destination are
selected and then the MOVE button in the center of the screen is clicked to activate the move.

114 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 a77ug072
Figure 95. Manage Library: Move Media page

The following elements appear in the Source and Destination screens.

Element
In the Source screen, this identifies the library element that contains a cartridge. In the
Destination screen, this identifies the library element that is empty and can receive a cartridge.
Volume Serial
In the Source screen, this element displays the serial number of the cartridge. In the Destination
screen, this element contains no information.

Manage Library: Perform Inventory

This page allows the library to be re-scanned to determine the current media inventory.

a77ug076

Figure 96. Manage Library: Perform Inventory page

Manage Library: Release Magazine

This page allows the user to release the right or left magazine from the library.
a77ug078

Figure 97. Manage Library: Release Magazine page

Note: To manually release a magazine, see “Releasing the Magazines Manually” on page 175. However,
this manual process should only be used if the magazine cannot be released using the Operator Control
Panel or the Web User Interface.

Operations 115
Configure Library Menu
The Configure Library menu contains the following submenu items:
v “Configure Library: General”
v “Configure Library: Logical Libraries” on page 117
v “Configure Library: Path Failover” on page 118
v “Configure Library: Encryption” on page 118
v “Configure Library: Drives” on page 120
v “Configure Library: Network” on page 122
v “Configure Library: User Access” on page 123
v “Configure Library: Date & Time” on page 125
v “Configure Library: Logs & Traces” on page 125
v “Configure Library: Event Notification” on page 126
v “Configure Library: SNMP” on page 127
v “Configure Library: Save/Restore Configuration” on page 128

Configure Library: General

This page allows you to make changes to general library configuration elements. As changes are made,
they will only be applied after the Apply Selections or the Submit button is selected. After making the
selection, a warning page will inform you of the impact of the proposed change. In some cases a pop-up
screen will ask for confirmation. Many changes will also require a library reboot.
Table 28. Configure Library: General page elements
Menu Item Description 2U 4U
Library Name Enter the name of the library. X X
I/O Station The I/O Station defaults to I/O Station Enabled. Choosing Disabled (no X X
Enabled checkmark) adds one more storage slot to the 2U library, and 3 more
storage slots to the 4U library. When the I/O Station is disabled,
removing or adding media to the library must be performed by releasing
the left and/or right magazine(s).
Auto Clean Auto Clean defaults to Disabled. For Auto Clean to function, a cleaning X X
Enabled cartridge (CLNxxxLx) must be resident in a reserved library slot and
Auto Clean must be enabled (turned on).
Note: If Auto Clean is enabled, and a cleaning cartridge is not resident in
a reserved slot, the Auto Clean Status field in the web System Status
screen will post a "Chk Media/Rsvd Slot" message.
Bar Code Label The default bar code label length is 8, but can be set to 6. The bar code X X
Length Reported label length is a "reported" length. This setting will cause the host
To Host computer to only see the first 6 characters of the label or all 8 characters.
This setting does not affect the bar code label that is shown on any of the
library user interfaces (always shows all 8 characters).

Table 29. Configure Library: Specific page elements

Menu Item Description 2U 4U
Library Mode Choices are Random and Sequential. If you choose Sequential, you may X X
also activate Autoload and/or Loop. If there is more than one logical
library, there is a Library Mode entry for each logical library.
Important: If a Logical Library in Sequential Mode contains more than
one drive, only the first drive in the Logical Library will be utilized.

116 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Table 29. Configure Library: Specific page elements (continued)
Menu Item Description 2U 4U
Active Slots It may be necessary to modify the number of active slots to agree with X X
the number of slots allowed by your host software. To modify the
number of active slots in your library, click on the drop down list and
select the number of slots you want active in your library. Also, the Auto
Clean function requires the cleaning cartridge to be in a DCS or reserved
slot. Reserved slots are created by reducing the number of active slots.

Figure 98. The 4U library Configure Library: General and Extended page

Configure Library: Logical Libraries

To partition your multi-drive library, select the number of logical libraries you would like to create in
your library, then click Submit.

One cartridge magazine cannot be assigned to two logical libraries. If you partition a multi-drive library,
each of the magazines must be assigned to a logical library on a magazine boundary. The entire magazine
must be part of one logical library only. In a fully populated 4U library with four logical libraries,
resource assignments will be as follows:
v Logical Library 1 will contain Drive 1 and the lower left cartridge magazines.
v Logical Library 2 will contain Drive 2 and the upper left cartridge magazines.
v Logical Library 3 will contain Drive 3 and the lower right cartridge magazine.
v Logical Library 4 will contain Drive 4 and the upper right cartridge magazine.

The I/O Station and the reserved slot (or dedicated cleaning slot (DCS) if one is assigned) are shared
among all logical libraries.

Note: When reducing the number of drives in your library, update the Logical Library configuration.
This will remove the Attention LED on the front panel and the exclamation mark on the Home screen
indicating that a drive is missing.

Operations 117
Updating the Logical Library configuration will also update the drive element addressing and drive
numbering. Replacing LTO half height drives with full height drives may require you to execute Restore
Factory Defaults to correctly update the drive element addressing and drive numbering. See “Configure
Library: Save/Restore Configuration” on page 128.

a77ug098
Figure 99. The 4U library Configure Library: Logical Libraries page

Configure Library: Path Failover

This page allows the user to enter the Path Failover feature activation key (Supported on 4U library only
for library firmware levels at or below 8.xx. Supported on both the 2U and 4U libraries with library
firmware levels above 8.xx) For information on minimum firmware levels for path failover, see
“Minimum firmware levels for common library features” on page v. For more information, refer to the
Dell PowerVault TL4000 Failover Configuration Guide, included with the library documentation.

a77ug117
Figure 100. The 4U library Configure Library: Path Failover page

Enter the Feature Activation key and click Activate. This page will display if you have entered the feature
key correctly.

Figure 101. Path Failover license verification page

Note: Follow the instructions in the Dell PowerVault TL4000 Failover Configuration Guide to configure your
environment for failover.

Configure Library: Encryption

Note: Application Managed Encryption (AME) does not require a license key. Library Managed
Encryption requires a license key. Contact your TSR (technical sales representative) to purchase this
feature.

Important: The Advanced Encryption Settings are for Engineering Support use only. These fields should
always be set to "No Advanced Setting".

118 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
For information on minimum firmware levels for Application-Managed and Library -Managed
Encryption, see “Minimum firmware levels for common library features” on page v.

Setting or Changing a Drive's Method of Encryption

1. Enter your library's IP Address in an internet browser address field and press ENTER.
2. Log in to the Web User Interface. Refer to “Login” on page 20.
3. Expand Configure Library in the left navigation panel.
4. Click Encryption.

a77ug199
Figure 102. Feature Activation Key screen

5. On the Encryption screen, enter the Feature Activation Key to enable the library managed
encryption options.
6. Click Activate to save the key and expand the screen for additional encryption settings.

a77ug190

Figure 103. Configure Library: Encryption Feature configuration screen

7. Select Enable SSL for EKM to enable Secure Sockets Layer for the IBM SKLM application.
8. Select an Encryption method, from the pull down menu, for each logical library.
v Without an encryption license key, select None or Application Managed Encryption.
v With an encryption license key, select Library Managed Encryption.
9. Select an Encryption policy, from the pull down menu, for each logical library.
Operations 119
 v Encrypt All: This is the default policy. It encrypts all cartridges using the default data keys
specified in the key manager. This setting applies to all drives in the TL2000/TL4000 logical
library.
v Internal Label - Selective Encryption: Check your tape backup software application
documentation to see if this feature is supported.
v Internal Label - Encrypt All: Check your tape backup software application documentation to see
if this feature is supported.
10. A primary and secondary key management server can be set for each logical library. Each partition
has its own Encryption and key management settings. Maintaining primary and secondary key
management servers are desired for maximum availability of encrypted backup and recovery. These
settings are required for Library Managed Encryption only. Enter the EKM Server Setting
information.
v Primary IP address (IPv4 or IPv6): Enter the IP address of the primary key management server.
v Primary TCP port: After entering the Primary IP address, the library will automatically set the
value of the Primary TCP port.
v Secondary IP address (IPv4 or IPv6): Enter the IP address of the secondary key management
server.
v Secondary TCP port: After entering the Secondary IP address, the library will automatically set
the value of the Secondary TCP port.

Note: The Default Port for TCP (SSL disabled) is 3801. The Default Port for SSL is 443. These
values are the default values set by the library. They can be changed depending on the user
configuration but the user has to make sure they match the IBM SKLM properties file.

Note: If SSL is enabled the encryption host configuration will request a SSL port instead of a TCP
port. Review the IBM SKLM Knowledge Center online at http://www-01.ibm.com/support/
knowledgecenter/SSWPVP/welcome?lang=en for instructions to locate the appropriate port
settings.
11. Click Submit to apply the changes.
12. Install the IBM SKLM application on your host. Refer to the IBM SKLM Knowledge Center online for
information on locating the appropriate IP address and port.

Configure Library: Drives

This page allows you to modify the current ID assigned to a SCSI or Fibre Channel drive. This page
allows any drive in the library to be powered off by de-selecting the check mark in the Power On box.
The displayed information will vary depending on the library model and drive type (SCSI, SAS, or Fibre
Channel). Table 30 lists all available elements on this page. An "X" indicates that the element displays for
the specified drive type.
Table 30. Drive Identity page elements
Menu Item Description 2U Library 4U Library
SCSI Fibre SAS SCSI Fibre SAS
SCSI ID For each SCSI drive, click on the drop down list X X
and select the number of the slot in which the
drive is located.
Power On For each drive, click in the box to power ON the X X X X X X
selected drive.
Control Path The control path drive communicates messages X X X X X X
from the host to the library. Select this option for
each drive that you want to be a control path
drive. At least one drive in each logical library
must be designated as a control path drive.

120 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Table 30. Drive Identity page elements (continued)
Menu Item Description 2U Library 4U Library
SCSI Fibre SAS SCSI Fibre SAS
Port A Configuration:
Speed This is the current speed setting of the drive. For X X
each Fibre Channel drive, click on the drop down
list and select Automatic, 1Gb/s, 2Gb/s, 4 Gb/s,
or 8 Gb/s. For each SAS drive, select Automatic,
3 Gb/s, or 6 Gb/s. Selecting Automatic will
allow library speed to automatically negotiate to
the current server speed.
Topology For each Fibre Channel drive, click LN-Port, X X
L-Port, or N-Port.
FC-AL Loop This is the loop position number. The options are: X X
ID "Manual" or "Automatic".
Port B Configuration:
Port B is supported for SAS full height drives X X
only.
Note: Port B is only supported for failover.

Figure 104. The Configure Library: Drives page for a 2U library a77ug064

Topology

FC-AL Loop ID
a77ug095

Figure 105. The Configure Library: Drives page for a 4U library

Click one of the following:

Operations 121
v Refresh - to cancel the changes made to the screen.
v Submit - to apply the changes made to the screen.

Note: When configuration changes of a disabled drive are made from the Operator Control Panel (OCP),
the drive powers ON after committing changes. When configuration changes of a disabled drive are
made from the Web Interface (RMU), the drive does not power ON after committing changes.

Configure Library: Network

This page shows the current network configuration of the library and allows modification to the
configuration. When a change is requested, a pop-up box checks confirms the request.
1. Click Network in the left navigation pane, to display the Network page.

a77ug074
Figure 106. Configure Library: Network Page

Important: Do not click the Submit button until all changes have been made to the Network page.
Once the Submit button has been clicked, no other changes can be made until after the library has
applied the current changes.

After the Submit button has been clicked, depending on the changes made, you will either be
disconnected and need to login again or reboot the library.

Clicking the Refresh button will refresh the page and any changes made will not be retained.
2. Select a Protocol Stack - Choose IPv4 only, IPv6 only, or Dual Stack IPv4 & IPv6.
If you choose Dual Stack IPv4 & IPv6, you must be prepared to enter both IPv4 and IPv6 IP
addresses. The sections below will gray out depending on the choices made here.
3. Enter the Host Name.

Note: The underscore (_) is not allowed as part of a host name.

4. Enter the Domain Name.
5. DNS Primary - Enter the IP address of your primary DNS server.
6. DNS Secondary - Enter the IP address of your secondary DNS server.
7. Enable SSL for Web - If you desire to have SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) enabled, place a check in this
box.

Note: If you get a security certificate alert when logging in to the Web User Interface, you can install
the certificate or allow an exception (depending on the internet browser you are using). SSL is
enabled when the URL begins with https:// and some browsers will show a lock.

122 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 8. Ethernet Settings - Ethernet Settings choices are: Auto (the default), 10 Mbit/Half, 10 Mbit/Full, 100
Mbit/Half, 100 Mbit/Full. Please refer to www.Dell.com/support to determine the availability of
manual Ethernet settings in your library's firmware.
9. Enter IPv4 settings (if applicable).
a. Enable DHCP - Click this item ON to have the IP Address of your library automatically set by
the DHCP server.
b. Static Address - Enter the assigned IPv4 address. The format of an IPv4 IP address is a 32-bit
numeric address written as four numbers separated by periods.
c. Network Mask - Enter the assigned IPv4 Network Mask.
d. Gateway address - Enter the assigned IPv4 Gateway address. This address allows access outside
the local network.
10. Enter IPv6 settings (if applicable).
a. Enable DHCP - Click this item ON to have the IP Address of your library automatically set by
the DHCP server.
b. Enable Stateless Auto Config - Stateless Auto config is ALWAYS on (not defeatable).
c. Static Address - Enter the assigned IPv6 address. The format of an IPv6 IP address is a 128-bit
numeric address written as 8 groups of four numbers separated by colons.
d. Prefix length - The default prefix length is set to 64, but can be set to any length, depending
upon the address used.
e. Gateway address - Enter the assigned IPv6 Gateway address. This address allows access outside
the local network.
11. Click one of the following:
v Refresh - to cancel the changes made to the screen.
v Submit - to apply the changes made to the screen.

Note: Depending on the changes made, you will either be disconnected and need to login again, or
reboot the library. If a reboot is required, the following Warning message will appear after the
Submit button is clicked.

Figure 107. Warning Screen

The library must be rebooted or the changes will not take place.

Configure Library: User Access

This page allows the user to add and modify user accounts. See “Login” on page 20 for information
about user types.

The Configure Library > User Access page is accessible only to the Admin and Service login. Access is
denied to User and Superuser logins.

The Admin login has access to all library functions except Service Library > Advance Diagnostics.

The Service login has access to all library functions including Service Library > Advance Diagnostics.

Operations 123
 a77ug082
Figure 108. Configure Library: User Access page

The following elements are displayed on the User Access page.

Roles
v Check the Disable Superuser check box if you do not want Superuser to be listed on the Role listbox
(that is, prohibits Superuser login).
Check the Disable User check box if you do not want User to be listed on the Role listbox (that is,
prohibits User login). Clear the check box to allow Superuser or User login.

Passwords
v Role - The name that is associated with the chosen Access Level. Choose from User, Superuser,
Admin, or Service.

Note: Admin can select User, Superuser, and Admin roles. Service can select User, Superuser, Admin,
and Service roles.
v New Password (Enter Up To Twenty Characters) - Enter a new password to be associated with the
Access Level Name.
v Repeat Password - Reenter the new password for verification purposes.

Support Contact
v Support Name - The name of the individual within your company to contact for Web User Interface or
library support.

Note: Only one support person is configured for the entire tape library. The support person might or
might not be one of the user, superuser, or admin account holders.
v Support Phone - The phone number of the individual within your company to contact for Web User
Interface or library support.
v Support Email - The email address of the individual within your company to contact for Web User
Interface or library support.

Password Rules
v Minimum Number Of Characters - Choose the minimum password length. The factory default value
is 8. Possible range for this configuration option is 8 - 20. The maximum password length is 20.

124 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
v Minimum Number Of Upper Case Alphabetic Characters (A-Z) - Choose the minimum number of
uppercase alphabetic characters. The factory default value is 1. Possible range for this configuration
option is 0 - 3.
v Minimum Number Of Lower Case Alphabetic Characters (a-z) - Choose the minimum number of
lowercase alphabetic characters. The factory default value is 1. Possible range for this configuration
option is 0 - 3.
v Minimum Number Of Numeric Characters (0-9) - Choose the minimum number of numeric
characters. The factory default value is 1. Possible range for this configuration option is 0 - 3.
v Minimum Number Of Special Characters (!@#$%^&*()_+={}|[]\;':"<>?,./) - Choose the minimum
number of special characters. The factory default value is 0. Possible range for this configuration option
is 0 - 3.
v Maximum Number Of Identical Consecutive Characters - Choose the maximum number of identical
consecutive characters. The factory default value is 2. Possible range for this configuration option is 0 -
3. There is no limitation if 0 is selected.
v Maximum Number Of Failed Logins Before Password Is Locked - Choose the maximum number of
failed logins before the password is locked. The factory default value is 5. Possible range for this
configuration option is 0 - 10. There is no limitation if 0 is selected.

Note: When a password is locked, the login cannot continue. First, you must complete a valid login
with an admin account where the admin can change a password, or a restore factory default password
from the operator panel (if the admin account is the one that is locked out).
v Maximum Number Of Days Before Password Must Be Changed - Choose the maximum number of
days before the password must be changed. The factory default value is 90. Possible range for this
configuration option is 0 - 365. There is no limitation if 0 is selected.

Click one:
v Refresh - Cancels the changes that are made to the screen.
v Submit - Applies the changes that are made to the screen.

Configure Library: Date & Time

This page allows the user to set the time and date, and how it will be displayed.

a77ug061

Figure 109. The Configure Library: Date & Time page

Time (24H)
Using a 24-hour format, enter the current hour, minutes, and seconds.
Date Enter the current month, day, and year.

Click one of the following:

v Refresh - to cancel the changes made to the screen.
v Submit - to apply the changes made to the screen.

Configure Library: Logs & Traces

This page allows service personnel to set the error log mode to Continuous or to Stop trace at first error.

Operations 125
Figure 110. Configure Library: Logs & Traces page

It is recommended that you select Continuous for the Error Log Mode so that all information for logs
and traces will be captured.

Click one of the following:

v Refresh - to cancel the changes made to the screen.
v Submit - to apply the changes made to the screen.

Note: The trace level and trace filter selection options are only changeable by Service personnel.

Configure Library: Event Notification

This page allows the user to enter information for event notification. When set up correctly, Event
Notification allows the library to send an email to a designated individual when the library is
experiencing a problem.
a77ug065

Figure 111. Configure Library: Event Notification page

The following elements are displayed on the Event Notification page.

Notify Errors
Select this item to be notified of library errors via email.
Notify Warnings
Select this item to be notified of library warnings via email.
To Email Address
Enter the email address of the individual you would like to receive the errors and/or warnings.

Note: The TL2000/TL400 email address field cannot be empty (clear). The email notification setup allows
the user to turn off the feature by deselecting the notify error and notify warnings boxes. The user can
add an invalid email as long as the email address format is correct (i.e. a@xxx.xxx).

126 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
SMTP Server Address (IPv4 or IPv6)
Enter the address of the email server of the individual you would like to receive the errors
and/or warnings. This can be an IPv4 or IPv6 address, or a host name and domain. If a host
name and domain is listed, the IPv4 or IPv6 address will be resolved from the DNS using that
name, and the address will be stored rather than the name. If the address changes, a new name
or a new address will need to be entered.
Domain Name
Enter the Domain Name for your library. This field cannot be blank when using email
notification.

Note: If you attempt to enter a blank value for the Domain Name, a warning message will
appear. It will say If you are using Email Notification then a value is required for the Domain
Name.

Click one of the following:

v Refresh - to cancel the changes made to the screen.
v Submit - to apply the changes made to the screen.

Configure Library: SNMP

This page shows the current SNMP configuration of the library and allows modification to the
configuration. When a change is requested, a box checks to confirm the changes.

Click SNMP in the left navigation pane to display the SNMP page.

a77ug278

Figure 112. Configure Library: SNMP page

Note: For information about SNMP, see “SNMP Messaging” on page 7 and Appendix F, “SNMP Status
MIB Variables and Traps,” on page 237.

Note: If SNMP is not enabled (cleared), all SNMP fields are disabled.

SNMP
v Enabled - Check this box to have SNMP traps sent to an SNMP Management console.
v Community Name - An SNMP community name is a text string that acts as a password to authenticate
messages that are sent between the SNMP remote management application and the library. Enter your
preferred name, or leave as "public".
Operations 127
SNMP DESTINATIONS
v Target 1 - IP Address - If SNMP traps are enabled, enter an IP address where SNMP traps are sent.
v Target 2 - IP Address - Enter an optional second IP address where SNMP traps are sent, or leave as
0.0.0.0.
v Target 3 - IP Address - Enter an optional third IP address where SNMP traps are sent, or leave as
0.0.0.0.
v Version - The library offers three versions of the SNMP protocol; v1, v2, and v3. Select a version for
each Target IP address.
v Audit Logging - If SNMP is enabled and Audit Logging is enabled, the library sends SNMP traps to
an SNMP Management console when the library or tape drive configuration changes.

Note: This option is available only if the library firmware is 9.00 or higher, and the latest library MIB
file is added to the SNMP Management console.

SNMP V3 SECURITY
v User Name - Enter your preferred name, or leave as "initial".
v Authentication - The options for Authentication are none, MD5, or SHA.
v Authentication Password - The Authentication Password must be at least 8 characters in length. If
Authentication is set to none, this field and the Privacy and Privacy Password fields are disabled.
v Privacy - The options for Privacy are none, or DES. If Privacy is set to none, then the Privacy
Password field is disabled.
v Privacy Password - The Privacy Password must be at least 8 characters in length.

Note: The factory default settings for SNMP V3 Security are

v User Name - initial
v Authentication - none
v Privacy - none

Configure Library: Save/Restore Configuration

This page allows the library configuration to be reset to the factory defaults.

Saving and restoring configuration data can be done using the Remote Management Unit (RMU) and/or
the Operator Control Panel (OCP). The feature has been implemented on the RMU and on the OCP, but
with slightly different functionality.

Note: Configuration files saved with one version of library firmware may not be compatible with other
versions of firmware. It is recommended to save a configuration file each time the library firmware is
upgraded. Restore the library using a configuration file that was saved with the same version of firmware
currently installed in the library.

Since the RMU can be accessed remotely, its implementation will save/restore the configuration data
to/from a file on the host site. When entering commands on the OCP, the unit is accessed directly. For
this reason the OCP implementation will save/restore the configuration data to/from a USB memory
stick that is inserted into the USB connector on the library controller.

Note: Factory defaults must be restored when the library drive is changed from a LTO half height to full
height configuration, in order for the library to correct the element addressing and drive numbering. If a
new drive is added to the library configuration, a restore factory default is not required.

128 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 a77ug079
Figure 113. Configure Library: Save/Restore page

Service Library Menu

Some Service Library functions will post a warning message stating that the library should be taken
offline from the host before performing any Service functions. It is up to the operator to ensure that it is
taken offline at the host. Before performing any service functions, ensure the host is not performing any
data writing or retrieval.

Service Library: Clean Drive

If the library is not configured for Auto Clean, this page allows the user to manually clean the tape drive.

A drive cleaning is initiated only after the library or drive posted a status message that indicates
Cleaning Required

To manually complete a drive cleaning, complete the following steps:

1. Select a cleaning cartridge that is listed in the Slot # field.
2. Select a drive that is listed in the Drive field.
3. Click Clean. See Figure 116 on page 130.

Note: Enabling the Auto Clean function is recommended on the library. With the Auto Clean function
enabled, drive cleaning occurs automatically. The only time Auto Cleaning is disabled is when your
Backup Application requires that it has control.

Drives that do not require a cleaning are labeled with No Cleaning Required. See Figure 114.

a77ug259

Figure 114. No Cleaning Required

If there is no cleaning cartridge in the library, Clean cannot be selected and the Slot # displays N.A.. See
Figure 115
a77ug260

Figure 115. No cleaning cartridge in library

Note: If the library is configured for Auto Clean, and a cleaning cartridge is resident in a reserved slot,
the library automatically loads the drive with a cleaning cartridge. The drive completes a cleaning and
the library returns the cleaning cartridge to the reserved slot. If Auto Clean is enabled and a cleaning

Operations 129
cartridge is not present in a reserved slot, Auto Clean status on the Web User Interface Status screen
shows Chk Media/Rsvd Slot.

a77ug122
Figure 116. Service Library: Clean Drive page

Service Library: Advanced Diagnostics (for Service Personnel Only)

This menu is for use by Service Personnel only.

Service Library: View Logs

This page allows the library logs to be viewed after entering the following:
v Log Type
– Error Trace: Logs all the error messages
– Informational Trace: Logs all the informational messages created as the library operates
– Warning Trace: Logs all warning messages created by the library. Warning messages will not stop a
library's operation but does remind the user of issues that may become a problem. Example: Invalid
Media.
– Configuration Change Trace: Logs any configuration changes made, such as changing/adding
partitions, changing SCSI addresses, removing a DCS, etc.
– Standard Trace: Logs all library operations

Note: Ensure that all the pop-up facilities on the web browser are set to enable pop-up boxes to
appear. For example, on Microsoft Internet Explorer, under Tools, ensure that the Pop-up Blocker is
turned OFF and Internet Options > Security > Custom Level > Downloads > Automatic
Promptingfor file Downloads and File Downloads are both Enabled.
v Total Number of Entries
v Start Entry
v Number of Entries per Page
v View
v Clear Log - Clears the log you are viewing
v Dump Log - Dumps the log you are viewing
v Save Service Dump - Creates a DPA (Dump All) log output that can be viewed or saved to a file

<Prev | Next> buttons appear if the number of logs entries exceeds the number of entries per page. Click
<Prev | Next> to index through the log entries. The 'Next' button will not be displayed if the log has
more fewer entries than the '# of entries per page' setting. After clicking the 'Next' button, the 'Prev'
button will be displayed. If the log entries fit on a single page the <Prev | Next> buttons do not appear.

130 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 a77ug120
Figure 117. Service Library: View Logs page

Service Library: View Drive Logs

This page allows the drive logs to be viewed after selecting the following:
v Log Type
– Error: Logs drive error code information.
– SCSI: Logs ASC/ASCQ and FSC information.
v Additional Sense Code (ASC)
v Additional Sense Code Qualifier (ASCQ)
v Fault Symptom Code (FSC)

a77ug096

Figure 118. Service Library: View Drive Logs screen

Service Library: Save Drive Dump

This menu item allows a drive memory dump to be saved to the host computer.
1. Select the drive.
2. Choose the regular drive memory dump option (data that is stored in flash), or the forced drive
memory dump option (data that is stored in memory and moved to flash).
3. Click Save Drive Dump.
When Save Drive Dump is clicked, the user has the option of saving the drive memory dump to their
hard disk drive. The progress status for the drive memory dump is shown on the System Status screen to
the right of the main Web User Interface screen.

Operations 131
Note: It is recommended that both a regular and forced drive memory dumps be created and saved.

Note: Ensure that all the pop-up facilities on the web browser are set to allow pop-up boxes to display.
With Microsoft Internet Explorer, under Tools, ensure that the pop-up blocker is turned OFF and Internet
Options > Security > Custom Level > Downloads > Automatic Prompting for file Downloads and File
Downloads are both Enabled.
When the memory dumps are saved on the hard disk, they can be e-mailed to Tech Support for analysis,
if needed.

Note: The memory dump might take up to 20 minutes to complete. The System Status portion of the
screen shows "Drive Dump in Progress" with the number of KBs transferred.

Figure 119. Service: Save Drive Dump

Service Library: Perform Diagnostics

Note: When running the "System Test", the library must contain at least the same number of data
cartridges as there are drives in that library. For example, if your library has 4 drives installed, you must
have 4 or more data cartridges in the library prior to the start of the test. If there are fewer data
cartridges than drives in the library, an error message "Slot Empty" will occur, and the test will not
complete successfully. The media type must be compatible with the drive type. Otherwise, an error
message "Incompatible Media" will occur and the test will fail.

This page provides the system administrator with general tests to verify the usability and reliability of
the library. The "System Test" will use resident data cartridges to test the load and unload capability of
the drives, and ensure that the library mechanics are working satisfactorily. No data will be written to the
cartridges and the cartridges will be returned to their normal slot location. The "Slot To Slot" test will
move each resident data cartridge from one slot to another, for each test cycle requested. When
completing the "Slot To Slot" test, you will need to Inventory your library before placing it back online,
since this test scrambles the cartridge slot locations.

The user selects the number of test cycles before starting the test from the EXECUTE button. To cancel the
test before it completes the cycles, select the STOP button.

Note: The Web User Interface System Status screen will indicate progress and completion of the activity.
a77ug075

Figure 120. Service Library: Perform Diagnostics page

The first field can be modified to set the number of cycles. The second field displays the cycles
completed.

132 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Service Library: Key Path Diagnostics
Please refer to www.Dell.com/support to determine the availability of this feature.

Important: Ensure that library firmware and drive firmware are up to date before running the Key Path
Diagnostic. Library firmware level must be greater than 6.xx. See “Verifying/Updating Firmware” on
page 56.

The key path diagnostics test provides the ability to perform diagnostics on the encryption key path.
Only drives that are set up for library managed encryption will be tested. Only encryption capable drives
in logical libraries that are configured for Library Managed Encryption will be tested. To configure the
library for encryption, refer to “Configure Library: Encryption” on page 118.

The test consists of four parts:

v Drive Test: The library performs a drive communication test to confirm communication with the drive.
v Ethernet Test: For each key management IP address, the library performs a ping test and records the
results.
v EKM Path Test: For each key management IP address that passed the ping test, the library performs a
communication test.
v EKM Config Test: This test confirms that a drive is correctly configured in the key manager to service
key requests.

To run the Key Path Diagnostic, complete the following procedure.

1. Log on to the Web User Interface. Refer to “Login” on page 20.
2. Quiesce all drives, then unload all drives.
3. Click Service Library, then Key Path Diagnostics.

a77ug193

Figure 121. Service Library: Perform Key Path Diagnostics page

4. Click Start Tests.

Note: If you have just enabled encryption on your library, wait for all LME drives to be displayed in
the table and the Start Tests button to become active.

Each test will show a result of "Passed" or "Failed". If a test fails the remaining tests will not be executed,
and the test will show a result of "N/A". The IP Address may show "N/A" for the following reasons:
1. Drive is not encryption capable.
2. EKM Server Settings, on the Configure Library > Encryption page, are not configured correctly.
Test results will clear:
v When the test is rerun
v When the library is rebooted

Operations 133
The time and date of the last test will appear below the Key Path Diagnostics screen. If any of the tests
fail, refer to “Troubleshooting” on page 149 for additional information.

Service Library: Upgrade Firmware

Consider these recommendations to provide maximum performance and reliability:
1. The latest version of microcode must be installed on your Dell tape libraries and devices.
2. The library code must be updated first, unless noted otherwise. This action supports any changes that
are introduced in the library code for that drive, or any changes that are made to the drive for that
release.
3. These firmware updates are intended to increase overall reliability, improve tape handling, reduce the
possibility of data errors, and enhance diagnostic capabilities.

Note: Library firmware and tape drive firmware are verified and released together. When you are
updating to the latest firmware, verify that all installed components such as tape drive, and library are at
the latest levels noted on the Support website. Mixing different levels of library and tape drive firmware
is not supported and might cause unpredictable results.

This page displays the current library and drive firmware versions. Firmware is downloaded to the host,
then uploaded to the drive or library.

Click Browse... to choose the firmware file you downloaded from the website for the library or drive you
want to update. (You can update only one device at a time). Be sure that you choose the correct firmware
for the library or drive type. Click Update to initiate the file transfer and firmware update.

Note: During the update, no host drive action is possible. The drive update takes approximately 5
minutes. The system status panel (in the right of the browser window) changes from "update" to "ready".

If incompatible firmware is transferred to the library or drive the Update function terminates with a
message that indicates incompatible firmware. If the library has a BCR (barcode reader) that requires 9.00
or greater firmware, the Update function terminates with a message that indicates the library requires
firmware 9.00 or higher.

To ensure that the drive is updated with the correct firmware, refer to the drive identification information
provided in the Upgrade Library Firmware banner. Ensure that the drive firmware is for the correct drive
type (Full Height, Half Height), correct protocol (SCSI, SAS, Fibre Channel), and correct version (V2).
Drive code for V2 drives is not compatible with drives that are not V2.

V2 drive firmware compatibility

v ULT3580-HH3 drives
– Firmware for the LTO3 HH drive is not compatible with the LTO3 HH V2 drive
– Firmware for the LTO3 HH V2 drive is not compatible with the LTO3 HH drive
v ULT3580-HH4 drives
– Firmware for the LTO4 HH drive is not compatible with the LTO4 HH V2 drive
– Firmware for the LTO4 HH V2 drive is not compatible with the LTO4 HH drive
v ULT3580-HH5 drives
– The latest firmware for the LTO5 HH drive is compatible with all LTO5 HH drives. Upgrade the
drive with the latest firmware if the drive Update function terminates with a message that indicates
incompatible firmware.

134 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 a77ug289
Figure 122. The Service Library: Upgrade Firmware page, showing one Ultrium 3 SAS Half Height V2 drive and one
Ultrium 4 SAS Half Height drive.

Service Library: Reboot

Important: Some options of the Web User Interface take the library OFFLINE. This inactive mode can
interfere with host-based application software, causing data loss. Ensure that the library is idle before
attempting to perform any remote operations that will take the library OFFLINE.

This page is used to perform a library reboot. There is a default time delay when the Web User Interface
page refreshes itself. This time should be sufficient to reload the page. However, during a reboot, the
connection to the library may be lost. If the connection is lost, the user will have to reload the page
manually.

Click the Reboot button to initiate the reboot.

a77ug077

Figure 123. Service Library: Reboot page

Import and Export Media during Normal Library Operation

Import Media

Data cartridges can be inserted and taken out of a magazine while the library is in operation. If the
library contains an I/O Station, and you wish to import media, follow these steps:
1. From the OCP Main Menu, select Control > Open I/O Station. The I/O Station will unlock itself. The
I/O station slot opens, and the "Unlocking I/O station" message displays. Wait for the "Insert/remove
cartridge and close I/O station" message to insert or remove the cartridge, then close the I/O station
by gently pushing the slot back into the left magazine.

Note: It is recommended to wait for the messages before you insert or remove cartridges to ensure
that the library is ready to handle the cartridges.
2. Pull out the I/O Station and insert a data cartridge(s). On a 2U library, only 1 cartridge can be
inserted at a time. On the 4U library, 3 cartridges can be inserted at one time.
3. Close the I/O Station. The library will automatically start an inventory. The cartridges in the I/O
Station will be counted but unassigned until they are moved into storage slots.

Operations 135
4. From the OCP Main Menu, select Control > Move Cartridges and move the data cartridges into the
desired data slots. See “Control: Move Cartridges” on page 91 or “Manage Library: Move Media” on
page 114 for more information.

If the library does not have an I/O Station (all slots are assigned to storage), and you wish to import
media, you will need to release a magazine and insert the cartridges manually following these steps:
1. From the OCP Main Menu, select Control > Magazine. Choose the desired magazine to
unlock/remove.
2. Pull out the magazine and insert a data cartridge(s) into the empty slots.
3. Push the magazine back into the library. The library will automatically start an inventory.
4. To move cartridges in the magazine once they are inserted, from the OCP Main Menu, select Control
> Move Cartridges and move the data cartridges into the desired slots. See “Control: Move
Cartridges” on page 91 or “Manage Library: Move Media” on page 114 for more information.

Note: If you run a library configuration backup program on your host computer, use the program to
run an audit of the library after new cartridges have been added to update the backup program.

Export Media

To remove cartridges from your library using your I/O Station, follow these steps:
1. From the OCP Main Menu, select Control > Move Cartridges and move the data cartridges into the
I/O Station. See “Control: Move Cartridges” on page 91 or “Manage Library: Move Media” on page
114 for more information.
2. From the OCP Main Menu, select Control > Open I/O Station. The I/O Station will unlock itself. The
I/O station slot opens, and the "Unlocking I/O station" message displays. Wait for the "Insert/remove
cartridge and close I/O station" message to insert or remove the cartridge, then close the I/O station
by gently pushing the slot back into the left magazine.

Note: It is recommended to wait for the messages before you insert or remove cartridges to ensure
that the library is ready to handle the cartridges.
3. Pull out the I/O Station and take out the data cartridge(s).
4. Push the I/O Station back into the library. The library will automatically start an inventory of the I/O
Station.

If you do not have an I/O Station (all slots are assigned to storage), and wish to export media, you will
need to release a magazine and take out the cartridges manually following these steps:
1. From the OCP Main Menu, select Control > Magazine. Choose the magazine you wish to
unlock/remove.
2. Pull out the magazine and remove the desired data cartridge(s).
3. Push the magazine back into the library. The library will automatically start an inventory.

Note: If you run a library configuration backup program on your host computer, use the program to
run an audit of the library after cartridges have been removed to update the backup program.

Configuring I/O Stations and Reserving Slots

2U libraries usually have 1 slot for an I/O Station, while 4U libraries have 3 slots assigned as an I/O
Station. These slots can be configured as storage if needed.

To configure the I/O Station using the Web User Interface, follow these steps.
v Go to Configure Library->General.

136 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
v To enable the I/O Station, place a check mark in the I/O Station Enabled box. If it is checked as
enabled, the first 3 physical slots in the lower left magazine in a 4U or the first physical slot in the left
magazine in a 2U is configured as an I/O station. If the I/O Station Enabled box is not checked, the
slots are configured as storage.

Note: The number of I/O Station slots and storage are automatically assigned when the I/O Station
Enabled box is checked or unchecked.

Dedicated Cleaning Slot

Earlier versions of the 4U library contained a Dedicated Cleaning Slot (DCS). This DCS can be retained
and is supported by future library firmware updates. Library firmware after 1.95 will allow removal of
the DCS, thus enabling this slot to be used as a storage slot.

To remove the DCS, perform the following procedures using the Operator Control Panel (OCP).
1. Navigate to the Library Settings (Logical Library Settings) screen Configure > Library Settings (or
Logical Library Settings.
2. Select General.
3. Scroll down to Remove DCS.
4. Select No or Yes.
5. Select Save then press the Enter button.

Attention: If your library originally contained a Dedicated Cleaning Slot and was removed, it can only
be reinstated by restoring factory default settings.

To enable automatic cleaning of the drives when needed, a slot must be reserved, a cleaning cartridge
must be present in the reserved slot, and Auto Clean must be enabled.

Reserving Slots

Reserving a slot is accomplished by reducing the Active Slot count in any particular logical library. Slots
are reserved beginning with the last available slot in the last magazine of the library. A cleaning cartridge
in a reserved slot is available to any logical library drive even if the reserved slot is not in that logical
library. Typically, if the library contains multiple logical libraries, the last logical library is chosen for the
reserved slot containing the cleaning cartridge. As with a library with a single logical library, this slot is
the last physical slot in the library (top right magazine, uppermost rear slot).

Note: Configure the required number of reserved slots prior to enabling Auto Clean.

To reserve a cleaning slot, follow these steps.

v To reserve slots in your library, go to the Web User Interface at “Choosing General Library Settings” on
page 57 or the Operator Control Panel at “Configure: Library” on page 94 to get directions on reducing
the Active slot count.

Operations 137
138 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Using Ultrium Media
Figure 124 shows the LTO Ultrium Data Cartridge and its components.

▌1▐ LTO cartridge memory ▌4▐ Write-protect Switch

▌2▐ Cartridge door ▌5▐ Label area
▌3▐ Leader Pin ▌6▐ Insertion guide

Figure 124. The LTO Ultrium Data Cartridge

Note: The same components are on all the LTO Ultrium Data Cartridges.

Data Cartridges
The different generations of Ultrium data cartridges can be identified by color:
Table 31. Cartridge Types and Colors
Type Color
Ultrium 8 Burgundy
Ultrium 8 WORM Burgundy and Silvery gray
Ultrium 7 Purple
Ultrium 7 WORM Purple and Silvery gray
Ultrium 6 Black
Ultrium 6 WORM Black and Silvery gray
Ultrium 5 Burgundy
Ultrium 5 WORM Burgundy and Silvery gray
Ultrium 4 Green
Ultrium 4 WORM Green and Silvery gray
Ultrium 3 Slate Blue
Ultrium 3 WORM Slate Blue and Silvery gray
Ultrium 2 Purple

139
Table 31. Cartridge Types and Colors (continued)
Type Color
Ultrium 1 Black

All generations contain 1/2-inch, dual-coat, magnetic tape.

When processing tape in the cartridges, Ultrium Tape Drives use a linear, serpentine recording format.
The native data capacity and recording format of Ultrium data cartridges is as follows:
Table 32. Cartridge Data Capacity and Recording Formats
Type Native Data Capacity Recording Format
Ultrium 8 12000 GB (30000 GB at 2.5:1 Reads and writes data on 6656 tracks,
compression) 32 tracks at a time
Ultrium 7 6000 GB (15000 GB at 2.5:1 compression) Reads and writes data on 3584 tracks,
32 tracks at a time
Ultrium 6 2500 GB (6250 GB at 2.5:1 compression) Reads and writes data on 2176 tracks,
sixteen tracks at a time
Ultrium 5 1500 GB (3000 GB at 2:1 compression) Reads and writes data on 1280 tracks,
sixteen tracks at a time
Ultrium 4 800 GB (1600 GB at 2:1 compression) Reads and writes data on 896 tracks,
sixteen tracks at a time.
Ultrium 3 400 GB (800 GB at 2:1 compression) Reads and writes data on 704 tracks,
sixteen tracks at a time
Ultrium 2 200 GB (400 GB at 2:1 compression) Reads and writes data on 512 tracks,
eight tracks at a time
Ultrium 1 100 GB (200 GB at 2:1 compression) Reads and writes data on 384 tracks,
eight tracks at a time

The first set of tracks is written from near the beginning of the tape to near the end of the tape. The head
then repositions to the next set of tracks for the return pass. This process continues until all tracks are
written and the cartridge is full, or until all data is written.

The cartridge door (▌2▐Figure 124 on page 139) protects the tape from contamination when the cartridge
is out of the drive. The tape is attached to a leader pin (▌3▐ in in Figure 124 on page 139) behind the
door. When the cartridge is inserted into the drive, a threading mechanism pulls the pin (and tape) out of
the cartridge, across the drive head, and onto a non-removable take-up reel. The head can then read or
write data from or to the tape.

The write-protect switch (▌4▐ in Figure 124 on page 139) prevents data from being written to the tape
cartridge. For more information, see “Write-Protect Switch” on page 144.

The label area (▌5▐ in Figure 124 on page 139) provides a location to place a label. .

The insertion guide (▌6▐ in Figure 124 on page 139) is a large, notched area that prevents the cartridge
from being inserted incorrectly.
Table 33. Nominal Cartridge Life: Load/Unload Cycles
Type Load/Unload Cycles
Ultrium 8 20,000 (20k)
Ultrium 7 20,000 (20k)
Ultrium 6 20,000 (20k)

140 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Table 33. Nominal Cartridge Life: Load/Unload Cycles (continued)
Type Load/Unload Cycles
Ultrium 5 20,000 (20k)
Ultrium 4 20,000 (20k)
Ultrium 3 20,000 (20k)
Ultrium 2 10,000 (10k)
Ultrium 1 5000 (5k)

Cartridge Compatibility
Table 34. Ultrium data cartridge compatibility with Ultrium tape drive
LTO Ultrium Data Cartridges
Tape
Drive 12000 GB 6000 GB 2500 GB 1500 GB 800 GB 400 GB 200 GB 100 GB
Ultrium 8 Ultrium 7 Ultrium 6 Ultrium 5 Ultrium 4 Ultrium 3 Ultrium 2 Ultrium 1
Ultrium Read/Write Read/Write
8
Ultrium Read/Write Read/Write Read only
7
Ultrium Read/Write Read/Write Read only
6
Ultrium Read/Write Read/Write Read only
5
Ultrium Read/Write Read/Write Read only
4
Ultrium Read/Write Read/Write Read only
3
Ultrium Read/Write Read/Write
2
Ultrium Read/Write
1

WORM (Write Once, Read Many) Cartridges

Certain records retention and data security applications require a Write Once, Read Many (WORM)
method for storing data on tape. The LTO Ultrium 4 and later drives enable WORM support when a
WORM tape cartridge is loaded into the drive.

WORM Media
Because standard read/write media are incompatible with the WORM feature, a specially formatted
WORM tape cartridge (see Figure 125 on page 142) is required. Each WORM cartridge has a unique,
worldwide cartridge identifier (WWCID), which comprises the unique CM chip serial number and the
unique tape media serial number. Ultrium WORM cartridges are two-tone. The top half is the color of the
data cartridge and the bottom half is silvery gray.

Using Ultrium Media 141

 a67b0024
Figure 125. Ultrium Data and WORM Tape Cartridges

Data Security on WORM Media

Certain built-in security measures help ensure that the data written on a WORM cartridge does not
become compromised, for example:
v The format of a WORM Tape Cartridge is unlike that of standard read/write media. This unique
format prevents a drive that lacks WORM-capable firmware from writing on a WORM tape cartridge.
For LTO 8, native data capacity is 12000 GB and compressed data capacity is 30000 GB.
v When the drive senses a WORM cartridge, the firmware prohibits the changing or altering of user data
already written on the tape. The firmware keeps track of the last appendable point on the tape.

WORM Media Errors

The following conditions cause WORM media errors to occur:
v Information in the servo manufacturer's word (SMW) on the tape must match information from the
cartridge memory (CM) module in the cartridge. If it does not match, a media Error Code 7 will post
on the drive's single-character display (SCD).
v Inserting a WORM tape cartridge into a drive that is not compatible with WORM causes the cartridge
to be treated as an unsupported medium. The drive will report a media Error Code 7. Upgrading the
drive firmware to the correct code level will resolve the problem.

Cleaning Cartridge
With each library, a specially labeled LTO Ultrium Cleaning Cartridge is supplied to clean the drive head.
The drive itself determines when a head needs to be cleaned. It alerts you by lighting the "Clean Drive"
(amber LED) above the library Operator Control Panel. To clean the head manually, insert a cleaning
cartridge into the tape load compartment (see “Inserting the Cleaning Cartridge” on page 74). The drive
performs the cleaning automatically. When the cleaning is finished, the drive ejects the cartridge, and the
library turns the "Clean Drive" LED off. Some libraries have an Auto Clean function which, when
enabled, will prompt the library to retrieve the cleaning cartridge that resides in the library, insert it in
the drive that needs cleaning, clean the drive, then return the cleaning cartridge to its home slot.

Note: The drive will automatically eject an expired cleaning cartridge.

The Cleaning Cartridges are valid for 50 uses.

Bar Code Label

A bar code label contains:
v A volume serial number (VOLSER) that is human-readable
v A bar code that the library can read

142 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Note: The LTO Ultrium Tape Drives do not require bar code labels, but you may choose to use labels for
tape cartridge identification purposes.
Table 35. Bar code label requirements for Ultrium tape drives and libraries
Ultrium Tape Drive/Library Bar Code Label Requirements
3555 Required
3573 Required
3576 Required
3580 Not required
3581 Required with optional Bar Code Reader
3582 Required
3583 Required
3584 Required

When read by a library's bar code reader, the bar code identifies the cartridge's VOLSER to the library.
The bar code also tells the library whether the cartridge is a data cartridge or cleaning cartridge. In
addition, the bar code includes the two-character media-type identifier Lx, where x equals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
7, or 8. L identifies the cartridge as an LTO cartridge and the number represents the generation of
cartridge for that cartridge type. Figure 126 on page 144 shows a sample bar code label for the LTO
Ultrium Tape Cartridge.

Tape cartridges can be ordered with the labels included or with custom labels.
Table 36. Cartridges and VOLSERs compatible with the Ultrium Tape Drives
Cartridges VOLSER
Ultrium 8 Data Cartridge xxxxxxL8
Ultrium 8 WORM Cartridge xxxxxxLY
Ultrium 7 Data Cartridge xxxxxxL7
Ultrium 7 WORM Cartridge xxxxxxLX
Ultrium 6 Data Cartridge xxxxxxL6
Ultrium 6 WORM Cartridge xxxxxxLW
Ultrium 5 Data Cartridge xxxxxxL5
Ultrium 5 WORM Cartridge xxxxxxLV
Ultrium 4 Data Cartridge xxxxxxL4
Ultrium 4 WORM Cartridge xxxxxxLU
Ultrium 3 Data Cartridge xxxxxxL3
Ultrium 3 WORM Cartridge xxxxxxLT
Ultrium 2 Data Cartridge xxxxxxL2
Ultrium 1 Data Cartridge (READ ONLY) xxxxxxL1
LTO Ultrium Cleaning Cartridge CLNxxxLx
*An Ultrium 3 Tape Drive must have a minimum firmware level of 54xx for it to be compatible with the WORM
cartridge.

To determine the complete specifications of the bar code and the bar code label, contact your sales
representative.

Using Ultrium Media 143

When attaching a bar code label to a tape cartridge, place the label only in the recessed label area (see
▌5▐ in Figure 124 on page 139). A label that extends outside of the recessed area can cause loading
problems in the drive.

Attention: Do not place any type of mark on the white space at either end of the bar code. A mark in
this area may prevent the library from reading the label.

L T O 1 2 3 L8

LT0123L8

a69i0365
Figure 126. Sample bar code label on the LTO Ultrium 8 Tape Cartridge. The volume serial number (LTO123) and bar
code are printed on the label.

Guidelines for Using Bar Code Labels

Apply the following guidelines whenever using bar code labels:
v Do not reuse a label or reapply a used label over an existing label.
v Before you apply a new label, remove the old label by slowly pulling it at a right angle to the cartridge
case.
v Use peel-clean labels that do not leave a residue after being removed. If there is glue residue on the
cartridge, remove it by gently rubbing it with your finger. Do not use a sharp object, water, or a
chemical to clean the label area.
v Examine the label before applying it to the cartridge. Do not use the label if it has voids or smears in
the printed characters or bar code (a library's inventory operation will take much longer if the bar code
label is not readable).
v Remove the label from the label sheet carefully. Do not stretch the label or cause the edges to curl.
v Position the label within the recessed label area (see ▌5▐ in Figure 124 on page 139).
v With light finger pressure, smooth the label so that no wrinkles or bubbles exist on its surface.
v Verify that the label is smooth and parallel, and has no roll-up or roll-over. The label must be flat to
within 0.5 mm (0.02 in.) over the length of the label and have no folds, missing pieces, or smudges.
v Do not place other machine-readable labels on other surfaces of the cartridge. They may interfere with
the ability of the drive to load the cartridge.

Write-Protect Switch
The position of the write-protect switch on the tape cartridge (see ▌1▐) determines whether you can write
to the tape. If the switch is set to:

v The locked position (solid red), data cannot be written to the tape.
v The unlocked position (black void), data can be written to the tape.

If possible, use your server's application software to write-protect your cartridges (rather than manually
setting the write-protect switch). This allows the server's software to identify a cartridge that no longer

144 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
contains current data and is eligible to become a scratch (blank) data cartridge. Do not write-protect
scratch (blank) cartridges; the tape drive will not be able to write new data to them.

If you must manually set the write-protect switch, slide it left or right to the desired position.

A67E0026
1

Figure 127. Setting the write-protect switch

Table 37. Location of the write-protect switch

▌1▐ Write-Protect Switch

Handling the Cartridges

Attention: Do not insert a damaged tape cartridge into the drive. A damaged cartridge can interfere
with the reliability of a drive and may void the warranties of the drive and the cartridge. Before inserting
a tape cartridge, inspect the cartridge case, cartridge door, and write-protect switch for breaks.

Incorrect handling or an incorrect environment can damage cartridges or their magnetic tape. To avoid
damage to your tape cartridges and to ensure the continued high reliability of your LTO Ultrium Tape
Drives, use the following guidelines:

Provide Training
v Post procedures that describe proper media handling in places where people gather.
v Ensure that anyone who handles tape has been properly trained in handling and shipping procedures.
This includes operators, users, programmers, archival services, and shipping personnel.
v Ensure that any service or contract personnel who perform archiving are properly trained in
media-handling procedures.
v Include media-handling procedures as part of any services contract.
v Define and make personnel aware of data recovery procedures.

Ensure Proper Packaging

v When shipping a cartridge, use the original or better packaging.
v Always ship or store a cartridge in a jewel case.
v Use only a recommended shipping container that securely holds the cartridge in its jewel case during
transportation.
v Never ship a cartridge in a commercial shipping envelope. Always place it in a box or package.

Using Ultrium Media 145

v If you ship the cartridge in a cardboard box or a box of a sturdy material, ensure the following:
– Place the cartridge in polyethylene plastic wrap or bags to protect it from dust, moisture, and other
contaminants.
– Pack the cartridge snugly; do not allow it to move around.
– Double-box the cartridge (place it inside a box, then place that box inside the shipping box) and add
padding between the two boxes (see Figure 128).

Figure 128. Double-boxing tape cartridges for shipping

Provide Proper Acclimation and Environmental Conditions

v Before you use a tape cartridge, acclimate it to the operating environment for 24 hours or the time
necessary to prevent condensation in the drive (the time will vary, depending on the environmental
extremes to which the cartridge was exposed).
v Ensure that all surfaces of a cartridge are dry before inserting it.
v Do not expose the cartridge to moisture or direct sunlight.
v Do not expose recorded or blank cartridges to stray magnetic fields of greater than 100 oersteds (for
example, terminals, motors, video equipment, X-ray equipment, or fields that exist near high-current
cables or power supplies). Such exposure can cause the loss of recorded data or make the blank
cartridge unusable.
v Maintain the conditions that are described in “Environmental and Shipping Specifications for Tape
Cartridges” on page 147.

Perform a Thorough Inspection

After purchasing a cartridge and before using it, perform the following steps:
v Inspect the cartridge's packaging to determine potential rough handling.
v When inspecting a cartridge, open only the cartridge door. Do not open any other part of the cartridge
case. The upper and lower parts of the case are held together with screws; separating them destroys
the usefulness of the cartridge.
v Inspect the cartridge for damage before using or storing it.
v Inspect the rear of the cartridge (the part that loads first into the tape load compartment) and ensure
that there are no gaps in the seam of the cartridge case. If there are gaps in the seam (see Figure 129 on
page 147), the leader pin may be dislodged.

146 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Figure 129. Checking for gaps in the seams of a cartridge

v Check that the leader pin is properly seated.

v If you suspect that the cartridge has been mishandled but it appears usable, copy any data onto a good
cartridge immediately for possible data recovery. Discard the mishandled cartridge.
v Review handling and shipping procedures.

Handle the Cartridge Carefully

v Do not drop the cartridge. If the cartridge drops, slide the cartridge door back and ensure that the
leader pin is properly seated in the pin-retaining spring clips.
v Do not handle tape that is outside the cartridge. Handling the tape can damage the tape's surface or
edges, which may interfere with read or write reliability. Pulling on tape that is outside the cartridge
can damage the tape and the brake mechanism in the cartridge.
v Do not stack more than six cartridges.
v Do not degauss a cartridge that you intend to reuse. Degaussing makes the tape unusable.

Environmental and Shipping Specifications for Tape Cartridges

Before you use a tape cartridge, acclimate it to the operating environment for 24 hours or the time
necessary to prevent condensation in the drive (the time will vary, depending on the environmental
extremes to which the cartridge was exposed).

The best storage container for the cartridges (until they are opened) is the original shipping container.
The plastic wrapping prevents dirt from accumulating on the cartridges and partially protects them from
humidity changes.

When you ship a cartridge, place it in its jewel case or in a sealed, moisture-proof bag to protect it from
moisture, contaminants, and physical damage. Ship the cartridge in a shipping container that has enough
packing material to cushion the cartridge and prevent it from moving within the container.

Table 38 on page 148 gives the environment for operating, storing, and shipping LTO Ultrium Tape
Cartridges.

Using Ultrium Media 147

Table 38. Environment for operating, storing, and shipping the LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge
Environmental Specifications
Environmental Factor Operating Operational Storage1 Archival Storage2 Shipping
10 to 45°C(50 to -23 to 49°C(-9 to
Temperature 16 to 32°C(61 to 90°F) 16 to 25°C(61 to 77°F)
113°F) 120°F)
Relative humidity
10 to 80% 20 to 80% 20 to 50% 5 to 80%
(non-condensing)
Maximum wet bulb
26°C(79°F) 26°C(79°F) 26°C(79°F) 26°C(79°F)
temperature
Note:
1. The short term or operational storage environment is for storage durations of up to six months.
2. The long term or archival storage environment is for durations of six months up to ten years.

148 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Troubleshooting
v The library consists of the following CRUs (Customer Replaceable Units):
– Control Card (electronics, processor, memory, etc.)
– Power Supply
– Drive Sled (drive plus drive-to-library connectivity)
– Cartridge Magazines
v Service Spare:
– Library Enclosure (accessor, Operator control panel display, etc.)
v Other possible Replacement Parts are:
– Data Cartridges
– Cables/Terminator

Important: Before replacing any CRU and after finding the problem and performing any listed actions
listed in the Troubleshooting Table below, be sure to review the “Procedures for Isolating CRU Problems”
on page 155 to help confirm the failing CRU.

The following table is the starting point for all service issues. Find the reason which closest resembles the
problem you are experiencing and perform the listed action. If you are unable to correct the problem,
create a prioritized list of replacement parts required. Select only one CRU at a time starting with the
most likely based on the “Procedures for Isolating CRU Problems” on page 155 and/or the error code
listing.

After correcting the problem, run Library Verify (Operator Control Panel: Service > Library Verify) to
ensure that all library components are functioning properly before resuming normal library operations.
Table 39. Troubleshooting table
Problem Solution
INSTALLATION/CONFIGURATION
Unable to configure 3 logical The 2 half height drives must be in drive positions 1 and 2 (the lowest drive
libraries with 3 drives (2 half positions in the library) and the full height drive must be in the remaining drive
height drives and 1 full height position. For additional information, refer to Appendix A, “SCSI Element Types,
drive) installed. SCSI Addresses, and Physical Configurations,” on page 203.
Installation and Configuration 1. Refer to “Installation Problems” on page 154.
POWER
Library does not power ON 1. Perform “Isolating a Power Supply Problem” on page 155.
The Operator Control Panel is 1. Power cycle the library.
blank or frozen
2. If possible, log on to the Web User Interface and check the error log (Service
Library > View Logs). Look up the error code and try to resolve (see “Error
codes” on page 161).
3. Upgrade/reinstall the latest library firmware. To download the latest library
firmware, visit www.Dell.com/support.
v If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify before resuming normal
library operations. Refer to “Service: Library Verify” on page 102.
v If the problem persists, refer to Dell technical support.
ENCRYPTION

149
Table 39. Troubleshooting table (continued)
Problem Solution
Encryption Error: Displayed 1. Check the host application to ensure the key management application is
when the drive detects an error providing the correct encryption key.
associated with an encryption
v Refer to the “Drive Sense Data” on page 221 returned for an encryption
operation - if the problem
operation.
occurred while the tape drive
was writing data to, or reading v Retry the encryption operation after the key management application
data from, tape problems have been resolved.
2. Check the operation of the tape drive by resetting the drive (Operator Control
Panel: Service > Service > Drive Power) and running POST.
v Refer to the error code displayed on the Operator Control Panel if the drive
resets and POST fails.
v Retry the encryption operation if the drive reset and POST complete without
errors.
3. Check the media.
v Ensure the correct media is being used. Data encryption is supported with
LTO Ultrium 4, 5, 6, and 7 Data and WORM Cartridges only.
v Retry the encryption operation with the tape cartridge in another encryption
enabled drive. Replace the media if the problem repeats with the same tape
cartridge in multiple drives. If the problem occurred while the tape drive
was running POST or diagnostics, replace the drive. The error code clears
with the first attempted write/read after the encryption key is changed, or
when the drive is placed in maintenance mode.
Encryption-related error is Check the IBM SKLM application's error logs, device driver logs, tape library error
posted logs, and tape drive error logs for entries that are related to encryption. See
“Service Library: View Logs” on page 130, “Service Library: View Drive Logs” on
page 131, “Error codes” on page 161, and “Drive Sense Data” on page 221.
Connection problem with the If you are using library-managed encryption, perform the Key Path Diagnostic
IBM SKLM application (see “Service Library: Key Path Diagnostics” on page 133) if this feature is
available. If the test fails, a problem could exist with the IP address, the Ethernet
cable, or the key management server. Perform the following:
1. Check the Ethernet connection between the library and the key management
server.
2. Check the TCP/IP configuration of the library and the server.
3. Check that the key manager is correctly installed and configured, and that the
application is properly started (refer to your key management documentation).
4. Ensure that the tape drive is registered in the key manager (refer to the IBM
SKLM Knowledge Center online).
5. Ensure that a default key label is defined in the key manager (refer to the IBM
SKLM Knowledge Center online).

If you are using application-managed encryption, check your tape backup

application documentation for a similar test.
ERROR CODES
There is an error code in the Most library or drive errors will result in an error code or error message on the
error log. Operator Control Panel display. An error code history is maintained in the library
or drive error log. See “Service Library: View Drive Logs” on page 131 for how to
get the error log over the Operator Control Panel and “Service Library: View
Logs” on page 130 to view logs using the Web User Interface.

Look up the error code and try to resolve (see “Error codes” on page 161 and/or
Appendix C, “Sense Data,” on page 215).
FRONT PANEL LEDs

150 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Table 39. Troubleshooting table (continued)
Problem Solution
Attention LED To determine why the Attention LED is turned ON, log in to the Web User
Interface and select Service Library > View Logs > Warning Trace.

Drive Sled Issues:

v Refer to “Isolating Drive Sled Problems” on page 157.
v Whenever there is a hardware configuration change such as drives being
swapped with different form factors (i.e. HH to FH or FH to HH), a library
configuration change is needed. Reconfiguring the library by reassigning the
amount of logical libraries will clear this issue. Navigate to the Web User
Interface Configure Library > Logical Libraries or to the Operator Control
Panel's Configure > Logical Libraries section and reassign the logical libraries.
If you do not want to change your logical library configuration, resubmit your
current settings.
v Restore factory defaults (Operator Control Panel: Configure > Save/Restore and
select Restore All, or Web User Interface: Configure Library > Save/Restore
and select Restore).

Media Issues:
v Avoid contamination by ensuring that the library is installed in a clean,
contamination-free environment. Continue cleaning the tape drive as needed.
Refer to “Choosing a Location” on page 35.
v A cartridge should be acclimated for at least 24 hours before being used,
particularly if it has been stored at a substantially different temperature or level
of humidity than the library. Refer to “Provide Proper Acclimation and
Environmental Conditions” on page 146.
v Any cartridge that is suspected of being defective or contaminated should NOT
be reused, in any drive.

Power Supply or Fan Issues:

Check the power supply (or redundant power supply) for failure, and also check
any power supply fans. Replace any defective units. Refer to “System Status” on
page 21 for a redundant power supply failure on a 4U library and“Isolating a
Power Supply Problem” on page 155.
Clean Drive LED v Ensure that you are using an Ultrium universal cleaning cartridge (see
“Cleaning Cartridge” on page 142).
v Ensure that the cleaning cartridge has not expired. A drive will automatically
eject an expired cleaning cartridge. A cleaning cartridge is good for 50 cleans. If
your cleaning cartridge has expired, order a new cleaning cartridge.
v If the problem still exists, contact technical support.
Error LED If the Error LED remains ON after completing any user action listed for the error
code in “Error codes” on page 161, run Library verify (Operator Control Panel:
Service > Library Verify).
v If the test passes, the Error LED will turn OFF.
v If the test fails, cycle library power to turn the Error LED OFF.
To check the library error log, log on to the Web User Interface and click Service
Library, then View Logs.If the Operator Control Panel displays WARNING: Unit
Busy, click OK to turn the error LED OFF.
FIRMWARE

Troubleshooting 151
Table 39. Troubleshooting table (continued)
Problem Solution
Determining current firmware Many problems can be resolved by a firmware upgrade. Ensure that both the
levels library and drive firmware are at the latest levels available.
v Library firmware: Monitor > Library > Identity > Version
v Drive firmware: Monitor > Drives > Identity (select a drive) > Firmware Rev
Update library firmware Refer to “Service Library: Upgrade Firmware” on page 134.
Update drive firmware Refer to “Service: Service (Drives)” on page 104 or “Service Library: Upgrade
Firmware” on page 134.
CARTRIDGE MOVEMENT PROBLEMS
Cartridge placement problems Magazine slot prism fiducials NOT seated properly can result in gripper or slider
error codes due to the fiducial interfering with the back edge of the cartridge.
Release and pull magazines out of the library for inspection. To release the
magazines using the Operator Control Panel, navigate to Control > Magazine and
select Left or Right. To release the magazines using the Web User Interface,
navigate to Manage Library > Release Magazines.

Inspect the light pipe fiducials on each slot of the magazine for proper seating.
Cartridge will not eject from 1. Allow the drive to complete all operations. This may take as long as 1 hour if
drive you reset or cycle power on the library while the cartridge is positioned at the
physical end of the media.
2. Ensure that the backup software is not reserving the slot or preventing the
drive from ejecting the cartridge. The backup software needs to cancel the
reservation and any hold it has on the drive. Temporarily disconnecting the
library from the host server and power cycling eliminates the host and its
software as a problem source.
3. If the problem still exists, contact technical support.
Cartridge can not be removed See “Removing Cartridges from Magazine Slots” on page 175.
from storage slot
MEDIA
Cleaning or data cartridge Ensure that you are using data and cleaning cartridges that are compatible with
incompatible with drive. the drive and model of your library. The library automatically unloads
incompatible cartridges and the Media Attention LED flashes. Export the media in
order to clear the state. Refer to “Cartridge Compatibility” on page 141.
Cannot write to or read from 1. Ensure that the cartridge write-protect switch is in the write enabled position
tape. (see “Write-Protect Switch” on page 144).
2. Ensure that you have the appropriate data cartridge for your library model
(see “Cartridge Compatibility” on page 141).
3. Ensure that you are using an Ultrium cartridge that has not been degaussed.
Do not degauss Ultrium cartridges.
4. Ensure that the cartridge has not been exposed to harsh environmental or
electrical conditions and is not physically damaged in any way. Refer to
“Provide Proper Acclimation and Environmental Conditions” on page 146 and
“Perform a Thorough Inspection” on page 146.
5. Many backup applications do not read or write to cartridges that were created
using a different backup application. In this case, you may have to perform an
erase, reformat, or label replacement operation on the cartridge.
6. Ensure that you understand any data protection or overwrite protection
schemes that your backup application may be using, which could prevent you
from writing to a given cartridge.
7. Retry the operation with a different, known good cartridge.
8. Clean the drive. See “Service Library: Clean Drive” on page 129.

152 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Table 39. Troubleshooting table (continued)
Problem Solution
Cartridge VOLSER is reported Probable cause: cartridge with no label or damaged label.
as "unknown"
Ensure that cartridge is properly labelled. If cartridge is properly labelled, unload
the cartridge from drive and perform an inventory (OCP: Control > Re-Inventory;
Web: Manage Library > Perform Inventory). If VOLSER is again reported as
"Unknown", run Library Verify (Service > Library Verify).
DRIVE ID (SCSI, SAS, OR FIBRE CHANNEL LOOP)
Changed drive ID, but the host 1. Ensure that all devices on the same bus/network have unique ID numbers.
server does not recognize the
2. Ensure that you cycle power on the library after changing the ID.
new ID
3. Reboot the host server.
Tape library performance: The 1. Check the network bandwidth from the host computer. If you are backing up
library is not efficiently backing data over a network, consider comparing to a local-only backup.
up data
2. Ensure that the library and tape drive are on their own SCSI bus and not
daisy-chained to another tape drive or to the hard drive being backed up.
3. Ensure that the library is connected to a LVDS SCSI bus and there are no
single-ended (SE) devices on the same bus, because this will cause the entire
bus to negotiate down to SE speed.
4. Use an Ultra160 SCSI bus and high-quality cabling with the library.
CUSTOMER REPLACEABLE UNITS (CRU) AND SERVICE SPARES
Drive Sled See “Isolating Drive Sled Problems” on page 157.
Power Supply See “System Status” on page 21 and“Isolating a Power Supply Problem” on page
155.
Library Controller Card See “Isolating a Library Controller Card vs. Accessor Enclosure Problem” on page
158.
Library Enclosure (Service See “Isolating a Library Controller Card vs. Accessor Enclosure Problem” on page
Spare) 158.
ITDT
Performance Test duration Items affecting the duration of the test are:
varies v The level of adapter device driver
v Your adapter model and type
OTHER PROBLEMS
Web User Interface problems See “Isolating Web User Interface Problems” on page 159.
Bar code scanner problems See “Isolating Accessor Scanner Problems” on page 159.
Host Attachment Interface See “Isolating Host Attachment Interface Problems” on page 159
problems
Need help with a library
password Contact technical support.
Key path diagnostic not This diagnostic is available with library firmware level greater than 6.xx. Refer to
working “Verifying/Updating Firmware” on page 56 to determine the level of firmware on
your library. If necessary, visit www.Dell.com/support to download the latest
levels of firmware for your library.
Auto Clean status displayed as If Auto Clean is enabled and a cleaning cartridge is not present, or if a cleaning
"Chk Media/Rsvd Slot?" on the cartridge is present but not in the reserved slot, Auto Clean status will show "Chk
Web User Interface System Media/Rsvd Slot?" and Status will show a green check mark and the words
Status screen. "Media Attention."

Troubleshooting 153
Installation Problems
Problems encountered during the installation of the library are usually caused by improper SCSI bus
configuration, application software configuration errors, or an incorrectly configured operating system. If
the application software that you are using is not communicating with the library after installation, check
the following:
v Accessor Ship Lock Key:
Ensure that the Accessor Ship Lock Key on the top cover has been removed before powering on the
library. Refer to “Removing and Storing the Shipping Lock” on page 38.
v Drive SCSI or Loop ID:
Ensure that the SCSI ID of the Drive (or Fibre Channel Loop ID) is correct and not the same as other
devices that may be on the same bus or loop. To determine the SCSI or Loop ID for each SCSI or Fibre
Channel drive in your library, navigate to:
– Operator Control Panel: Monitor > Drive > Identity
– Web User Interface: Monitor Library > Drive Identity
To change a drive's ID, navigate to:
– Operator Control Panel: Configure > Drive > Drive Interface
– Web User Interface: Configure Library > Drives
v Host Bus Adapter (HBA) Compatibility:
Ensure that the library is compatible with the HBA. For best performance, the HBA used for this
library should be SCSI-3 LVDS. Pay particular attention to any steps describing settings of various
jumpers and/or switches.
v HBA LUN 0/1 Support:
A single ID will address both drive and library since the drive is LUN 0 and the library is LUN 1.
These models require an HBA that supports LUN scanning which must be enabled at the HBA. Refer
to “Logical Unit Number (LUN) Scanning” on page 30.
v Cable Connections:
Ensure that there are no bent pins on cables and that all connections are securely fastened.
v Fibre Channel Tape Support:
Ensure that Fibre Channel Tape Support is enabled on the HBA if you are installing a library with a
Fibre Channel drive.
v SCSI Cable Length:
Ensure that the maximum cable length is not over 25 meters (82 ft.) for a single device on the bus or 12
meters (40 ft.) for multiple devices. Internal SCSI length within the library accounts for 2 ft.
v SCSI Termination:
Verify proper termination on both ends of the SCSI bus. Refer to “Connecting the Host Interface Cable”
on page 50.
v SAS Cables
Ensure that SAS Cables are properly attached. Refer to “Connecting the Host Interface Cable” on page
50.
v Backup Application Installation:
Refer to the documentation included with your backup application software for instructions on how to
verify proper installation.
v Device Driver Installation:
Ensure that the proper device driver, if applicable, is installed for the library.

Note: Many backup applications use their own drivers for the library and drive. Before installing a
driver, make sure it will not be in conflict with the software. Contact your Backup Application vendor
for this information.

154 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Library Recovery Problem Determination
The 2U and 4U library firmware will generally retry failed operations up to three times before posting a
failure to complete the operation, or, in some situations, proceeding with an operation that can be
completed in an alternative manner. Of course, if the operation is successful within the allotted retry
count, the appropriate retry counter is updated and recorded in the retry log and the next library
operation will commence.

For example, failure to pick or place a cartridge from or to a designated cell or drive location after
exhausting the retry count will result in a failed operation with the appropriate error code. However,
failure to detect a particular cell location by sensing the prism fiducial located on the cell shelf because it
is missing or damaged will eventually result in the cell location being located by the gripper, bar code
reader and positional emitter pulse count after the prism detection retry count is exhausted. If several
prisms are missing or damaged or if the accessor prism sensor/emitter is inoperable, initialization and/or
inventory functions can take a prolonged amount of time to complete due to the lengthy retry recovery
procedure.

If the library is taking an extended amount of time to initialize, to perform an inventory or even move a
cartridge within the library, the magazines prism integrity should be verified prior to exchanging a
library component. This situation can be noted by the ACTIVITY line on the Operator Panel posting
Recovery. Prism integrity verification can be done by releasing the magazines and inspecting the cell
prisms. Normal initialization or inventory time for a 2U library once the picker mechanism starts its
operation should be approximately 1 to 2 minutes. For a 4U library, 2 to 3 minutes. A single missing or
damaged prism can add 1 to 2 minutes. If the accessor tray sensor/emitter is inoperable, or several
prisms are missing or damaged, initialization or inventory could exceed 30 minutes or longer. Refer to
Troubleshooting table “Cartridge Movement Problems”.

Procedures for Isolating CRU Problems

Isolating a Power Supply Problem

Note: Not all power supplies have LEDs. The original power supply for the 2U library did not have
LEDs though any power supplies replaced will likely have LEDs. The 4U library has power supplies with
LEDs.

Troubleshooting 155
 6

a77ug136
4
5
Figure 130. A 250w power supply with LEDs

a77ug198

4
5
Figure 131. A 80w power supply without LEDs

Table 40. Power Supply LED Meanings

▌1▐ If the blue LED is lit, AC voltage is available.
▌2▐ If the amber LED is lit, there is a possible fan problem or other power supply issue. The power supply
will need replacement.
▌3▐ If the green LED is lit, DC power is OK and active.
▌4▐ Cooling Fan Grill
▌5▐ Thumb Screws
▌6▐ Power Receptacle

If the Library does not power on:

156 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
1. With library power OFF and the power cord unplugged, loosen the three thumb screws (▌5▐), grasp
two of the thumb screws, pull the power supply out half way, reseat the power supply, and tighten
the three thumb screws.
2. Ensure the power cord is plugged in at the power supply (▌6▐) and at the electrical outlet, then turn
library power ON.
a. For power supplies with LED's, the "Blue" LED will be lit if AC power is good.
b. If your power supply does not have LED's, feel for air flowing out of the cooling fan grill on the
rear of the library (▌4▐). AC is good if air is flowing from the cooling fan grill.
3. If power appears to be missing
a. Plug the power cord into another electrical outlet.
b. If power is still missing, plug another device into the outlet to test.
c. If the outlet tests OK, try another power cord with the library.
4. For power supplies with LED's, if the "Amber" LED is lit, replace the power supply (refer to
“Replacing a Power Supply” on page 186).
5. If your power supply has no LED's, and you have verified that the electrical outlet works properly,
but the power supply is still failing, replace it (refer to “Replacing a Power Supply” on page 186).
6. If the power supply seems to be delivering power to the library (Operator Control Panel and front
panel LED's may be functioning); however, air does not flow from the power supply cooling fan grill
on the rear of the library, replace the power supply (refer to “Replacing a Power Supply” on page
186).
7. If the power supply seems to be delivering power to the library (Operator Control Panel and front
panel LED's may be functioning), and air is flowing from the power supply cooling fan grill on the
rear of the library, observe the "Green" LED (lowest of the three). If it is lit, the power supply is OK.

Note: If your library has -04 level redundant power supplies (see label on top of power supply), it is
normal for the one in "Standby" mode to turn its "Green" LED off. You can test this power supply by
pulling the power connector from the other "Active" power supply. The power supply that was in
"Standby" mode will now become "Active", and its "Green" LED should light. If it doesn't, replace it
(refer to “Replacing a Power Supply” on page 186).

If your library has -05 level redundant power supplies, the "Green" LED will be ON on both power
supplies. If both "Green" LEDs are not ON, replace the failed power supply (refer to “Replacing a
Power Supply” on page 186).
8. If the "Green" LED is not lit, and it is the only one in the Library, replace it (refer to “Replacing a
Power Supply” on page 186).

Isolating Drive Sled Problems

Prior to replacing a drive sled CRU, verify that the following activities have been performed:
1. BEFORE POWERING OFF THE LIBRARY, write the drive dump to flash. It is important to preserve
the drive dump on the drive for analysis by Technical Support.

Note: If you are instructed by Dell Technical Support to copy the drive dump to your host computer,
use one of the following methods:
v Web User Interface: Refer to “Service Library: Save Drive Dump” on page 131.
v ITDT: Refer to “Using the ITDT Firmware Update, Dump Retrieval and Drive Test Tool ” on page
177.
2. Ensure that the drive firmware is at the latest level. To determine current library and drive firmware
version using the Operator Control Panel:
v Library firmware: Monitor > Library > Identity
v Drive firmware: Monitor > Drives > Identity (select a drive) Drive firmware is identified in the
FW Rev field.

Troubleshooting 157
3. Try reseating the drive sled.

Note: The drive sled is hot-pluggable so it is not necessary to power off the library. See
“Removing/Installing/Adding a Tape Drive Sled” on page 181.
4. Cycle power to the library.
5. If air does not flow from the drive sled cooling fan grill on the rear of the library, replace the drive
sled CRU. Several library error codes also point to cooling problems. See “Removing/Installing/
Adding a Tape Drive Sled” on page 181.
6. If the drive is experiencing permanent or temporary errors or if the amber Clean LED is lit on the
front panel of the library, select Clean Drive from the Operator Control Panel Service Menu (Service >
Service > Clean Drive) and clean the drive. Use only an approved cleaning cartridge (see “Cleaning
Cartridge” on page 142).
7. Run the Library Verify Diagnostic which includes a drive performance Read/Write test. Be sure to
use a known good scratch or blank data cartridge.
v If the drive test fails, replace the drive sled CRU (refer to “Removing/Installing/Adding a Tape
Drive Sled” on page 181).
8. If the drive passes all the tests, inspect the media to ensure the media is compatible with the drive
and not causing drive errors. Refer to “Using Ultrium Media” on page 139.

Isolating a Library Controller Card vs. Accessor Enclosure Problem

1. If possible, ensure that the library firmware is at the latest level, check the current library firmware
level using the Operator Control Panel (Monitor > Library > Identity > Version) or the Web User
Interface (Monitor Library > Library Identity), then.
2. Observe the LED on the Library Controller Card.
v LED On solid - LCC failed or in a hang condition.
v LED Off - LCC not fully inserted, or LCC failed, or library not connected to power source, or
Power Supply defect.
v LED flashing (1 flash per second) - normal operation
v LED flashing (slower than once per second) - normal operation
v LED flashing (faster than once per second) - LCC failed
3. With library power OFF, loosen the two thumb screws which secure the controller card to the library
enclosure and slide it out.
v Inspect the card for any broken components or other anomalies.
v If the card appears to have no abnormalities, reseat the card back in the library, tighten the thumb
screws, and turn library power ON.
4. If both the Operator Control Panel and Web User interfaces are inoperable or frozen and the latest
firmware has been installed, the controller card CRU electronics is the most likely failure. If only the
Web User Interface has failed, please see “Isolating Web User Interface Problems” on page 159 before
replacing any CRUs.
5. If a control card error code has been obtained and reseating, power cycling, and updating the library
firmware did not fix the problem, the controller card CRU is the most likely failing CRU (refer to
“Replacing a Library Controller Card” on page 187).
6. If the error code indicates an accessor type error (slider, elevator, sled, etc.), release and remove both
magazines (see “Control: Magazine” on page 91, “Manage Library: Release Magazine” on page 115, or
“Releasing the Magazines Manually” on page 175) and observe the accessor path for any obvious
obstruction or problems. Resolve any observed problem if possible. Execute a Library System Test. See
“Service Library: Perform Diagnostics” on page 132 for the web or “Service: Run Tests” on page 103
for the OCP If the problem is persistent, contact Dell technical support.
7. If the library is taking an extended amount of time in recovery to complete initialization, perform an
inventory, or executing a cartridge movement within the library, and, after finding the magazine cell
fiducials to be present with no visible damage and correctly installed, suspect the sensor/emitter on

158 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 the accessor mechanism to be inoperable. Execute a Library System Test. See “Service Library:
Perform Diagnostics” on page 132 for the web or “Service: Run Tests” on page 103 for the OCP If the
problem is persistent, contact Dell technical support.

Isolating Web User Interface Problems

If the Web User Interface is not functioning at all or if it is intermittently functioning, review the
following steps to ensure that it is properly configured, or, to help determine which CRU or part needs to
be replaced. The complete Web User Interface electronics reside on the library controller card CRU.
1. Ensure that the ethernet cable is securely plugged in the rear of the library at the ethernet port. See
▌7▐ on the “Rear Panel” on page 3.
2. Ensure that the correct IP, Netmask, and Gateway addresses are keyed into the network parameters.
From the Operator Control Panel, navigate to Configure > Network.
3. Ensure that the correct IP address is being used on the web browser. If you get a security certificate
alert when logging in to the Web User Interface, you can install the certificate or allow an exception
(depending on the internet browser you are using). Even though with some browsers you will still
receive a security certificate warning/error each time you log in to the Web User Interface, your
transmission is secure. SSL is enabled when the URL to your library begins with https:// and some
browsers will show a lock.
4. If the ethernet connection is a direct connection between the PC and the library, a special "crossover"
ethernet cable needs to be used.

Note: On newer PCs, either straight through or crossover ethernet cables may be used since the
crossover requirement is provided internally.
5. Check the ethernet cable carefully (or try another cable) and, if the cable is connected to a network
hub or switch, try a different port.
6. If the Web User Interface is still malfunctioning, replace the Library Controller Card CRU (refer to
“Replacing a Library Controller Card” on page 187).

Isolating Accessor Scanner Problems

If the server has reported inventory problems relating to inability to read bar code labels, or, if some or
all of the cartridge labels are not being displayed on the Web User Interface, use the following procedure
to determine if the scanner (library enclosure CRU) needs to be replaced.
1. Ensure that a supported bar code label (or labels) are being used.
2. With library power OFF, reseat the library controller card CRU (refer to “Replacing a Library
Controller Card” on page 187), and then switch library power ON.
3. Perform a re-inventory via the Operator Control Panel (Control > Re-Inventory) and view the
inventory via the Web User Interface (Monitor Library > Inventory) to determine if the labels are
now being read.
4. If the labels are still not being read properly, please contact Dell technical support.

Isolating Host Attachment Interface Problems

After successfully exercising "Isolating Drive Sled Problems", and more specifically the "Library Verify"
diagnostic on the Operator Control Panel (Service > Library Verify) which includes a drive (or drives)
read/write diagnostic, the following procedures are suggested to help isolate the failure to properly
establish connectivity to the Host Bus Adapter (HBA).
1. Use the utility, ITDT, to evaluate connectivity from the HBA through the cabling to the drive (or
drives). ITDT does not require separate device drivers, thus the Operating System has the ability to
scan and find all the LTO devices that are attached. If ITDT cannot successfully locate the LTO drive,
suspect cabling or HBA problems, and skip step 2. If ITDT successfully located the LTO drive,
proceed to step 2. See “Using the ITDT Firmware Update, Dump Retrieval and Drive Test Tool ” on
page 177 for a brief description of ITDT and instructions on how to download the tool from the web.

Troubleshooting 159
2. If ITDT successfully locates the LTO device(s), verify that the correct application device drivers and
backup application software is properly installed.
3. Ensure that all the required or latest available Operating System files and/or updates (dll’s, PTF’s,
etc.) have been installed and applied.

Identifying a Suspect Cartridge

The amber Attention LED will be lit on the front panel of the library when there has been a failure that
indicates a piece of media is bad, marginal, or invalid. It will be cleared when all invalid cartridges have
been exported from the library.

Note: The amber LED may also be lit because a power supply, or a power supply fan is failing. Refer to
“Isolating a Power Supply Problem” on page 155.
1. Identify the media using the Web User Interface (Monitor Library > Inventory). Expand the cartridge
details for each magazine and look for media status in the Attn column of the inventory table.
2. Make note of the cartridge location (Slot #) and VOLSER (Label) in the inventory table.
3. To remove the cartridge from the library:
a. Using the web, select Manage Library > Move Media. If the cartridge is not in an I/O Station
slot, move the cartridge to an I/O Station slot.
b. Using the OCP, select Control > Open I/O Station.
4. Remove cartridge. If cartridge was reported as Bad, properly dispose the cartridge.
5. Close the I/O Station. If the amber LED was lit because of bad media, the Attention LED will turn
OFF. If the amber LED is still on, check the power supply or the power supply fans. See “Isolating a
Power Supply Problem” on page 155.

160 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Error codes
If an error occurs during operation of the library, the library stops the current operation and displays an
error code on the LCD screen. Unless otherwise noted in “Error codes,” try to resolve the error by cycling
power to the library and retrying the last operation. If the error persists, contact technical support.

Example error code

EVENT -6

8D 07

Where:
v -6 indicates the position in sequence list, 0 being the most recent.
v 8D 07 indicates the error. (code 8D = sled blocked,).

The event log with the library also includes a date stamp for each event. Press SELECT to display the
associated time stamp in the following format:

yy.mm.dd hh:mm:ss:HH

Where:
v yy is the year
v mm is the month
v dd is the current day
v hh is hours
v mm is minutes
v ss is seconds
v HH is 1/100 second

The time stamp is set to zero at system start.

A description of each error code and possible solution is provided in “Error codes”.

Preparing to resolve an error code

1. Record the error information that is displayed on the Operator Control Panel display or Web User
Interface screen.
2. If possible, cycle library power and retry the operation.
v If the error recurs, refer to “Error codes” for information about resolving the error.
v If the error does not recur, run Library Verify before normal library operation is continued.

Complete the steps in “Preparing to resolve an error code” before you complete the User Action listed in
“Error codes.”

Error codes
Errors that are described are hard errors. If such an error occurs the library stops all operations and the
Error LED starts flashing. An appropriate message is posted on the Operator Control Panel and the Web

161
User Interface. These errors are also reported by way of email notification, if enabled. To enable email
notifications, refer to “Configure Library: Event Notification” on page 126.
Table 41. Main Error Codes
Error Code Description User Action
80 Bar code reader error, cannot initialize BCR
81 Bar code reader error, no response from BCR Error Code 80 01 might be posted if
the library has a BCR (bar code
82 EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only reader) that requires a minimum
Memory) error, no response from EEPROM (located on accessor level of library firmware. Update the
controller) library firmware to 9.00 or higher. If
83 Accessor controller generic problem the problem still exists, follow the
procedure. See“Isolating a Library
84 Setting of gripper motor parameters failed Controller Card vs. Accessor
85 Setting of slider motor parameters failed Enclosure Problem” on page 158.
Possible replacement CRUs:
86 Setting of elevator motor parameters failed
v Primary: Library Enclosure
87 Setting of rotation motor parameters failed v Secondary: Library Controller Card
88 Setting of sled motor parameters failed
89 Gripper blocked 1. If this is the first time that the
8A Slider blocked library was powered ON or if it
was moved to a new location,
8B Elevator blocked ensure that the shipping lock was
8C Rotation blocked removed. The lock is on the top
of the library (see “Removing and
8D Sled blocked
Storing the Shipping Lock” on
page 38).
2. Refer to “Isolating a Library
Controller Card vs. Accessor
Enclosure Problem” on page 158.
Possible Replacement CRUs:
v Primary: Library Enclosure
v Secondary: Library Controller
Card

162 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Table 41. Main Error Codes (continued)
Error Code Description User Action
8E Cannot find gripper block within the expected range
8F Cannot find slider block within the expected range
90 Cannot find elevator block within the expected range
91 Cannot find rotation block within the expected range
92 Cannot find sled block within the expected range
93 Gripper outside range,

Gripper reached a position beyond the expected range

94 Slider outside range,

Slider reached a position beyond the expected range

95 Elevator outside range,

Elevator reached a position beyond the expected range

96 Rotation outside range,

Rotation reached a position beyond the expected range

Refer to “Isolating a Library
97 Sled outside range, Controller Card vs. Accessor
Enclosure Problem” on page 158.
Sled reached a position beyond the expected range
Possible Replacement CRUs:
98 Cartridge present sensor not found v Primary: Library Enclosure
99 Slider home sensor not found v Secondary: Library Controller Card
9A Rotation home sensor not found
9B Sled position sensor (fiducial sensor) not found
9C Gripper ranges out of specification
9D Slider range out of specification
9E Elevator range out of specification
9F Rotation range out of specification
A0 Sled range out of specification
A1 Open I/O Station (Import/Export Element) failed
A2 Error during elevator locking
A6 No elevator home sensor found
B0 Robotic controller response timeout. A command did not
complete in the required amount of time.
B1 NACK (not acknowledged) received from robotic controller
B2 Accessor controller communication failed
B3 Accessor controller urgent stop because of a released magazine 1. Verify that the left and right
B4 Cartridge did not transport completely magazines are inserted, then retry
operation.
B5 Accessor controller does not respond on command
2. Refer to “Isolating a Library
Controller Card vs. Accessor
Enclosure Problem” on page 158.
Possible Replacement CRUs:
v Primary: Library Enclosure
v Secondary: Library Controller
Card

Error codes 163

Table 41. Main Error Codes (continued)
Error Code Description User Action
C0 Network initialization failed
1. Refer to “Isolating Web User
C1 Telnet Interface initialization failed Interface Problems” on page 159.
C2 Webserver initialization failed 2. If the error recurs, contact
technical support.
C6 Ping command did not reach target
C7 Cannot Upgrade from USB Not supported
C8 Cannot Upgrade from FTP 1. Retry the Firmware upgrade.
C9 Cannot Upgrade Robotic from Flash 2. If the error recurs, contact
technical support.
D0 ROM error. ROM checksum incorrect Refer to “Isolating a Library
Controller Card vs. Accessor
D1 RAM error. Power on Self Test (POST) failed
Enclosure Problem” on page 158.
D2 NVRAM (Non-Volatile Random Access Memory) error. Possible replacement CRUs:
Read/Write operation to NVRAM failed v Primary: Library Controller Card
D3 CTC (Channel to Channel) Error. Timer unit failed during v Secondary: Library Enclosure
POST.
*D7 - Fatal System error can occur
D4 UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) Error. because of an over-temperature
Frame overrun or Parity Error on serial Interface. condition. Ensure that the
D5 Display Error environment meets the
Environmental Specifications (refer to
Communication to display failed “Environmental Specifications” on
page 14).
D6 Memory Error, Stack and heap overflow.
D7 Fatal system error* **If you receive a D8 error while your
library configuration is restored from
D8 Database error**
the OCP or Web UI, verify that your
D9 No SCSI IC detected file extension is .dbb. If the extension
is correct, your file was corrupted
during the save. Reconfigure, then
save your library configuration.
Note: Configuration files that are
saved with one version of library
firmware might not be compatible
with other versions of firmware. It is
recommended to save a configuration
file each time the library firmware is
upgraded. Restore the library using a
configuration file that was saved
with the same version of firmware
that is currently installed in the
library.
DA While the Library Verify Test is running, the bar code reader 1. Check the barcode label on the
reads different bar code data for the same customer-supplied scratch cartridge and run the
scratch cartridge label. Library Verify test again.
2. If the error recurs, contact
technical support.
DB Warning Event! See Table 43 on page 171
DC I²C Bus Failure 1. Retry the operation.
2. After several occurrences, contact
technical support.
DD Warning Event! See Table 43 on page 171

164 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Table 41. Main Error Codes (continued)
Error Code Description User Action
DE Warning Event! See Table 43 on page 171
DF Warning Event! See Table 43 on page 171
E0 Incompatible magazine that is detected 1. Remove magazine from library.
2. Insert magazine in library. If error
recurs, contact technical support.
E2 New hardware found. Library firmware upgrades required. Upgrade library firmware to the
latest version.
EB Power supply health check failed because of a power supply Refer to “Isolating a Power Supply
failure. Problem” on page 155
F0 Drive Over temperature Condition 1. Check the ambient temperature
conditions, and check all fans.
The subcode indicates which drive is affected.
2. Refer to “Isolating Drive Sled
Example: Problems” on page 157.

Subcode 02: drive #2

Error codes 165

Table 41. Main Error Codes (continued)
Error Code Description User Action
F1 Drive Communication Error

Library controller lost communication to drive

The subcode indicates which drive is affected.

Example:

Subcode 02: drive #2

F2 Drive Sled not present

The subcode indicates which drive sled is affected.

Example:

Subcode 02: drive sled #2

F3 Drive Hardware Error

The subcode indicates which drive is affected.

Example:

F3 xy

Where x refers to the hardware drive error code (single Refer to “Isolating Drive Sled
character display) and Y refers to the drive position in the Problems” on page 157.
library. x values:
v 4: firmware or hardware error
v 5: hardware error
v 6: hardware or media error
v A: recoverable hardware error
F4 Drive Load Timeout

Drive run in a timeout while a tape is loading.

The subcode indicates which drive is affected.

Example:

Subcode 02: drive #2

F5 Drive Unload Timeout

Drive run in a timeout while a tape is unloading

The subcode indicates which drive is affected.

Example:

subcode 02: drive #2

166 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Table 41. Main Error Codes (continued)
Error Code Description User Action
F6 No drive installed. A drive was never installed
F7 Support ticket download from drive not possible
F8 Invalid drive command
F9 Invalid drive parameter Refer to “Isolating Drive Sled
FA SDCI microcode error Problems” on page 157.

FB Drive logged out

FC Internal SCSI command failed with check condition
FD Internal SCSI command timeout

Sub Error Codes

Table 42. Sub error codes
Error Code Description
ROBOTICS
00 No sub error code
01 Mechanical initialization failure

02 Connection to slave robotic failed

03 Error motor initialization

04 Error during gripper close

05 Error slider home positioning

06 Error elevator home movement

07 Error during sled movement to rotation position

08 Error during rotation initialization, get range failed

09 Error elevator init

0A Error during rotation to far position

0B Error first sled init, move to sensor failed

0C Error during sled movement to rotation position

0D Error during rotation to drive position

0E Error slider init, get range failed

0F Error during slider forward movement

10 Error gripper init, get range failed

Error codes 167

Table 42. Sub error codes (continued)

11 Error during slider home movement

12 Error during rotation to FAR position

13 Error sled init, move to sensor failed

14 Error during sled movement; check shipping lock
15 Error move to a certain position failed
16 Error positioning of the rotation motor failed

20 Error Inventory scan

21 Error during gripper close

22 Error slider home movement

23 Error during move gripper to scan pos

24 Error reading barcode label

25 Error during move sled to scan position
26 Error during move elevator to scan position
27 Error during sled preposition movement

28 Error Extra inventory scan

29 Error during closing gripper

2A Error slider preposition movement

2B Error during opening gripper

2C Error during sled movement up to sensor

2D Error slider preposition backwards movement

30 Error slot preposition

31 Error during sled movement in FLMoveRotation function

32 Command sending to robotic failed

33 Error during elevator movement in FLMoveRotation function

34 Error during rotation in FLMoveRotation function

35 Error during elevator movement in FLMoveSled function

36 Error during sled movement in FLMoveSled function

37 Error during sled positioning to sensor in FLMoveSled function

168 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Table 42. Sub error codes (continued)

38 Error during sled positioning to mail slot in FLMoveSled function

39 Error during sled positioning without sensor

3A Error during elevator movement without sensor
3B Error slot position sensor not found

40 Movement to/from slot failed

41 Error during first slider movement

42 Error during first gripper movement

43 Error during second slider movement

44 Error during second gripper movement, get range failed

45 Error during third slider movement, move home failed

46 Error during set hold current to avoid torsion
47 Negative direction blocked
48 Positive direction blocked
49 Possible motor defect, because both directions blocked
4A Cartridge present sensor defect
4B Inventory lost, because destination possibly full
4C Inventory lost, because source might be empty
4D Could not pull tape out of slot from magazine
4E Unexpected tape on elevator, possible inventory lost
50 Preposition to drive failed
51 Elevator movement to home sensor failed.
52 Sled movement to home sensor failed.
53 Error during sled movement to drive position.
54 Error during rotation to drive position.
55 Error during elevator movement in drive position.
56 Error during sled movement to rotation position.
57 Error during rotation to end position.
60 Move from/to drive failed.
61 Error during first slider movement.
62 Error during first gripper movement.
63 Error during second slider movement.
64 Error during second gripper movement, get range failed.
65 Error during third slider movement, move home failed.
70 Release magazine failed.
71 Error during sled movement to rotation position.
72 Error during rotation to unlock position.

Error codes 169

Table 42. Sub error codes (continued)
73 Error during move sled to block.
80 Opening I/O slot failed.
81 Error during movement to I/O slot open position.
82 Error during moving back - sensor was found.
90 Movement to home position failed.
91 Elevator movement to home position failed.
92 Error during sled movement to rotation position.
93 Error during rotation to home or far position.
94 Sled movement to home sensor position failed.
95 Sled movement to transport position failed.
99 Error during rotation movement to rotation min position
A0 Movement of I/O slot failed.
A1 Sled movement to sensor failed.
A2 Sled movement to rotation position failed.
A3 Elevator movement to home position failed.
A4 Error during rotation to far position.
A5 Sled movement to I/O slot position failed.
A6 Error during elevator movement to position
A7 Error during mailslot detection
B0 EEPROM on robotics controller not accessible or error during Read/Write operation
Save/restore configuration settings: not enough internal memory available for creating the file and
B1 restoring the file respectively
B2 Save/restore configuration settings: restore buffer corrupted, checksum calculation failed
B3 Save/restore configuration settings: data base field corrupted
B4 Save/restore configuration settings: invalid personality
B5 Save/restore configuration settings: invalid file
LIBRARY

81 Drive wake up failed

88 Error accessing slot status

90 Accessor load not reached Cartridge Present sensor

91 No activity after Load command

92 Timeout while loading tape

93 No activity after load command

94 Timeout drive Unload

95 Drive terminated unsuccessfully

96 Tape not ejected at robot unload

170 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Table 42. Sub error codes (continued)

97 Slot not free at robot unload

98 Cartridge not seated in load phase

Warning events

Warning events that are described are reported by way of email notification. The Attention LED flashes
when warning events for the following occur:
v Media
v Fan
v Redundant power supply

An appropriate message is posted on the Operator Control Panel and the Web User Interface.
Table 43. Warning events
30 SCSI: transport element full
31 SCSI: all slots empty
32 SCSI: invalid opcode
33 SCSI: invalid element address
34 SCSI: invalid field in CDB
35 SCSI: Invalid drive specified
36 SCSI: SEND DIAGNOSTIC command:
invalid test number
37 SCSI: invalid LUN
38 SCSI: parameter list length error Refer to your host application documentation for problem
39 SCSI: parameter list error: invalid field determination information.

3A SCSI: parameter list error: parameter not

supported
3B SCSI: parameter value invalid
3C SCSI: saving parameters not supported
3D SCSI: invalid ID message
3E SCSI: destination element full
3F SCSI: source slot or drive empty
40 SCSI: wrong checksum
41 SCSI: command sequence error
42 SCSI: drive disabled
Check your configuration settings.
43 SCSI: I/O Station disabled
44 SCSI: flash image does not fit bootcode
45 SCSI: media removal prevented by drive Refer to your host application documentation for problem
determination information.
46 SCSI: media removal prevented by
library
47 SCSI: flash image does not fit personality Check the version of firmware that is used for the upgrade.
48 SCSI: drive type not supported in this Check whether a version of firmware is available that
library supports this drive type. For a list of supported drives, refer
to “Ultrium Tape Drives” on page 9.

Error codes 171

Table 43. Warning events (continued)
49 SCSI: incompatible magazine, magazine
Check your configuration settings.
not accessible
4A SCSI: source not ready
Complete move process and retry operation.
4B SCSI: destination source not ready
4C SCSI: library controller busy Complete process and retry operation.
4D SCSI: Cannot make reservation
Refer to your host application documentation for problem
4E SCSI: invalid slave robotic controller determination information.
request
4F SCSI: robotic axes/motors aren't Check robotics status. Refer to “Isolating a Library
initialized Controller Card vs. Accessor Enclosure Problem” on page
158.
50 SCSI: cartridge belongs to another
Check application software.
partition
51 Incompatible medium Check the compatibility of media and drive generation.
52 All slots full, no movement possible Remove a cartridge to make a move possible.
53 All slots empty required for wellness test Fill up required slots before the wellness test is started.
54 SCSI: failure in LME interface 1. Check your Encryption configuration.
2. Run Key Path Diagnostics.
3. Refer to the IBM SKLM Knowledge Center online for
information.
55 SCSI: invalid license key entered Reenter license key. If problem persists, refer to technical
support.
58 Recovered Error: SCSI parity error
No user action is required.
59 Recovered Error: Error log overflow
5A Illegal request, downgrade prohibited Disable encryption for firmware downgrade.
5B Incompatible medium generation Replace incorrect cartridges.
5C Illegal request, downgrade that is
Change network settings to IPv4 only before downgrading
prohibited because of incompatible
firmware.
network stack
5D Illegal request, wrong drive FW for drive Obtain correct drive firmware image.
5E Full height drive in illegal position Check correct Drive position.
60 Cleaning cartridge installed Complete the cleaning process and retry the operation.
61 Cleaning failure. Cleaning process could 1. Verify that autoclean is enabled.
not be performed
2. Check for an expired cleaning cartridge and replace if
necessary.
3. Refer to “Configuring I/O Stations and Reserving Slots”
on page 136.
62 Cleaning cartridge expired Replace cleaning cartridge.
63 Invalid cartridge. Drive rejected the data
cartridge as invalid 1. Verify that the correct cartridge is being used. Refer to
“Cartridge Compatibility” on page 141.
64 Invalid cleaning cartridge. Drive rejected
2. Refer to “Identifying a Suspect Cartridge” on page 160.
the cleaning cartridge as invalid
65 Invalid upgrade cartridge. Drive rejected
Not supported
the upgrade cartridge as invalid
66 Medium error; diagnostic tape write
Ensure that diagnostic tape is not write protected.
protected

172 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Table 43. Warning events (continued)
67 Medium error, incompatible medium for
Replace incorrect cartridges.
write operation
6A Medium error, no OBDR tape Insert OBDR tape.
70 Currently not used
71 Currently not used
72 Currently not used
73 SCSI: overlapped command attempt Refer to your host application documentation for problem
74 SCSI: echo buffer overwritten determination information.

75 Download prevented due to Older firmware image doesn’t support current bar code
incompatible bar code reader hardware reader hardware. No downgrade possible.
77 Download prevented due to Older firmware image doesn’t support current library
incompatible LCM controller hardware. No downgrade possible.
78 Download prevented due to Older firmware image doesn’t support current robotics
incompatible Rob Code controller hardware. No downgrade possible.
79 Download prevented due to
Use correct drive firmware image.
incompatible drive version
80 Movement Retry.
81 Fan Alert.
82 Clean request from drive.
83 Media Attention.
84 Drive reported warning or critical tape
alert flag.
85 Network problem. Check network connections, configuration, and settings.
86 Not enough cleaning cartridges present
Insert more cleaning cartridges to the empty reserved slots.
to autoclean.
87 Drive disabled because it is not
Check drive type and install only supported drives.
supported for use in this library.
88 Drive firmware unchanged after This is normal if the old and new drive firmware is the
upgrade. same version.
89 Power Supply Fan operation warning. Check the power supply status.
8A Power Supply failed. Check the power supply status and replace the failed power
supply.
8B Power supply failed. Check the power supply status and replace the failed power
supply.
8C Invalid Robotic Code. Install the latest version of library firmware.
8E Cleaning tape nearly expired. Continue with cleaning cartridge until it is expired, then
replace the expired cleaning cartridge with a new cleaning
cartridge.
8F I2C bus recovery. Run library System Test.
92 VPD data have been restored from
This is normal when the VPD is restored EEPROM.
EEPROM.

Error codes 173

Table 43. Warning events (continued)
DB External cooling fan error (fan motion
stopped).

The subcode indicates which drive sled

fan is affected Refer to “Isolating Drive Sled Problems” on page 157.

Subcode 01: drive sled #1(bottom)

Subcode 02: drive sled #2

DC I2C Bus Failure
DD Power Supply x fan failed,

Redundancy might be at risk

The subcode indicates which power

supply fan is affected Refer to “Isolating a Power Supply Problem” on page 155.

Subcode 01: 1st PS fan from bottom

Subcode 02: 2nd PS fan from bottom

DF Power Good signal that is changed from
2 to 1 Power Supplies
F6 No drive installed. A drive was never
Install at least one drive.
installed.

174 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Service Procedures
Removing Cartridges from Magazine Slots
In the event of a severe mechanical problem with the library or if circumstances require you to remove
tape cartridges, do the following. If the Operator Control Panel or the Web User Interface is still
operational:
1. Move the tapes from the drive(s) to the magazines using the Manage Library > Move Media
command (Web User Interface) or Control > Move Cartridges command (Operator Control Panel).
See “Manage Library: Move Media” on page 114 or “Control: Move Cartridges” on page 91.

Note: Contact technical support if a cartridge will not eject from the drive.
2. Use the magazine removal process to release the magazine and remove it from the library. To use the
Operator Control Panel, see “Control: Magazine” on page 91. To use the Web User Interface, see
“Manage Library: Release Magazine” on page 115. If neither one of these processes works, see
“Releasing the Magazines Manually.”

Releasing the Magazines Manually

If the directions in Steps 1 and 2 above do not allow you to remove the tapes, do the following:
1. Unplug the power cord from the library.
2. Find the access holes for the right and left magazines.

a77ug025

Figure 132. Access holes for the left magazine

175
 a77ug024
Figure 133. Access holes for the right magazine

3. To manually release the magazines, push the end of a straightened paper clip into the access hole for
each magazine at the back of the library. While holding the paper clip, have a second person pull the
magazine out of the front of the unit. DO NOT push the paper clip in more than 1/2 inch.
a77ug248

Figure 134. Left magazine pulled out of the 2U library

176 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 a77ug246
Figure 135. Left Magazines pulled out of the 4U Library

4. If there are additional tapes still in the library, or if you were unable to manually remove the
magazines and drive, contact technical support for further instructions.

Using the ITDT Firmware Update, Dump Retrieval and Drive Test Tool
ITDT has multiple functional capability and is a very quick, convenient and efficient method for drive
firmware updates. As a note, drive dump retrievals can be performed by the tool as well.

The ITDT Tool:

v Runs quick or extended diagnostics on tape drives. If the library is online to the server/host where the
tool resides, ITDT will communicate with the drive through the library to load and unload a test
cartridge thereby exercising some library functions.
v Retrieves firmware dumps from tape drives and libraries.
v Performs a firmware update on tape drives or libraries. See note below regarding library firmware
update.
v Tests the performance of the environment by completely writing a cartridge and measuring
performance.
v Retrieves and displays cartridge information.
v Verifies the encryption environment.
v Does not require special device drivers.
v Is available for most major platforms.

Note: ITDT Version 7 or higher is required for Ultrium 5, Ultrium 6, and Ultrium 7 tape drives. Before
using ITDT, verify that your library host operating system is at the latest released level. This will ensure
optimum read/write operations for diagnostics.

Note: If the library has a BCR (Barcode Reader) that requires 9.00 or greater firmware, the Update
function will terminate with an error code of "Unexpected Data" if you attempt to downlevel the library
firmware.

Service Procedures 177

To download the ITDT tool and instructions for using the tool, visit www.Dell.com/support.

178 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Check, Adjust, Remove, and Replace
Tools Required
To service a library you may need one or more of the following tools:
v #2 Phillips screwdriver
v Ground strap (recommended, if available)

Electrostatic Discharge
Important: A discharge of static electricity can damage static-sensitive devices or microcircuitry. Proper
packaging and grounding techniques are necessary precautions to prevent damage.

Figure 136. ESD label

To prevent electrostatic damage, observe the following precautions:

v Transport products in static-safe containers such as conductive tubes, bags, or boxes.
v Keep electrostatic-sensitive parts in their containers until they arrive at static-free stations.
v Cover the unit with approved static-dissipating material. If available, provide a ground strap connected
to the work surface and properly grounded tools and equipment. If a ground strap is not available,
touch a metal surface to discharge any static electricity in your body.
v Keep the work area free of no conducting materials, such as ordinary plastic assembly aids and foam
packing.
v Make sure you are always properly grounded when touching a static-sensitive component or assembly.
v Avoid touching pins, leads, or circuitry.
v Use conductive field service tools.

Relocating Your Library

When moving or shipping your library, it is important that the shipping lock be in place to prevent the
accessor from moving and to protect the library from possible damage. Before relocating your library,
complete the following procedure.
1. Remove all cartridges from inside the library.
2. Power OFF the library. This will align the robot with the shipping lock slot.
3. Remove any cables and terminators connected to the library.
4. Remove the library from the rack, if necessary.
5. Remove the shipping label (▌2▐) and lock (▌1▐) from the rear panel of the library.

179
 1

a77ug019
Figure 137. Shipping Lock and Label Storage Location

6. Insert the shipping lock (▌1▐) into the slot located on the center of the top of the library and secure
with the shipping label (▌2▐).

2
a77ug018

Figure 138. Shipping Lock and Label

7. Pack the library in its original packaging materials (or equivalent packaging) for moving or shipping.
Table 44. Shipping Lock/Shipping Label
▌1▐ Shipping Lock
▌2▐ Shipping Label

180 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Removing/Installing/Adding a Tape Drive Sled
There are two types of drive sleds in a TL2000 library (2U library) and a TL4000 library (4U library). The
contents of the ship groups are specific to the type of drive sled.
v Drive sled without ElectroStatic Discharge (ESD) springs (see Figure 139) ship group:
– Drive sled without ESD springs
– Packet of conductive tape to be applied to the drive sled for ESD protection
v Drive sled with ESD springs (see Figure 140) ship group:
– Drive sled with ESD springs

a77ug008

Figure 139. Library drive sled without ElectroStatic Discharge (ESD) springs (SCSI sled shown)

1
a77ug202

Figure 140. Library drive sled with ESD springs [1] (SAS sled shown)

Check, Adjust, Remove, and Replace 181

Removing a Tape Drive Sled
1. IT IS IMPORTANT TO PRESERVE A DRIVE DUMP FOR ANALYSIS IF ALL OF THE FOLLOWING
CONDITIONS EXIST:
v Library Error LED is ON.
v Operator Control Panel is displaying a drive error message.
v Web User Interface System Status screen is indicating that a drive has failed.
IF NONE OF THE CONDITIONS LISTED ABOVE EXIST, PROCEED TO THE NEXT STEP.
2. Power OFF the library before removing and/or installing a SCSI drive sled. Fibre Channel and SAS
drive sleds are hot pluggable and may be removed and installed while the library is powered ON.
3. If necessary, unload the tape cartridge from the drive to be removed.
v Using the Operator Control Panel: Control > Move Cartridges
v Using the Web User Interface: Manage Library > Move Media
4. Remove the host interface cable (▌1▐, ▌2▐, or ▌4▐ in Figure 141) and terminator (▌3▐ for SCSI drive
sled only).

7 9 10 4 7

a77ug204
6 1 3 2 8 5

Figure 141. Drive sled components (full height fibre drive in top position, half height SCSI drive in middle position, half
height SAS drive in bottom position) on back panel of a 4U library

▌1▐ SCSI cable

▌2▐ SAS cable
▌3▐ SCSI terminator
▌4▐ Fibre Channel cable
▌5▐ Ethernet cable
▌6▐ Power cords
▌7▐ Drive sled blue captive thumbscrews
▌8▐ Black pull-out tab
▌9▐ Drive sled
▌10▐ Drive sled handle

5. If present, remove the conductive tape from the drive sled (refer to Figure 144 on page 184).
6. Loosen the blue captive thumbscrews (▌7▐ in Figure 141) on the drive sled.

182 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
7. Pull straight back on the drive sled handle (▌10▐) to remove it from the library (see Figure 142).
8. If you are replacing the tape drive sled, proceed to Installing a Tape Drive Sled for instructions. If you
are not replacing the tape drive sled immediately, you will need to perform the following procedures:
a. Install a drive cover plate to protect your library from dust and debris.
b. To remove the "Missing drive" indicators on the Operator Control Panel (Attention LED) and the
Web User Interface (System Status screen), modify or resubmit logical library setting (Operator
Control Panel: Configure > Logical Libraries or Web User Interface: Configure Library > Logical
Libraries).

a77ug027

Figure 142. Pulling the drive sled out of the library (drive sled without ESD springs shown)

Installing a Tape Drive Sled

Note: Power OFF the library before installing a SCSI drive sled. Fibre Channel and SAS drive sleds are
hot pluggable and may be removed and installed while the library is powered ON.

Important: In a 4U library a full height drive sled may be installed in drive slot 1 (drive will occupy slot
1 and slot 2) or drive slot 3 (drive will occupy slot 3 and slot 4). A full height drive sled should never be
installed in drive slot 2 (drive will occupy slot 2 and slot 3).
1. Before installing the new drive sled, inspect all connectors on the drive sled. Ensure that the
connectors are intact, free of any foreign objects, and have no cracks, deformed, or bent contacts.
2. Extend the black pull-out tab (▌8▐ in Figure 141 on page 182) located underneath the library near the
lower right corner of the drive sled.
3. Slowly insert the new drive sled into the drive slot while supporting the bottom of the drive sled
(see Figure 143 on page 184). Ensure that the black tab remains extended (▌8▐ in Figure 141 on page
182).

Important: Push in on the drive sled handle (▌10▐ in Figure 141 on page 182) while supporting the
bottom of the drive sled until it is properly seated. Damage to the connector pins may occur if this
procedure is not followed.

Check, Adjust, Remove, and Replace 183

 4. Push the drive sled slowly into the drive slot until the sled seats itself against the back of the library.

a77ug028
Figure 143. Pushing the drive sled into the library (drive sled without ESD springs shown)

5. Tighten the captive thumbscrews (▌7▐ in Figure 141 on page 182) until the drive sled is secure.
6. If you are installing a drive sled without ESD springs (see Figure 139 on page 181), apply conductive
tape to the sled as shown in Figure 144.

2U Library 4U Library
a77ug203

Figure 144. Diagrams for applying conductive tape for ESD protection to the back of a drive sled installed in a 2U or
4U library

184 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 Note: The small gray markers show where conductive tape should be placed to provide ESD
protection.
7. Push the black tab (▌8▐ in Figure 141 on page 182) back underneath the library. When inserted
properly, only the handle of the tab will be visible.
8. Upgrade library firmware and drive firmware to the latest version.
Refer to “Configure Library: Drives” on page 120 to configure the drive if it is a SCSI or FC drive.
Connect the drive host interface cable to the host or FC switch.

Note: Go to www.Dell.com/support to download the latest firmware for your library and tape
drive(s).
9. Run the Library Verify test. (Operator Control Panel: Service > Library Verify). This test requires the
use of a scratch (blank) cartridge.
v If the test passes:
– When prompted by the Operator Control Panel display and the I/O Station opens, remove the
cartridge used in the test.
– Close the I/O Station by pushing it back into the library.
– Press Cancel to exit the Library Verify screen.
– Resume normal library operations.
v If the test fails, an error code will be displayed. Make note of the error, then refer to the
Troubleshooting chapter in this document for additional instructions.
10. Package the failed drive sled in the same packaging in which the new sled was shipped to you and
return to Dell.

Important: If the failed drive was configured for encryption, to ensure the replacement drive
receives the proper encryption parameters, resubmit the encryption choices listed on Configure
Library > Encryption for that particular drive or logical library even if the encryption settings did
not change.

Adding a Tape Drive Sled

Use these instructions to add a new tape drive to your 2U or 4U Tape Library. Refer to Appendix A,
“SCSI Element Types, SCSI Addresses, and Physical Configurations,” on page 203 for more information.

Note: Power OFF the library before installing a SCSI drive sled. Fibre Channel and SAS drive sleds are
hot pluggable and may be removed and installed while the library is powered ON.

Important: In a 4U library a full height drive sled may be installed in drive slot 1 (drive will occupy slot
1 and slot 2) or drive slot 3 (drive will occupy slot 3 and slot 4). A full height drive sled should never be
installed in drive slot 2 (drive will occupy slot 2 and slot 3).

Complete the following procedure to add a new tape drive to your library.
1. Before installing the new drive sled, inspect all connectors on the drive sled. Ensure that the
connectors are intact, free of any foreign objects, and have no cracks, deformed, or bent contacts.
2. Slowly insert the new drive sled into the drive slot while supporting the bottom of the drive sled (see
Figure 143 on page 184). If necessary, ensure that the black tab remains extended (▌8▐ in Figure 141 on
page 182). Push in on the drive sled handle (▌10▐ in Figure 141 on page 182) while supporting the
bottom of the drive sled until it is properly seated.

Important: Damage to the connector pins may occur if this procedure is not followed.
3. Tighten the captive thumbscrews (▌7▐ in Figure 141 on page 182) until the drive sled is secure.
4. If you are installing a drive sled without ESD springs (see Figure 139 on page 181), apply conductive
tape to the sled as shown in Figure 144 on page 184.

Check, Adjust, Remove, and Replace 185

 Note: The small gray markers show where conductive tape should be placed to provide ESD
protection.
5. Install cover plates on any open drive slots in the library.
6. Power ON the library.
7. Run the Library Verify test. (Operator Control Panel: Service > Library Verify). This test requires the
use of a scratch (blank) cartridge.
v If the test passes:
– When prompted by the Operator Control Panel display and the I/O Station opens, remove the
cartridge used in the test.
– Press Cancel to exit the Library Verify screen.
– Proceed to “Configuring the Tape Drive.”
v If the test fails, an error code will be displayed. Make note of the error, then refer to the
Troubleshooting chapter in the Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User's
Guide for additional instructions.

Configuring the Tape Drive

1. Log on to the Web User Interface.
2. Verify that you are running the latest versions of Library and Drive firmware. Upgrade the firmware
at Service Library > Upgrade Firmware.
3. Use the Web UI to update the Logical Library (Configure Library > Logical Libraries) and Drive
(Configure Library > Drives) configurations. Refer to “Operations” on page 75. Select Submit on the
Configure Library > Logical Libraries web page even if there are no required changes. This action
will refresh the Data Transfer Element (DTE) for the drives. Refer to Appendix A, “SCSI Element
Types, SCSI Addresses, and Physical Configurations,” on page 203 for information regarding DTE
addressing. If Configure Library > Logical Libraries does not correctly refresh/update the DTE
addresses, execute step 3 and step 4. Otherwise, proceed to Step 5.
4. Reconfigure your library using the OCP to configure your network settings, then using the Web UI to
complete your library configuration.
5. Save your library configuration to your host computer or to a USB device.
6. Update your Library Configuration Form with the new drive and configuration information.
7. Resume normal library operations.

Replacing a Power Supply

1. Power OFF the library by pressing and holding down the power button for 4 seconds.
2. Disconnect the power cord from the electrical source, then from the library.
3. Loosen the three blue captive thumbscrews on the power supply located on the back panel of the
library.
4. Pull on two of the thumbscrews to pull the unit away from the rear panel of the library, then grasp
the top and bottom edge of the power supply and pull it out of the library.

186 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 a66mi096
Figure 145. A power supply being removed from a 2U library

5. Remove the packaging from the replacement power supply.

6. Grasp the top and bottom edge of the power supply and push it into the library.
7. Tighten the three blue captive thumbscrews on the power supply located on the back panel of the
library.
8. Connect the power cord to the library, then to the electrical source.
9. Power ON the library using the power button on the front panel.
10. Run the Library Verify test (refer to “Service: Library Verify” on page 102).
11. Package the failed power supply in the same packaging in which the new power supply was
shipped to you and return to Dell.

Replacing a Library Controller Card

Read Me before Continuing

The Library Controller Card contains a copy of the vital product data (VPD) for your library. The VPD
contains your current library configuration. A backup copy of this VPD is contained within the electronics
of the Library Enclosure. When the Library Controller Card is replaced, the new replacement card should
contain zeros (0's) in key VPD locations. Upon detection of these zeros, the library will automatically
attempt to write VPD data to the new Library Controller Card from the backup copy of the VPD
contained in the Library Enclosure. In rare occurrences, the new Library Controller Card may contain
valid (non-zero) VPD data left over from having been installed previously in another library. If this
occurs, the library, which is expecting to see zeros in the VPD area, will instead detect valid VPD data,
and will not know which copy of the VPD is the correct one. It will detect a “VPD Mismatch” and
display on the Operator Control Panel a screen entitled “VPD Selection”, where it is asking you to
determine which copy of VPD should be written to the new Library Controller Card.

If the message "VPD Selection" is displayed at the Operator Control Panel, carefully highlight the “VPD
from Enclosure" option to copy that version of the VPD to the new Library Controller Card. Then
continue with the procedure.

Removal and Replacement

Check, Adjust, Remove, and Replace 187

 1. Power OFF the library by pressing and holding the power button at the front of the library for 4
seconds.
2. Disconnect the power cord from the electrical source, then from the power supply or supplies at the
back of the library.
3. Loosen the two blue captive thumbscrews on the Library Controller Card.
4. Grasp the two thumbscrews and pull the defective Library Controller Card out of the library.

a66mi097
Figure 146. A Library Controller Card being removed from the library

5. Remove the packaging from the replacement Library Controller Card.

6. Grasp the two thumbscrews and push the replacement Library Controller Card into the library.
7. Tighten the two blue captive thumbscrews on the Library Controller Card.
8. Connect the power cord to the power supply or supplies at the back of the library, then to the
electrical source.
9. Power ON the library using the power button on the front panel.
10. After power is restored to the Library Controller Card, the library will automatically restore the VPD
on the new Library Controller Card from the Library Enclosure. If a "VPD Selection" message is
displayed in the Operator Control Panel, see the "Read Me before Continuing" section earlier in this
procedure to determine how to respond to the message.
11. Upgrade library firmware and drive firmware to the latest version. See “Service Library: Upgrade
Firmware” on page 134.
12. Run the Library Verify test (refer to “Service: Library Verify” on page 102).

Note: Use care when selecting the appropriate VPD to restore from/to. An error in selection here
could cause a long downtime.
13. Package the failed Library Controller Card in the same packaging in which the new control board
was shipped to you and return to Dell.

Replacing Cartridge Magazines

To replace a cartridge magazine, refer to one of the following procedures:
v Using the Web User Interface, refer to “Manage Library: Release Magazine” on page 115.
v Using the Operator Control Panel, refer to “Control: Magazine” on page 91.
v If your library can not be powered ON, refer to “Releasing the Magazines Manually” on page 175.

188 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Replacing the Library Enclosure
This procedure is necessary when the library enclosure, accessor, or display fails. These components are
contained within the replacement library enclosure.

Important: Refer to the Installation Instructions that are included with the new replacement library
enclosure. Follow the procedures included in this document for replacing the Library Enclosure, only if
Installation Instructions are not included with the new replacement library enclosure.

The replacement library enclosure includes cartridge magazines, a power supply, a Library Controller
Card, and a packet of library foot pads. These items are included with the replacement library enclosure
due to safety agency requirements. These unused parts will be removed from the replacement library
enclosure and returned to Dell in the defective library. The old parts currently in your defective library
will be removed, and installed into the replacement library enclosure.

Note: To reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to equipment:

v observe local health and safety requirements and guidelines for manual material handling
v obtain adequate assistance to lift and stabilize the library during installation or removal

Minimum Installation Time: 1 hr.

Minimum Number of Persons Required: 2

Recommended Tools: #2 Phillips screw driver, paper clip, blank (or scratch) data cartridge

Preparing the Defective Library for Replacement

1. If possible, use the Operator Control Panel to unload any drives that contain a cartridge (Control >
Move Cartridges).
2. Power OFF the defective library.
3. Disconnect all cables from the rear panel of the defective library.
4. If the defective library is rack mounted, remove the two screws (▌1▐ in Figure 147 on page 190) from
the front of the defective library anchoring the mounting brackets on the library to the rack. With
assistance, remove the defective library from the rack.

Check, Adjust, Remove, and Replace 189

 a77ug244
1
Figure 147. Removing the two mounting bracket screws anchoring the library to the rack (one screw on each side of
the library)

5. Place the defective library on a clean and sturdy work surface.

6. Proceed to “Unpacking and Preparing the Replacement Library Enclosure.”

Unpacking and Preparing the Replacement Library Enclosure

Before installing the replacement library enclosure, it is important to verify that the enclosure is
functioning properly.
1. Unpack the replacement library enclosure and place it on a sturdy and clean work surface near the
defective library. Save all packaging materials for returning the failing part(s) to Dell.
2. Choose one of the options below for installing the foot pads.

Important: Operating your library on a flat surface without foot pads may damage your library or
cause it not to function properly.
v Rack Mount - temporary placement of the foot pads
v Desktop - permanent placement of the foot pads
a. For a rack mounted library:
1) Lift the replacement library enclosure slightly above the work surface, have another person
place a foot pad under each corner of the library and on each side of the library halfway
between the front and back.
2) Gently set the replacement library enclosure on top of the feet. Adjust foot pad placement as
necessary to stabilize the library. Do not permanently attach the foot pads to the library.
b. For a desktop library:
1) Carefully, lay the library on its side.
2) Peel the adhesive from the back of each of the six foot pads.

190 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 3) Install the foot pads on the bottom of the library enclosure by pressing each foot into one of
the six areas (▌1▐) as shown in Figure 148.

a77ug085

Figure 148. Foot pads installed on the bottom of the library enclosure

3. Carefully return the library to an upright position.

4. Remove the shipping lock from the top of the replacement library enclosure (see Figure 149 on page
192).

Check, Adjust, Remove, and Replace 191

 a77ug195

Figure 149. Removing the shipping label and lock from the top of the library and storing on the rear panel

5. Store the lock and label on the back panel of the replacement library enclosure (see Figure 150).

2
a77ug019

Figure 150. Library shipping lock and label storage location on the real panel of the library

6. Proceed to “Installing your drive in the replacement library enclosure.”

Installing your drive in the replacement library enclosure

Important: It is important to install the drives from the defective library into the same positions in the
replacement library enclosure to maintain your current library configuration.
1. Remove all drives from the defective library (see Figure 151 on page 193) and install them in the same
positions in the replacement library enclosure.

192 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 a77ug027
Figure 151. Removing a drive sled from the library (drive sled without ESD springs shown)

a. Ensure that the power cord is unplugged from the power source for each power supply in the
defective library enclosure.
b. On the rear of the defective library, loosen the blue captive thumbscrews on the drive sled.
c. If necessary, remove the conductive tape from the drive sled.
d. Pull back on the tape drive handle to remove it from the library.
e. On the rear of the replacement library enclosure, extend the black pull-out tab that is located
underneath the lower right corner of the lowest drive sled position. Ensure that the black pull-out
tab remains extended when a drive sled is inserted in the lowest drive position in the library.

Important: If this procedure is not followed, damage to the connector pins can occur.
f. Place each tape drive into the replacement library enclosure in the same drive slot as it was
positioned in the defective library.
v While the drive assembly is supported, align the drive sled with the groove in the drive slot
rails.
v Slowly push the drive sled forward until it is properly seated.
g. Tighten the captive thumbscrews until the drive is secure.
h. If a drive sled without ESD springs is installed (see Figure 151), apply conductive tape as shown
in Figure 152 on page 194.

Check, Adjust, Remove, and Replace 193

2U Library 4U Library

a77ug203
Figure 152. Drive sled taping diagrams

Note: The gray markers show where conductive tape is placed.

i. Push the black tab back underneath the drive sled. When inserted properly, only the handle of the
tab is visible.
2. Power ON the replacement library enclosure.
a. If power ON is successful,
1) After power up, the Ready/Activity LED (▌1▐ in Figure 155 on page 197) turns ON.
a) If this message is displayed after the library powers ON, follow the instructions.
[New library detected.]
[Please remove power and insert LCC from old library]
[ok]
2) Power OFF the replacement library enclosure.
3) You must power down, and remove the CRU LCC. Then, replace it with the original LCC to
have VPD transferred from the original LCC to the new chassis.
4) Proceed to “Swapping Power Supplies.”
b. If power ON is not successful,
1) The Error LED (▌4▐ in Figure 155 on page 197) turns ON.
2) Power OFF the replacement library enclosure.
3) Contact technical support for instructions.

Swapping Power Supplies

1. Unplug the power cord from the power source then from the replacement library enclosure if this was
not done previously (see “Installing your drive in the replacement library enclosure” on page 192).
2. Swap the Power Supply in the defective library with the Power Supply in the replacement library
enclosure.
a. Remove the power supply from the defective library and from the replacement library enclosure.
To remove a power supply from a library:
1) Loosen the three blue captive thumbscrews on the power supply.

194 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 2) Pull on two of the thumbscrews, on opposite sides of the power supply, and pull the unit
away from the rear panel of the library.
3) Grasp the top and bottom edges of the power supply and remove it from the library.
b. Install the power supply removed from the replacement library enclosure in the defective library
to return to Dell. To install a power supply:
1) While supporting the power supply, align the power supply with the groove in the enclosure
rails.
2) Push the power supply forward until it is properly seated.
3) Tighten the thumbscrews.

a66mi096
Figure 153. A power supply being removed from a library

3. Plug the power cord into the replacement library enclosure then into a power source.
4. Power ON the replacement library enclosure.
a. If power ON is successful:
1) The replacement library enclosure will power up with the Ready/Activity LED (▌1▐ in
Figure 155 on page 197) ON.
2) Power OFF the replacement library enclosure.
3) Unplug the power cord from the power source then from the library.
4) Proceed to “Swapping Library Controller Cards” on page 196.
b. If power ON is not successful, contact Technical Support for further instructions.

Check, Adjust, Remove, and Replace 195

Swapping Library Controller Cards
IMPORTANT - READ ME BEFORE CONTINUING

The Library Enclosure contains a copy of the vital product data (VPD) for your library. The VPD contains your
current library configuration. A primary copy of this VPD is contained within the Library Controller Card. A backup
copy of this VPD is maintained on the accessor in the enclosure (or chassis). When the Library Enclosure is
replaced, the new enclosure electronics should contain zeros (0's) in key VPD locations. Upon detection of these
zeros, the library will automatically write VPD data to the replacement library enclosure from the primary copy of
the VPD contained in the Library Controller Card. In rare occurrences, the replacement library enclosure may
contain valid (non-zero) VPD data left over from having been installed previously in another library. If this occurs,
the library firmware, which is expecting to see zeros in the VPD area, will instead detect valid VPD data, and will
not know which copy of the VPD is the correct one. It will detect this VPD mismatch and display a message
entitled “VPD Selection” on the Operator Control Panel. The library will need your input to determine which copy
of VPD to write to the replacement library enclosure. If you are replacing both the Library enclosure and the
Library Controller Card, transfer VPD after installing one part before installing the other.

If the message “VPD Selection” is displayed at the Operator Control Panel, carefully highlight the “VPD from
Controller” option before selecting OK. This will copy VPD from the controller to the replacement library enclosure.

1. Swap the Library Controller Card in the defective library with the Library Controller Card in the
replacement library enclosure.
a. Remove the Library Controller Card (see Figure 154) in the defective library and in the
replacement library enclosure. To remove a Library Controller Card:
1) Loosen the two blue captive thumbscrews on the Library Controller Card.
2) Grasp the thumbscrews and pull the card out of the library.
b. Install the Library Controller Card from the defective library in the replacement library enclosure.
Install the Library Controller Card from the replacement library enclosure in the defective library
to return to Dell. To install a Library Controller Card:
1) Grasp the Library Controller Card faceplate and align the Library Controller Card with the
groove in the enclosure rails.
2) Push the Library Controller Card forward until it is properly seated.

Note: You will hear a snap when the Library Controller Card is fully engaged and installed
properly.
3) Tighten the thumbscrews.
a66mi097

Figure 154. Removing a Library Controller Card from the library

196 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 Note: If you power on the replacement library without first swapping the Library Controller Card
from the original (defective) library enclosure, the following message will appear on the Operator
Control Panel shortly after applying power: "New library detected. Please remove library power
and insert Library Controller Card from old Library". The library requires the library serial
number and other library attributes from the original library which is located in the VPD on the
original Library Controller Card in order to continue library initialization. See Important - Read
Me Before Continuing message listed above.

As a further Note, if the replacement library does not complete library initialization successfully
after swapping in the original Library Controller Card, be sure to retain the original Library
Controller Card so it can be swapped into the “new” replacement library enclosure which will
have to be ordered.
2. Plug one end of the power cord (removed earlier from the defective library) into the rear panel of the
replacement library enclosure and plug the other end into a power source.
3. Power ON the replacement library enclosure.
a. If power ON is successful:
1) The Ready/Activity LED (▌1▐) will turn ON indicating that all components are functioning
properly.
2) After power is restored to the replacement library enclosure, the library will automatically
restore the VPD on the replacement library enclosure from the Library Controller Card. If a
“VPD Selection” message is displayed in the Operator Control Panel, see the “Read Me before
Continuing” section earlier in this procedure to determine how to respond to the message.
3) Power OFF the replacement library enclosure.
4) Proceed to “Swapping Cartridge Magazines” on page 198.
b. If power ON is not successful:
1) The Error LED (▌4▐ in Figure 155) will turn ON. This indicates that the Library Controller Card
from the defective library is not functioning properly.
2) Power OFF the replacement library enclosure.
3) Refer to Dell technical support for further instructions.

1 2 3 4
a77ug258

Figure 155. Library front panel LEDs

▌1▐ Ready/Activity LED (green) ▌3▐ Attention LED (amber)

▌2▐ Clean Drive LED (amber) ▌4▐ Error LED (amber)

Check, Adjust, Remove, and Replace 197

Swapping Cartridge Magazines
1. Manually release and remove all magazines from the defective library and from the replacement
library enclosure. To release and remove a cartridge magazine:
a. Find the access holes for the right and left magazines (see Figure 156 and Figure 157 on page 199).

Figure 156. Access hole for the left magazine (facing rear of library) a77ug025

198 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 a77ug024
Figure 157. Access hole for the right magazine (facing rear of library)

b. Push the end of a straightened paper clip into the access hole for each magazine at the back of the
library. DO NOT push the paper clip in more than ½ inch. While holding the paper clip, have a
second person pull the magazine out from the front of the unit.

Note: To prevent dropping the magazine, support both ends of the magazine before it clears the
front edge of the library.

Check, Adjust, Remove, and Replace 199

 a77ug246
Figure 158. Left magazines pulled out of a 4U library (facing front of library)

2. Insert the cartridge magazines removed from the defective library into the same positions in the
replacement library enclosure.
3. Insert the cartridge magazines removed from the replacement library enclosure into the same
positions in the defective libraryto return to Dell.
4. Wait for inventory of the magazines to complete.
a. If inventory is successful:
1) The replacement library enclosure will complete with the Ready/Activity LED (▌1▐ in
Figure 155 on page 197) ON.
2) Power OFF the replacement library enclosure.
3) Proceed to “Swapping Power Supplies” on page 194.
b. If inventory is not successful:
1) The Error LED (▌4▐ in Figure 155 on page 197) will turn ON.
2) Power OFF the enclosure.
3) Contact Technical Support for further instructions.

Installing the Replacement Library Enclosure

Refer to the appropriate procedure in this section (rack or desktop) for installing the replacement library
enclosure.

Note: If you are shipping the replacement library enclosure to a remote location, install the shipping
lock and label before shipment.

Rack Installation:
1. Remove the mounting brackets (▌1▐ in Figure 159 on page 201) and anchors (▌2▐) from each side of
the defective library and install them on the replacement library enclosure.

200 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 a77ug252
Figure 159. Mounting brackets and anchors for securing the library in a rack (one bracket and anchor on each side of
the library)

2. With assistance, slide the replacement library enclosure onto the metal rails that are already in
position in the rack (see Figure 160).

Figure 160. Front view of rack showing screw placement

3. Tighten the mounting bracket screws (▌1▐ in Figure 147 on page 190) to anchor the replacement
library enclosure to the rack.
4. Proceed to “Completing the Installation of the Replacement Library Enclosure” on page 202.

Desktop Installation:
1. Place the library in its permanent location.
2. Proceed to “Completing the Installation of the Replacement Library Enclosure” on page 202.

Check, Adjust, Remove, and Replace 201

Completing the Installation of the Replacement Library Enclosure
1. Connect all cables to the replacement library enclosure.
2. Power ON the replacement library enclosure.
3. Upgrade library firmware and drive firmware to the latest version.
a. Visit www.Dell.com/support to download the latest levels of library and drive firmware.
b. Using the Web User Interface (Service Library > Upgrade Firmware), upgrade library and drive
firmware.
4. Run the Library Verify test (Operator Control Panel: Service > Library Verify). This diagnostic
requires a blank or scratch data cartridge.
5. Proceed to “Returning the Defective Library Enclosure.”

Returning the Defective Library Enclosure

1. Remove the shipping label (▌2▐ in Figure 150 on page 192) and lock (▌1▐) from the rear panel of the
defective library, place the lock in the slot located in the top center of the library, and secure with the
shipping lock label. This will secure the library accessor for shipping.
2. Using the replacement library enclosure packaging materials, securely package the defective library
(including the left and right magazines, Library Controller Card, and power supply removed from the
replacement library enclosure) and return it, to Dell.

Important: Failure to return all of these components to Dell will result in you being charged for
any missing components.

202 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Appendix A. SCSI Element Types, SCSI Addresses, and
Physical Configurations
For an overview of library partitioning and element addressing, see “Library Partitioning and Element
Addressing” on page 205.

The following tables contain element addresses for the 2U library and the 4U library.
Table 45. 2U library SCSI Element Types and Element Addresses
Element Type Element Address Range
Media Transport (Accessor) Element (MTE) 1 (0x01)
I/O Station Element (IEE) 16 (0x10)
Data Transfer (Drive) Element (DTE) 256 (0x100), 257 (0x101)
Storage Elements (STE) 4096 (0x1000) - 4118 (0x1016)

Table 46. 4U library SCSI Element Types and Element Addresses

Element Type Element Address Range
Media Transport (Accessor) Element (MTE) 1 (0x01)
I/O Station Elements (IEE) 16 (0x10), 17 (0x11), 18 (0x12)
Data Transfer (Drives) Elements (DTE) 256 (0x100), 257 (0x101), 258 (0x102, 259 (0x103)
Storage Elements (STE) 4096 (0x1000) - 4140 (0x102C)

2U Library I/O Slot, Storage Slots and Drive Slot Element Addresses
and Physical Locations
For an overview of library partitioning and element addressing, see “Library Partitioning and Element
Addressing” on page 205.

The following table contains the physical location and SCSI element address (decimal and hexadecimal)
of the I/O slot, storage slots, and drive slot in the 2U librarylibrary configured with one drive and one
logical partition. If a second drive were installed, it would be located at address 257 (0x101).

With two drives installed, the library can be configured as one partition (with two drives) or as two
partitions (with one drive per partition).

When configured with two drives and one logical partition, the Element Address assignments will be as
follows: DTE assignments
v Drive 1: 256 (0x100)
v Drive 2: 257 (0x101)
The STE assignments will be as shown in Table 47 on page 204.

When configured with two drives and one logical partition, the Element Address assignments will be as
follows:

DTE assignments
v Logical Library 1: Drive 1: 256 (0x100)
v Logical Library 2: Drive 2: 256 (0x100)
203
STE assignments
v Logical Library 1: Slot 1 through slot 11 4096 (x1000) through 4106 (0x100A)
v Logical Library 2: Slot 12 through slot 23 4096 (x1000) through 4107 (0x100B)
Table 47. 2U library SCSI element addresses for storage slots and drive slot (one logical partition with one drive)
Left Magazine Library Right Magazine
⇐ Front of 2U library Rear Panel Front of 2U library ⇒
Slot 8 Slot 9 Slot 10 Slot 11 Slot 23 Slot 22 Slot 21 Slot 20
4103 4104 4105 4106 4118 4117 4116 4115
(0x1007) (0x1008) (0x1009) (0x100A) (0x1016) (0x1015) (0x1014) (0x1013)
Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Drive 1 Slot 19 Slot 18 Slot 17 Slot 16
4099 4100 4101 4102 256 4114 4113 4112 4111
(0x1003) (0x1004) (0x1005) (0x1006) (0x100) (0x1012) (0x1011) (0x1010) (0x100F)
I/O slot Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 15 Slot 14 Slot 13 Slot 12
16 4096 4097 4098 4110 4109 4108 4107
(0x10) (0x1000) (0x1001) (0x1002) (0x100E) (0x100D) (0x100C) (0x100B)

4U Library I/O Slots, Storage Slots, and Drive Slots Element Addresses
and Physical Locations
For an overview of library partitioning and element addressing, see “Library Partitioning and Element
Addressing” on page 205.

The following table contains the physical location (Slot x) and SCSI element address in decimal (4xxx)
and in hexadecimal (0x10xx) of the I/O slots, storage slots, and drive slots in the 4U library containing
only two drive sleds.

In older 4U libraries where the Dedicated Cleaning Slot (DCS) is in a fixed location (slot 9) and elected to
be retained as a DCS (option to delete DCS is available in library firmware greater than 1.95), the above
slot numbering and element address changes starting with slot 10. In 4U libraries with a DCS, the
information shown in slot 9 below moves to slot 10 and so forth through the remaining magazine slots.
The final slot is slot 44 instead of slot 45 for libraries without a DCS. See “Configuring I/O Stations and
Reserving Slots” on page 136 for information on how to delete the dedicated cleaning slot. Once the DCS
is deleted, you cannot get it back. You will have to create a reserved slot if you want to clean the drive(s).
Table 48. 4U library SCSI element addresses for storage slots and drive slot (one logical partition with drives in slot 1
and slot 2)
Upper Left Magazine Library Upper Right Magazine
⇐Front of 4U library Rear Panel Front of 4U library⇒
Slot 18 Slot 19 Slot 20 Slot 21 Slot 45 Slot 44 Slot 43 Slot 42
4113 4114 4115 4116 4140 4139 4138 4137
(0x1011) (0x1012) (0x1013) (0x1014) (0x102C) (0x102B) (0x102A) (0x1029)
Slot 14 Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17 Drive 2 Slot 41 Slot 40 Slot 39 Slot 38
4109 4110 4111 4112 257 4136 4135 4134 4133
(0x100D) (0x100E) (0x100F) (0x1010) (0x101) (0x1028) (0x1027) (0x1026) (0x1025)
Slot 10 Slot 11 Slot 12 Slot 13 Slot 37 Slot 36 Slot 35 Slot 34
4105 4106 4107 4108 4132 4131 4130 4129
(0x1009) (0x100A) (0x100B) (0x100C) (0x1024) (0x1023) (0x1022) (0x1021)

204 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Table 48. 4U library SCSI element addresses for storage slots and drive slot (one logical partition with drives in slot 1
and slot 2) (continued)
Lower Left Magazine Lower Right Magazine
I/O Slot 3 Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 9 Slot 33 Slot 32 Slot 31 Slot 30
18 4102 4103 4104 4128 4127 4126 4125
(0x12) (0x1006) (0x1007) (0x1008) (0x1020) (0x101F) (0x101E) (0x101D)
Drive 1
I/O Slot 2 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 256 Slot 29 Slot 28 Slot 27 Slot 26
17 4099 4100 4101 (0x100) 4124 4123 4122 4121
(0x11) (0x1003) (0x1004) (0x1005) (0x101C (0x101B) (0x101A) (0x1019)
I/O Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 25 Slot 24 Slot 23 Slot 22
16 4096 4097 4098 4120 4119 4118 4117
(0x10) (0x1000) (0x1001) (0x1002) (0x1018) (0x1017) (0x1016) (0x1015)

Library Partitioning and Element Addressing

Library 4U systems with firmware versions of .80 and higher, and containing at least 2 drives, have the
ability to configure two logical libraries (create two partitions). This partitioning has been expanded with
the new library firmware and half-high drive integration. Now it is possible to configure 1, 2, 3 or 4
partitions in the 4U library. Additionally the 2U library can now be configured into one or two partitions.
Each library must contain at least one drive per logical library (partition). In a partitioned library, the
Operator Control Panel (OCP) only reports the status of logical library 1 in the main menu due to space
limitations. You must navigate to the logical libraries status in the OCP to get the information on the
additional library partitions.

Partitioning of 2U Libraries

When two half height drives are installed in a 2U library, the library firmware will support partitioning
in the same way that the 4U supports partitioning with two full height drives today. The first partition
will contain the first magazine and the first drive. The second partition will contain the second magazine
and the second drive. The I/O station (if configured as I/O) will be shared, as is done with the
partitioned 4U library.

One full height drive is "Drive 1". When using half height drives, the first half height drive position will
be called "Drive 1", The second half height drive position will be called "Drive 2."

Partitioning of 4U Libraries

When one or more half height drives are added to a 4U library, the drive naming will change. Currently,
the first full height drive is "Drive 1" and the second full height drive is "Drive 2". When you consider
that each full height drive slot may contain one or two half height drives, there are four potential drives
in the space that used to occupy two. As a result, the first half height drive position, or the first full-high
drive position, will be called "Drive 1". The second half height drive position will be called "Drive 2". The
third half height drive position, or the second full height drive position, will be called "Drive 3". The
fourth half height drive position will be called "Drive 4".

Important: In a 4U library a full height drive sled may be installed in drive slot 1 (drive will occupy slot
1 and slot 2) or drive slot 3 (drive will occupy slot 3 and slot 4). A full height drive sled should never be
installed in drive slot 2 (drive will occupy slot 2 and slot 3).

Mixing of Drives

The library will support a mix of full height and half height drives in the same physical library and the
same logical library. They will support a mix of drives in the same physical library and the same logical

Appendix A. SCSI Element Types, SCSI Addresses, and Physical Configurations 205
library. They will also support a mix of SCSI, SAS, and Fibre Channel in the same physical library and
the same logical library; however, mixing drive interface types in the same logical library is not
recommended.

Important: Drives that do not share a common media type cannot be mixed in the same logical library.
For instance, Gen 4 and Gen 7 drives cannot use the same media and so they cannot be mixed. LTO 4
media cannot be read on an LTO 7 drive.

Configuration of a 1 - Partition System

A one partition system configured for a 4U library contains any and all drives present in any drive
positions, and it will contain all four magazines. When configured with one logical partition, the Element
Address assignments will be as follows: DTE assignments will be as shown in Figure 161

STE assignments
v Logical Library 1: Slot1 through 23 4096 (0x1000) through 4118 (0x1016) as shown in Figure 164 on page
207

Drive 4 Drive 4
Element Address Element Address
Drive 2 259 Drive 3 259 Magazine Magazine
Element Address Element Address
Drive 3 Drive 3 2 4
257 258
Element Address Element Address
258 258
Drive 2 Drive 2
Element Address Element Address Magazine Magazine
Drive 1 Drive 1 257 257 1 3
Element Address Element Address

a77ug161
Drive 1 Drive 1
256 256
Element Address Element Address
256 256 Front side

Figure 161. Configuration of a one - partition system

Configuration of a 2 - Partition System

A two partition system must have a minimum of two drives, but may have three or four drives. Partition
1 will contain any drives in drive position 1 and drive position 2. Partition 1 will also contain magazine 1
and magazine 2. Partition 2 will contain any drives in drive position 3 and drive position 4. Partition 2
will also contain magazine 3 and magazine 4.

When configured with two logical partitions, the Element Address assignments will be as follows: DTE
assignments will be as shown in Figure 162.

STE assignments
v Logical Library 1: Slot 1 through slot 21 4096 (x1000) through 4116 (0x1014)
v Logical Library 2: Slot 22 through slot 45 4096 (x1000) through 4019 (0x1017)

Drive 4 Drive 4
Element Address Element Address
Drive 2 257 Drive 3 257 Magazine Magazine
Element Address Element Address
Drive 3 Drive 3 2 4
256 256
Element Address Element Address
256 256
Drive 2 Drive 2
Element Address Element Address Magazine Magazine
Drive 1 Drive 1 257 257 1 3
Element Address Element Address
a77ug162

Drive 1 Drive 1
256 256
Element Address Element Address
256 256 Front side

Figure 162. Configuration of a two - partition system

206 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Configuration of a 3 - Partition System

A three partition system must have at least three drives installed. A drive must be installed in drive
position 1, another drive must be installed in drive position 2, and another drive must be installed in
either drive position 3 or drive position 4. Partition 1 will contain the first drive and the first magazine.
Partition 2 will contain the second drive and the second magazine. Partition 3 will contain any drives in
drive position 3 and drive position 4. Partition 3 will also contain magazine 3 and magazine 4.

STE assignments
v Logical Library 1: Slot 1 through slot 9 4096 (x1000) through 4104 (0x1008)
v Logical Library 2: Slot 10 through slot 21 4096 (x1000) through 4107 (0x100B)
v Logical Library 3: Slot 22 through slot 45 4096 (x1000) through 4119 (0x1017)

Drive 4
Element Address
Drive 3 257 Magazine Magazine
Element Address 2 4
256 Drive 3
Element Address
256
Drive 2 Drive 2
Element Address Element Address Magazine Magazine
256 256 1 3

a77ug163
Drive 1 Drive 1
Element Address Element Address
256 256 Front side

Figure 163. Configuration of a three - partition system

Configuration of a 4 - Partition System

A four partition system must have four drives. Each partition will contain one drive and one magazine.

When configured with four logical partitions, the Element Address assignments will be as follows: DTE
assignments will be as shown in Figure 164.

STE assignments
v Logical Library 1: Slot 1 through slot 9 4096 (x1000) through 4104 (0x1008)
v Logical Library 2: Slot 10 through slot 21 4096 (x1000) through 4107 (0x100B)
v Logical Library 3: Slot 22 through slot 33 4096 (x1000) through 4107 (0x100B)
v Logical Library 4: Slot 34 through slot 45 4096 (x1000) through 4107 (0x100B)

Drive 4
Element Address
256 Magazine Magazine
Drive 3 2 4
Element Address
256
Drive 2
Element Address Magazine Magazine
256 1 3
a77ug164

Drive 1
Element Address
256 Front side

Figure 164. Configuration of a four - partition system

Appendix A. SCSI Element Types, SCSI Addresses, and Physical Configurations 207
SCSI Element Addressing

Every logical library starts at the first drive slot with the current assigned element start address (default
value 256). It will be incremented from the bottom to the top slots for every drive slot. There is one
exception to this addressing scheme to accommodate libraries currently in the field. A 4U library which
contains only full height drives will continue to have the addresses assignments 256 and 257, thus
causing no interruptions to their operation. Drive slots will still be incremented by 1 for each drive slot
position.

Note: Exchanging drives with different form factors will result in the library needing to be reconfigured.

4U Unit with only FH drives

(1 logical library)

SCSI Element Slot

4
257
3
2
256
1

4U Unit with FH and HH drives

(1 logical library)
SCSI Element Slot
4
258
3 a77ug165

257 2
256 1

Figure 165. Examples of SCSI element addressing

The SCSI specification does not allow gaps in the SCSI element addressing. Special handling is needed
for empty drive slots to fulfill the specification. Also temporarily removed drives need to have their
addresses preserved to not confuse the attached host and host application. Generally only drives which
are currently physically available or temporarily removed are reported. Empty (unused) slots located at
the bottom or the top should not be reported, with an exception in case of a “removed” condition. A
drive slot which does not contain a drive, and has a position between used slots, needs to be reported as
a SCSI element. To signal the host application that this slot is not usable, its ACCESS bit will be disabled.

Note: When reducing the number of drives in your library, update the Logical Library configuration.
This will remove the Attention LED on the front panel and the exclamation mark on the Home screen
indicating that a drive is missing.

Updating the Logical Library configuration will also update the drive element addressing and drive
numbering. Replacing LTO half height drives with full height drives may require you to execute Restore
Factory Defaults to correctly update the drive element addressing and drive numbering. See “Configure
Library: Save/Restore Configuration” on page 128.

208 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Appendix B. TapeAlert Flags
This appendix is intended to provide additional information to the reader about the tape drive. All error
code and diagnostic information contained in this chapter can be accessed from the Operator Control
Panel of the Library. The drive portion of the Operator Control Panel Display will contain any drive
error codes. Therefore there is no need to open the Library to access the buttons on the drive as described
in this chapter.

TapeAlert is a standard that defines status conditions and problems experienced by devices such as tape
drives, autoloaders, and libraries. The standard enables a server to read TapeAlert messages (called flags)
from a tape drive via the SCSI bus. The server reads the flags from Log Sense Page 0x2E.

This library is compatible with TapeAlert technology, which provides error and diagnostic information
about the drives and the library to the server. Because library and drive firmware may change
periodically, the SNMP interface in the library does not require code changes if devices add additional
TapeAlerts that are not supported today. However, should this occur the Management Information Block
(MIB) is written to minimize impact to the SNMP monitoring station. At the time of this writing, the
TapeAlert flags in this appendix correctly represent TapeAlerts that will be sent. The MIB file should not
be taken to mean that all traps that are defined in the MIB (refer to Appendix F, “SNMP Status MIB
Variables and Traps,” on page 237) will be sent by the library or that they will be sent in the future.

This appendix lists TapeAlert flags that are supported by the Ultrium 3 and later Tape Drives.

TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Library

Parameter Flag name Type Action Required
Code
(d=decimal)
01d Library C The media changer mechanism is having difficulty communicating with
Hardware A the drive.

Power cycle the library and try the operation again.

v If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify before resuming normal
library operations. Refer to “Service: Library Verify” on page 102.
v If the problem persists, contact technical support.
02d Library W There is a problem with the media changer mechanism. Power cycle the
Hardware B library and try the operation again.
v If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify before resuming normal
library operations. Refer to “Service: Library Verify” on page 102.
v If the problem persists, contact technical support.
03d Library C The media changer has a hardware fault:
Hardware C v Ensure that the media changer and drives are not being used by any
host, then reset the library from the front panel.
v If the problem persists, contact technical support.
04d Library C v Ensure that the media changer and drives are not being used by any
Hardware D host, then reset the library from the front panel.
v If the problem persists, contact technical support.

209
13d Library Pick W There is a potential problem with the cartridge loader picking a cartridge
Retry from a drive or slot.
v No action needs to be taken at this time.
v If the problem persists, contact technical support.

This flag is cleared when the next move command is received.

14d Library Place W There is a potential problem with the cartridge loader placing a cartridge
Retry into a slot.
v No action needs to be taken at this time.
v If the problem persists, contact technical support.

This flag is cleared when the next move command is received.

15d Drive Load W There is a potential problem with the cartridge loader or drive when
Retry placing a cartridge into a drive.
v No action needs to be taken at this time.
v If the problem persists, contact technical support.

This flag is cleared when the next move command is received.

17d Library I/O C There is a mechanical problem with the library media I/O Station.
Station
18d Media C It is set when a magazine is removed from the changer.
Changer
19d Library W Library security has been compromised. The door was opened then
Security closed during operation.
21d Media I It is set when the changer is set offline.
Changer
24d Library C The library has detected an inconsistency in its inventory.
Inventory v Redo the library inventory to correct inconsistency.
v Restart the operation.

Check the applications users manual or the hardware users manual for
specific instructions on redoing the library inventory.
25d Media W It is set when it receives unsupported SCSI opcodes.
Changer
27d Cooling FAN W One or more fans inside the library have failed. This flag is cleared when
Failure all fans are working again.
32d Unreadable I The library was unable to read the barcode on a cartridge.
Bar Code
Labels

v D = Decimal
v I = Informational suggestion to user
v W = Warning. Remedial action is advised. Performance of data may be at risk.
v C = Critical immediate remedial action is required.

210 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Drive
Table 49. TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Ultrium Tape Drive
Flag
Number Flag Description Action Required
3 Hard error Set for any unrecoverable read, write, See the Action Required column for
or positioning error. (This flag is set in Flag Number 4, 5, or 6 in this table.
conjunction with flags 4, 5, or 6.)
4 Media Set for any unrecoverable read, write, Replace the tape cartridge.
or positioning error that is due to a
faulty tape cartridge.
5 Read failure Set for any unrecoverable read error If Flag 4 is also set, the cartridge is
where isolation is uncertain and defective. Replace the tape
failure could be due to a faulty tape cartridge.
cartridge or to faulty drive hardware.
6 Write failure Set for any unrecoverable write or If Flag Number 9 is also set, make
positioning error where isolation is sure that the write-protect switch is
uncertain and failure could be due to set so that data can be written to
a faulty tape cartridge or to faulty the tape (see “Write-Protect Switch”
drive hardware. on page 144). If Flag Number 4 is
also set, the cartridge is defective.
Replace the tape cartridge.
7 Media life Set when the tape cartridge reaches its 1. Copy the data to another tape
end of life (EOL). cartridge.
2. Discard the old (EOL) tape.
8 Not data grade Set when the cartridge is not Replace the tape with a data-grade
data-grade. Any data that you write tape.
to the tape is at risk.
9 Write protect Set when the tape drive detects that Ensure that the cartridge's
the tape cartridge is write-protected. write-protect switch is set so that
the tape drive can write data to the
tape (see “Write-Protect Switch” on
page 144).
10 No removal Set when the tape drive receives an Refer to the documentation for your
UNLOAD command after the server server's operating system.
prevented the tape cartridge from
being removed.
11 Cleaning media Set when you load a cleaning No action required.
cartridge into the drive.
12 Unsupported format Set when you load an unsupported Use a supported tape cartridge.
cartridge type into the drive or when
the cartridge format has been
corrupted.
15 Cartridge memory chip Set when a cartridge memory (CM) Replace the tape cartridge.
failure failure is detected on the loaded tape
cartridge.
16 Forced eject Set when you manually unload the No action required.
tape cartridge while the drive was
reading or writing.
17 Media loaded is Set when a cartridge marked as read No action required.
Read-only format only is loaded into the drive. The flag
is cleared when the cartridge is
ejected.

Appendix B. TapeAlert Flags 211

Table 49. TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Ultrium Tape Drive (continued)
Flag
Number Flag Description Action Required
18 Tape directory corrupted Set when the drive detects that the Re-read all data from the tape to
in the cartridge memory tape directory in the cartridge rebuild the tape directory.
memory has been corrupted.
19 Nearing media life Set when the tape cartridge is nearing 1. Copy the data to another tape
its specified end of life. The flag is cartridge.
cleared when the cartridge is removed
2. Replace the tape cartridge.
from the drive.
20 Clean now Set when the tape drive detects that it Clean the tape drive.
needs cleaning.
21 Clean periodic Set when the drive detects that it Clean the tape drive as soon as
needs routine cleaning. possible. The drive can continue to
operate, but you should clean the
drive soon.
22 Expired clean Set when the tape drive detects a Replace the cleaning cartridge.
cleaning cartridge that has expired.
23 Invalid cleaning tape Set when the drive expects a cleaning Use a valid cleaning cartridge.
cartridge and the loaded cartridge is
not a cleaning cartridge.
30 Hardware A Set when a hardware failure occurs
that requires that you reset the tape
drive to recover.
31 Hardware B Set when the tape drive fails its Note the error code on the
internal Power-On Self Tests. single-character display, then
32 Interface Set when the tape drive detects a
problem with the host interface.
33 Eject media Set when a failure occurs that requires Unload the tape cartridge, then
you to unload the cartridge from the reinsert it and restart the operation.
drive.
34 Download fail Set when an FMR image is Ensure that it is the correct FMR
unsuccessfully downloaded to the image. Download the FMR image
tape drive through the host interface. again.
37 Drive voltage Set when the drive detects that the
externally supplied voltages are either
approaching the specified voltage
limits or are outside the voltage
limits.
38 Predictive failure of Set when a hardware failure of the
drive hardware tape drive is predicted.
39 Diagnostics required Set when the drive detects a failure
that requires diagnostics for isolation.
51 Tape directory invalid at Set when the tape directory on the Use your backup software to
unload tape cartridge that was previously rebuild the tape directory by
unloaded is corrupted. The file-search reading all the data.
performance is degraded.
52 Tape system area write Set when the tape cartridge that was Copy the data to another tape
failure previously unloaded could not write cartridge, then discard the old
its system area successfully. cartridge.

212 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Table 49. TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Ultrium Tape Drive (continued)
Flag
Number Flag Description Action Required
53 Tape system area read Set when the tape system area could Copy the data to another tape
failure not be read successfully at load time. cartridge, then discard the old
cartridge.
55 Loading Failure When loading a tape into a drive, a Take this action if the tape cartridge
hardware malfunction can prevent the will not load in the drive:
tape from being loaded into the drive, 1. Remove the tape cartridge from
or the tape may actually get stuck in the library and inspect it for
the drive. damage. If damaged, discard it.
2. Try another cartridge in that
tape drive. If it still fails, replace
the drive sled. See
“Removing/Installing/Adding a
Tape Drive Sled” on page 181.
Take this action if the tape is stuck
in the drive:
1. Attempt to unload the tape from
the drive using the host backup
application that is currently
using the drive, or using the
remote or local UI.
2. If the cartridge will not unload,
contact technical support.
56 Unload Failure When attempting to unload a tape 1. Unload the cartridge from the
cartridge, a drive hardware drive using the Operator Control
malfunction can prevent the tape from Panel (Control > Move
being ejected. The tape may actually Cartridge) or the Web User
be stuck in the drive. Interface (Manage Library >
Move Media).
2. Cycle drive power using the
Operator Control Panel (Service
> Service > Drive Power) or the
Web User Interface (Configure
Library > Drives).
3. Try unloading the cartridge from
the drive again using the
Operator Control Panel (Control
> Move Cartridge) or the Web
User Interface (Manage Library
> Move Media).
4. If the cartridge will not unload
from the drive, contact technical
support.
59 WORM Medium – Set when the drive determines that 1. Copy the data to another
integrity check failed the data on tape is suspect from a WORM tape cartridge.
WORM point of view.
2. Discard the old WORM tape.
60 WORM Medium – Set when the drive rejects a write Append the information on a
Overwrite attempted operation because the rules for WORM tape cartridge or write the
allowing WORM writes have not been data to a non-WORM cartridge.
met. Data can only be appended to
WORM media. Overwrites to WORM
media are not allowed.

Appendix B. TapeAlert Flags 213

214 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Appendix C. Sense Data
When a drive encounters an error, it makes sense data available. You can use device drivers to examine
the sense data and determine errors. The device drivers may conflict with some commercial software
applications unless properly configured. To avoid conflicts on Windows operating systems, refer to your
device driver's procedures for setting the driver to manual startup mode.

If your application uses other device drivers, see the appropriate documentation for those drivers to
obtain the sense data.

In addition to device drivers, other methods exist for obtaining sense data and error information. The
sections that follow describe alternatives for gathering such information.

Library sense data

The following table lists the Additional Sense Codes (ASC) and Additional Sense Code Qualifiers (ASCQ)
associated with the reported Sense Keys.

A sense key of 00h (no sense) has no ASC/ASCQ associated with it. A few ASC/ASCQs are associated
with more than one sense key. The sense keys that gives particular ASC/ASCQs are indicated within the
Sense Key column. ASC/ASCQs can indicate an abnormal element state as part of element descriptor.
Table 50. Library Sense Keys, ASC and ASCQ
Sense Key ASC ASCQ Description
Recovered Error (01) 0Ah 00h Error log overflow
47h 00h SCSI parity error
Not Ready (02) 00h 17h Drive cleaning requested
04h 00h Cause not reportable
04h 01h In progress becoming ready, scanning magazines, etc.
04h 02h Initializing command required
04h 03h Manual intervention required
04h 07h Operation in progress
04h 12h Offline
04h 83h Door open
04h 85h Firmware upgrade in progress
04h 87h The drive is not enabled
04h 88h The drive is busy
04h 89h The drive is not empty
04h 9Ah Drive fibre down
04h 8Eh The media changer is in sequential mode
30h 03h Cleaning in progress
3Bh 12h Magazine removed
04h 8Fh No free storage slots

215
Table 50. Library Sense Keys, ASC and ASCQ (continued)
Sense Key ASC ASCQ Description
Medium Error (03) 30h 00h Incompatible media installed
30h 03h Cleaning tape installed
30h 07h Cleaning failure

216 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Table 50. Library Sense Keys, ASC and ASCQ (continued)
Sense Key ASC ASCQ Description
Hardware Error (04) 81h 80h Cannot initialize bar code reader
81h 81h No response from bar code reader
81h 82h No response from EEPROM
81h 83h Slave robotic generic problem
81h 84h Setting of gripper pic value failed
81h 85h Setting of slider pic value failed
81h 86h Setting of elevator pic value failed
81h 87h Setting of rotation pic value failed
81h 88h Setting of sled pic value failed
81h 89h Gripper blocked
81h 8Ah Slider blocked
81h 8Bh Elevator blocked
81h 8Ch Rotation blocked
81h 8Dh Sled blocked
81h 8Eh Cannot find gripper block
81h 8Fh Cannot find slider block
81h 90h Cannot find elevator block
81h 91h Cannot find rotation block
81h 92h Cannot find sled block
81h 93h Gripper outside range
81h 94h Slider outside range
81h 95h Elevator outside range
81h 96h Rotation outside range
81h 97h Sled outside range
81h 98h No cartridge present sensor found
81h 99h No slider home sensor found
81h 9Ah No rotation home sensor found
81h 9Bh No sled position sensor found
81h 9Ch The range of gripper is wrong
81h 9Dh The range of slider is wrong
81h 9Eh The range of elevator is wrong
81h 9Fh The range of rotation is wrong
81h A0h The range of sled is wrong
81h A1h Open import/export element failed
81h A2h Locking failed
81h A3h SE2 Block
81h A4h SE2 No Block
81h A5h No Sled2 Home Sensor
81h A6h No Elev Home Sensor

Appendix C. Sense Data 217

Table 50. Library Sense Keys, ASC and ASCQ (continued)
Sense Key ASC ASCQ Description
Hardware Error (04) 81h B0h Slave robotic controller response timeout
(continued)
81h B1h NACK received from slave robotic controller
81h B2h Slave robotic controller communication failed
81h B3h Slave robotic controller urgent stop
81h B4h Cartridge did not transport completely
81h B5h Slave robotic controller does not respond on command
80h C0h Network init
80h C1h Telnet interface
80h C2h Webserver
80h C3h EEPROM parameter
80h C4h Cannot init LAN card
80h C5h Write to EEPROM failed
80h C6h Ping command did not reach target
80h C7h Cannot upgrade from USB
80h C9h Cannot Upgrade Robotic from Flash
80h D0h ROM error
80h D1h RAM error
80h D2h NVRAM error
80h D3h CTC error
80h D4h UART error
80h D5h Display error
80h D6h Memory error
80h D7h Fatal system error
80h D8h dBase error
80h D9h No SCSI IC detected
80h DAh Different bar code labels
80h DBh External cooling fan failure
80h DCh Internal I2C bus error
80h DFh Power good signal changed from 2 to 1 PS
80h E0h Incompatible magazine detected
80h E2h Unsupported accessory detected
80h EBh Power supply health check failed due to a power supply failure.
Please contact service.
82h F0h Over temperature problem
82h F1h Drive communication error
82h F2h Drive sled not present
82h F3h Drive broken: needs repair

218 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Table 50. Library Sense Keys, ASC and ASCQ (continued)
Sense Key ASC ASCQ Description
Hardware Error (04) 82h F4h Drive load timeout
(continued)
82h F5h Drive unload timeout
82h F6h Drive never present
82h F7h Drive support ticket error
82h F8h Drive invalid command
82h F9h Drive invalid parameter
82h FAh SDCI microcode error
82h FBh Drive logged out
82h FCh Internal drive command failed with Check Condition
82h FDh Internal drive command timeout

Appendix C. Sense Data 219

Table 50. Library Sense Keys, ASC and ASCQ (continued)
Sense Key ASC ASCQ Description
Illegal Request (05h) 1Ah 00h Parameter length error
20h 00h Invalid command operation code
21h 01h v Invalid element address - associated with Error Code 33
v Invalid drive specified - associated with Error Code 35
24h 00h v Invalid field in the CDB - associated with Error Code 34
v SEND DIAG Invalid test number - associated with Error Code 36
3Dh 00h SCSI invalid ID message
25h 00h Invalid LUN
2Ch 00h Command sequence error
26h 00h Invalid field in parameter list
26h 01h Parameter list error: parameter not supported
26h 02h Parameter value invalid
26h 90h Wrong firmware image, does not fit boot code
26h 91h Wrong personality firmware image
26h 93h Wrong firmware image, checksum error
30h 12h Incompatible medium
39h 00h Saving parameters not supported
3Bh 0Dh Medium destination element full
3Bh 0Eh Medium source element empty
3Bh 11h Medium magazine not accessible
3Bh 81h Medium belongs to another partition
3Bh A0h Medium transfer element full
53h 02h Library media removal prevented state set
53h 03h Drive media removal prevented state set
44h 80h Bad status library controller
44h 81h Source not ready
44h 82h Destination not ready
44h 83h Cannot make reservation
44h 84h Wrong drive type
44h 85h Invalid slave robotic controller request
44h 86h Accessor not initialized
80h 5Bh Incompatible medium generation (sense key medium error)
80h 5Dh Wrong drive fw for drive
80h 5Eh Full height drive at illegal position
80h 75h Download prevented due to incompatible bar code reader hardware
80h 77h Download prevented due to incompatible LCM
80h 78h Download prevented due to incompatible Robot Code
80h 79h Download prevented due to incompatible drive version
83h 00h Failure in LME interface

220 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Table 50. Library Sense Keys, ASC and ASCQ (continued)
Sense Key ASC ASCQ Description
Unit Attention (06h) 28h 00h Not ready to ready transition
28h 01h Import/export element accessed
29h 01h Power on occurred
29h 02h SCSI Bus reset occurred
29h 05h Bus type changed to Single Ended (SE)
29h 06h Bus type changed to Low Voltage Differential (LVD)
2Ah 01h Mode parameters changed
2Ah 10h Time stamp changed
3Bh 13h Medium magazine inserted
3Fh 01h Microcode has changed
53h 02h Media removal prevented
Command Aborted (0Bh) 3Fh 0Fh ECHO buffer overwritten
43h 00h SCSI message error
47h 00h SCSI parity error
49h 00h SCSI invalid message
4Eh 00h Overlapped command attempt

Drive Sense Data

LTO Ultrium 4 and later drives contain hardware which performs user data write encryption and read
decryption, protecting all user data written to the medium from unauthorized use, provided it is
integrated into a secure system design.
Table 51. LTO Tape Drive Sense Data
Bit Address or Name
Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Address
valid

When set to
1, the info
0 byte field Error Code
contains a
valid
logical
block
address.
1 Segment Number (0)

Appendix C. Sense Data 221

Table 51. LTO Tape Drive Sense Data (continued)
Bit Address or Name
Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
2 Filemark EOM (end ILI Reserved Sense Key Description
of medium) (Incorrect 0 - No sense
length 1 - Recovered error
indicator) 2 - Not ready
3 - Media error
4 - Hardware error
5 - Illegal request
6 - Unit attention
7 - Data protect
8 - Blank Check
9 - Reserved
A - Reserved
B - Aborted command
C - Reserved
D - Volume overflow
E - Reserved
F - Reserved
3 Information byte (most significant byte)
4 Information byte
5 Information byte
6 Information byte (least significant byte)
7 Additional Sense Length
8-11 Command specific information

222 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Table 51. LTO Tape Drive Sense Data (continued)
Bit Address or Name
Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
12-13 Additional Sense Code (ASC)
Additional Sense Code Qualifier (ASCQ)
Byte 12 Byte 13
ASC ASCQ
00 00 - No additional sense - The flags in the sense data indicate the reason for
the command failure
00 01 - Filemark detected - A Read or Space command terminated early due to an FM
The FM flag is set.
00 02 - EOM - A Write or Write File Marks command failed because the physical
end of tape was encountered, or a Read or Space command encountered EOM
The EOM flag is set
00 04 - BOM - A space command ended at Beginning of Tape
The EOM bit is also set
00 05 - EOD - Read or Space command terminated early
because End of Data was encountered
00 16 - Operation in Progress
04 00 - Cause not reportable - A cartridge is present in the drive, but it is in the
process of being unloaded
04 01 - Becoming Ready - A media access command was received during a
front panel initiated load or an immediate reported load command
04 02 - Initializing Command Required - A cartridge is present in the drive, but is not
logically loaded. A Load command is required
04 03 - Manual Intervention Required - A cartridge is present in the drive but could
not be loaded or unloaded without manual intervention
04 10 - Logical unit not ready, auxiliary memory not accessible
04 12 - Logical unit not ready, offline
08 01 - Logical unit communication failure
09 00 - Track following error (servo)
0C 00 - Write Error - A Write operation has failed. This is probably due to bad
media, but may be hardware related
11 00 - Unrecovered Read Error - A Read operation failed. This is probably due
to bad media, but may be hardware related
11 12 - Auxiliary memory read error. The drive reported that it is unable to read the
Auxiliary Memory in a WORM cartridge.
14 00 - Recorded Entity Not Found - A space or Locate command failed because
a format violation prevented the target from being found.
14 03 - End Of Data not found - A Read type operation failed because a format
violation related to a missing EOD data set
14 10 - Not Ready - Auxiliary memory not accessible. The drive is not able to become
ready because it is unable to access the Auxiliary Memory in a WORM cartridge.
17 01 - Recovered data with retries
1A 00 - Parameter list length error - The amount of parameter data sent is incorrect
20 00 - Invalid Command Operation Code - The Operation Code in the command
was not a valid Operation Code
24 00 - Invalid field in CDB - An invalid field has been detected in a
Command Descriptor Block
25 00 - LUN not supported - The command was addressed to a non-existent
logical unit number
26 00 - Invalid Field in Parameter List - An invalid field has been detected in the
data sent during the data phase

Appendix C. Sense Data 223

Table 51. LTO Tape Drive Sense Data (continued)
Bit Address or Name
Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
12-13 Additional Sense Code (ASC) -
Additional Sense Code Qualifier (ASCQ) (Continued)
Byte 12 Byte 13
ASC ASCQ
27 00 - Write Protect - A Write type operation has been requested on a cartridge which
has been write protected
28 00 - Not Ready to Ready Transition - A cartridge has been loaded successfully into
the drive and is now ready to be accessed
28 01 - Import or export element accessed
29 00 - Reset - The drive has powered on, received a reset signal or a bus device
reset signal since the initiator last accessed it
29 04 - Device internal reset
2A 01 - Mode Parameters Changed - The Mode parameters for the drive have
been changed by an initiator other than the one issuing the command
2C 00 - Command sequence error
2C 0B - Not reserved - The OIR bit of the sequential access device page
is set and the I-T nexus attempting to communicate with the drive does not hold
a reservation.
2F 00 - Commands cleared by another initiator
30 00 - Incompatible Media Installed - A write type operation could not be
executed because it is not supported on the cartridge type that is loaded.
30 01 - Unknown Format - An operation could not be carried out because the cartridge
in the drive is of a format not supported by the drive
30 02 - Incompatible Format - An operation could not be completed because the
Logical Format is not correct
30 03 - Cleaning Cartridge Installed - An operation could not be carried out
because the cartridge in the drive is a cleaning cartridge
30 05 - Cannot write medium, incompatible format
30 07 - Cleaning Failure - A cleaning operation was attempted, but could not
be completed for some reason
30 0C - Data Protect - WORM overwrite attempted. The drive rejected a write operation
because it would have resulted in an overwrite. Overwrite is not allowed on
WORM media.
30 0D - Medium Error - WORM integrity check. The drive rejected a Read or Write
operation because the cartridge is a suspicious WORM cartridge.
31 00 - Media format corrupted - Data could not be read because the format on tape is
not valid, but is a known format. A failure occurred attempting to write the FID
37 00 - Rounded parameter - A Mode Select command parameter has been
rounded because the drive can not store it with the accuracy of the command.
3A 00 - Media Not Present - A media access command has been received
when there is no cartridge loaded
3B 00 - Sequential Positioning Error - A command has failed and left the logical
position at an unexpected location
3B 0C - Position past beginning of medium
3D 00 - Invalid bits in identify Message - An illegal Identify Message has been
received at the drive at the start of a command
3E 00 - Logical Unit has not Self-Configured - The drive has just powered on and
has not completed its self test sequence and can not process commands
3F 01 - Code Download - The firmware in the drive has just been changed
by a Write Buffer command
3F 03 - Inquiry data has changed
3F 0E - Reported LUNs data has changed
3F 0F - Echo buffer overwritten
40 xx - Diagnostic failure - A diagnostic test has failed. The xx (ASCQ) is a
vendor specific code indicating the failing component.

224 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Table 51. LTO Tape Drive Sense Data (continued)
Bit Address or Name
Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
12-13 Additional Sense Code (ASC) -
Additional Sense Code Qualifier (ASCQ) (Continued)
Byte 12 Byte 13
ASC ASCQ
41 00 - Data path failure
43 00 - Message Error - A message could not be sent or received due to excessive
transmission errors
44 00 - Internal target failure - A hardware failure has been detected in the drive
that has caused the command to fail
45 00 - Select/Reset Failure - An attempt to reselect an initiator in order to
complete the command has failed
48 00 - Initiator detected error message received
49 00 - Invalid message error
4A 00 - Command phase error
4B 00 - Data Phase Error - A command could not be completed because too many
parity errors occurred during the Data phase
4E 00 - Overlapped Commands - An initiator selected the drive even though it
already had a command outstanding in the drive
50 00 - Write Append Error - A write type command failed because the point at
which to append data was unreadable
51 00 - Erase failure - An Erase command failed to erase the required area on the
media
52 00 - Cartridge fault - A command could not be completed due to a fault in the
tape cartridge
53 00 - Media Load/Eject Failed - (Sense Key 03) An attempt to load or eject
the cartridge failed due to a problem with the cartridge.
53 00 - Media Load/Eject Failed - (Sense Key 04) An attempt to load or eject
the cartridge failed due to a problem with the drive
53 02 - Media Removal Prevented - An Unload command has failed to eject the
cartridge because media removal has been prevented
5A 01 - Operator medium removal request
5D 00 - Failure Prediction Threshold - Failure Prediction thresholds have been
exceeded indicating that a failure may occur soon
5D FF - Failure Prediction False - A Mode Select command has been used to test
for Failure Prediction system.
82 82 - Drive requires cleaning - The drive has detected that a cleaning operation
is required to maintain good operation
82 83 - Bad Code Detected - The data transferred to the drive during a
firmware upgrade is corrupt or incompatible with drive hardware

Appendix C. Sense Data 225

Table 51. LTO Tape Drive Sense Data (continued)
Bit Address or Name
Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
12-13 Additional Sense Code (ASC) -
Additional Sense Code Qualifier (ASCQ) (Continued)
Byte 12 Byte 13
ASC ASCQ

Sense Key 0 (No Sense)

EE 13 - Encryption - Key Translate
EF 13 - Encryption - Key Translate EKM

Sense Key 3 (Medium Error)

30 02 - Encryption - Encryption feature is not enabled so format/processing is not supported
EE 60 - Encryption - Proxy Command Error
EE D0 - Encryption - Data Read Decryption Failure
EE D1 - Encryption - Data Read after Write Decryption Failure
EE E0 - Encryption - Key Translation Failure
EE E1 - Encryption - Key Translation Ambiguous
EE F0 - Encryption - Decryption Fenced (Read)
EE F1 - Encryption - Encryption Fenced (Write)

Sense Key 4 (Hardware Error)

EE 0E - Encryption - Key Service Timeout
EE 0F - Encryption - Key Service Failure
40 00 - Encryption - Failure Hardware, POST or Module Failure

Sense Key 5 (Illegal Request)

EE 00 - Encryption - Key Service Not Enabled
EE 01 - Encryption - Key Service Not Configured
EE 02 - Encryption - Key Service Not Available
EE 10 - Encryption - Key Required
EE 20 - Encryption - Key Count Exceeded
EE 21 - Encryption - Key Alias Exceeded
EE 22 - Encryption - Key Reserved
EE 23 - Encryption - Key Conflict
EE 24 - Encryption - Key Method Change
EE 25 - Encryption - Key Format Not Supported
EE 26 - Encryption - Unauthorized Request - dAK
EE 27 - Encryption - Unauthorized Request - dSK
EE 28 - Encryption - Unauthorized Request - eAK
EE 29 - Encryption - Authentication Failure
EE 2A - Encryption - Invalid RDKi
EE 2B - Encryption - Key Incorrect
EE 2C - Encryption - Key Wrapping Failure
EE 2D - Encryption - Sequencing Failure
EE 2E - Encryption - Unsupported Type
EE 2F - Encryption - New Key Encrypted Write Pending
EE 30 - Encryption - Prohibited Request
EE 31 - Encryption - Key Unknown
EE 32 - Encryption - Keystore Related Problem
EE 42 - Encryption - EKM Challenge Pending
EE E2 - Encryption - Key Translation Disallowed
EE FF - Encryption - Security Prohibited Function
EF 01 - Encryption - Key Service Not Configured
26 11 - Encryption - Incomplete Key - Associate Data Set
26 12 - Encryption (T10) - Vendor Specific Reference Key Not Found
55 08 - Encryption (T10) - Maximum Number of Supplemental Keys Exceeded

226 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Table 51. LTO Tape Drive Sense Data (continued)
Bit Address or Name
Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
12-13 Sense Key 6 (Unit Attention)
EE 12 - Encryption - Key Change Detected
EE 18 - Encryption - Changed (Read)
EE 19 - Encryption - Changed (Write)
EE 40 - Encryption - EKM Identifier Changed
EE 41 - Encryption - EKM Challenge Changed
EE 50 - Encryption - Initiator Identifier Changed
EE 51 - Encryption - Initiator Response Changed
2A 11 - Encryption - Data Encryption Parameters Changed by Another I_T Nexus
2A 12 - Encryption - Data Encryption Parameters Changed by Vendor Specific Event

Sense Key 7 (Data Protect)

EF 10 - Encryption - Key Required
EF 11 - Encryption - Key Generation
EF 13 - Encryption - Key Translate
EF 1A - Encryption - Key Optional
EF C0 - Encryption - No Operation
26 10 - Encryption - Data Decryption Key Fail Limit
2A 13 - Encryption - Data Encryption Key Instance Counter Has Changed
74 00 - Security Error
74 01 - Encryption - Unable to Decrypt Data
74 02 - Encryption - Unencrypted Data Encountered While Decrypting
74 03 - Encryption - Incorrect Data Encryption Key
74 04 - Encryption - Cryptographic Integrity Validation Failed
74 05 - Encryption - Error Decrypting Data
14 FRU code
15 SKSV C/D Reserved BPV Bit pointer

When set to
1, the bit
pointer is
valid.
16 -17 SKSV = 0: First Error Fault Symptom Code (FSC).
SKSV = 1: Field Pointer
18-19 First Error Flag Data
20 Reserved (0)
21 CLN Reserved Reserved VolValid
22-28 Volume Label
29 Current Wrap
30-33 Relative LPOS
34 SCSI Address
35 Frame number Drive number

Appendix C. Sense Data 227

Table 51. LTO Tape Drive Sense Data (continued)
Bit Address or Name
Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
36-39 Port Identifier (Relative Target Port Address) Reporting Sense (This is the port address of the drive port
through which sense is being reported.

On Fibre Channel drives, it is the Fibre Channel Fabric Port Address [for example, 011E13 or 000026] with
byte 36 being reserved.

On SAS drives, it is the Hashed SAS Address of the drive port [for example, F32A94] with byte 36 being
reserved.

On SCSI, bytes 36 through 38 are reserved, and byte 39 is set to the port’s SCSI address [i.e., byte 39 =
byte 34].)
40 Tape Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Relative Tgt Port Reporting Sense
Directory
Valid 0: Reserved

1: Relative Tgt Port 1 (Port 0)

2: Relative Tgt Port 2 (Port 1)

3: Relative Tgt Port 3 (Library Port)

41 Host Command (SCSI Opcode)
42 Density Type

0: No media present

1: Gen1 (384 track) Media Type (Vendor Reserved)

2: Gen2 (512 track)

3: Gen3 (704 track)

43
Volume Label Cartridge Type
44
45-48 Logical Block Number

(Current LBA that would be reported in Read Position command)

49-52 Data set Number
53
1st Error FSC
54
55
1st Error Flag Data
56
57
2nd Error FSC
58
59
2nd Error Flag Data
60
61
Next-to-Last Error FSC
62
63
Next-to-Last Error Flag Data
64

228 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Table 51. LTO Tape Drive Sense Data (continued)
Bit Address or Name
Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
65
Last Error FSC
66
67
Last Error Flag Data
68
69 LPOS Region
70-85 ERP Summary Information
86-89 Product Revision Level: YMDV

(as defined in Standard Inquiry; this is also known as the Code Level)
90-95 Reserved (0)

The descriptions below serve only as an overview of sense reporting in the tape drive. This tape drive
conforms to all sense field reporting as specified in the SCSI standards.

Note:
1. The Error Code field (Byte 0) is set to 70h to indicate a current error, that is one associated with the
most recently received command. It is set to 71h to indicate a deferred error which is not associated
with the current command.
2. The segment number (Byte 1) is zero since the Copy, Compare, and Copy and Verify commands are
not supported.
3. The File Mark flag (Byte 2, bit 7) is set if a Space, Read, or Verify command did not complete
because a file mark was read.
4. The End of Media (EOM) flag (Byte 2, bit 6) is set if a Write or Write File Marks command
completed in the early warning area. Spacing into BOM also causes this flag to be set. It is also set
on an attempt to read or space past EOD, or if an attempt is made to space into Beginning of Media.
5. The Illegal Length Indicator (ILI) flag (Byte 2, bit 5) is set if a Read or Verify ended because a block
was read from tape that did not have the block length requested in the command.
6. The Information Bytes (Bytes 3-5) are only valid if the Valid flag is set. This occurs only for current
errors and not for deferred errors.
7. The Field Replaceable Unit field (Byte 14) is set to either zero or to a non-zero, vendor-specific code
indicating which part of the drive is suspected of causing the failure.
8. The Clean (CLN) flag (Byte 21, bit 3) is set if the drive needs cleaning and clear otherwise.
9. The Volume Label Fields Valid (VolValid) bit (Byte 21, bit 0) is set if the Volume Label being reported
is valid.
10. The Volume Label field (Bytes 22-28) reports the volume label if a cartridge is loaded in the drive
and Volume Label Fields Valid is set.
11. The Current Wrap field (Byte 29) reports the physical wrap of the tape. The least significant bit
reflects the current physical direction. A 0 means that the current direction is away from the physical
beginning of the tape. A 1 means that the current direction is towards the physical beginning of the
tape.
12. Relative LPOS fields (Bytes 30-33) reports the current physical position on the tape.
13. SCSI Address field (Byte 34) reports the SCSI Bus Address for the drive. Values returned range from
00h to 0Fh.
14. This field (Byte 35) contains the frame and drive number, passed across the RS-422 serial interface.

Appendix C. Sense Data 229

230 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Appendix D. Enabling LUN Support in Linux
To verify the detection of a tape drive, administrators should check for its entry in /proc/scsi/scsi.
Current versions of Linux may not scan the logical storage unit (LUN) ID of every device. This can result
in some TL2000/TL4000 devices not being identified or listed in the /proc/scsi/scsi output.
Administrators can follow these steps to enable support for such devices.
1. Type cat /proc/scsi/scsi. The output will look similar to the following:
Attached devices:
Host: scsi0 Channel: 00 Id: 01 Lun: 00
Vendor: IBM Model: ULT3580-HH3 Rev: 88M3
Type: Sequential-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 03
2. Identify the host adapter, channel number, target ID number, and LUN number for the first LUN of
the device to be configured. In this example, the IBM Model ULT3580 (a drive in the TL2000/TL4000)
is shown at the address, or nexus, 0 0 0 0 — which means host adapter 0, channel number 0, ID 1,
and LUN 0. The TL2000/TL4000 always has the tape drive at LUN 0 and the robot at LUN 1.
3. For each LUN that needs to be discovered by Linux, issue the following command: echo
"scsi-add-single-device H C I L">/proc/scsi/scsi H C I L refers to the nexus described in step 2.
So, with the TL2000/TL4000 robot configured at LUN 1, type: echo "scsi-add-single-device 0 0 1
0">/proc/scsi/scsi. The echo command will force a scan of each device at the given nexus.
4. Type cat /proc/scsi/scsi again to verify that all devices are now listed. The output will look similar
to the following:
Attached devices:
Host: scsi0 Channel: 00 Id: 01 Lun: 00
Vendor: IBM Model: ULT3580-HH3 Rev: 88M3
Type: Sequential-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 03
Attached devices:
Host: scsi0 Channel: 00 Id: 02 Lun: 01
Vendor: IBM Model: 3573-TL Rev: 7.10
Type: Medium Changer ANSI SCSI revision: 05

Administrators should add the echo command to the Linux boot scripts because the device
information is not persistent and must be created each time the system boots up. One example file
that can be used for storing the commands is /etc/rc.local. Note that configuring additional devices
on a server or a storage area network (SAN) can cause the devices to be reordered, which requires
administrators to modify the commands. If the Fibre Channel adapter supports Persistent Bindings or
an equivalent function, it can be enabled to reduce the chance of devices being reordered upon
discovery.

Note: This procedure must be run each time the server is booted. Also, if backup application services
are running (for example, they automatically start when the OS loads), they must be disabled and
re-enabled after the above procedure.
The other way to enable LUN support is to recompile the kernel and enable LUN scanning in the
Adaptec driver, but it requires advanced knowledge of Linux and will not be covered here. However,
it will allow the server to always boot and see the device without any manual procedures.

Red Hat Enterprise Linux

RHEL doesn't automatically probe all LUNs on SCSI devices. The symptom shows LUN 0, which would
be the drive, but not the loader.
1. Type #cat /proc/scsi/scsi.

231
 Attached devices:
Host: scsi0 Channel: 00 Id: 06 Lun: 00
Vendor: IBM Model: ULT3580-HH3 Rev: 88M3
Type: Sequential-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 03
2. You will need to add the following to /etc/modules.conf
options scsi_mod max_scsi_luns=255

Note: In RHEL 4, it is max_luns=255

3. Once that's added, you will have to rebuild the initrd and reboot the server. There is a way to test this
before editing the files and rebooting, but there's too much of a risk of taking down other SCSI
devices in the process. Rebuilding the initrd will be the tricky part. You have to know exactly which
kernel version you want to use to do this properly. You can find out the kernel version by using the
uname command.
#uname -r
2.4.9-e.38

Note: There is a list of known kernel versions on the Red Hat Enterprise Linux page.
4. So, given the version is 2.4.9-e.38
# cp /boot/initrd-2.4.9-e.38.img /boot/initrd-2.4.9-e.38.img.bak
# mkinitrd -f -v /boot/initrd-2.4.9-e.38.img 2.4.9-e.38

This should give some output, then go to a new prompt. If it gives any errors, check the syntax you
put into /etc/modules.conf or contact someone knowledgeable with Linux.
5. If successful, the server WILL need to be rebooted. Once it comes back up, check /proc/scsi/scsi
again.
#cat /proc/scsi/scsi
Attached devices:
Host: scsi0 Channel: 00 Id: 06 Lun: 00
Vendor: IBM Model: ULT3580-HH3 Rev: 88M3
Type: Sequential-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 03
Host: scsi0 Channel: 00 Id: 06 Lun: 01
Vendor: IBM Model: 3573-TL Rev: 7.10
Type: Medium Changer ANSI SCSI revision: 05

Enabling LUN Support in Netware

1. From the System Console, verify the LUN device is not being detected by using the list storage
adapters command. Typical output where only the tape drive is being recognized:
0x08 [V321-A3] Adaptec SCSI Card 39160/3960D - Ultra160 SCSI [slot 201]
0x15 [V321-A3-D5:0] IBM ULT3580-TD3 5BG2
0x09 [V321-A4] Adaptec SCSI Card 39160/3960D - Ultra160 SCSI [slot 202]
2. From the System Console, type nwconfig.
3. Select NCF files Options from the Configuration Options screen.
4. Select Edit STARTUP.NCF from the Available NCF Files Options screen.
5. Add the /LUNS switch to the load line of the appropriate SCSI driver. If a dual channel card is
installed and you are unsure which channel the LUN device is attached to, simply edit both lines.
LOAD ADPT160M.HAM SLOT=201 /LUNS
LOAD ADPT160M.HAM SLOT=202 /LUNS
6. After the STARTUP.NCF file has been edited, save the file and reboot the server to activate the new
STARTUP.NCF.
7. Upon reboot navigate to the System Console and type scan all. This will start a scan of all the LUNS
on each adapter.
8. When the scan is complete, verify the LUN device has been detected using the list storage adapters
command. Typical output with both the tape drive and loader being recognized:

232 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
0x08 [V321-A3] Adaptec SCSI Card 39160/3960D - Ultra160 SCSI [slot 201]
0x16 [V321-A3-D5:1] DELL PV-124T 0031
0x15 [V321-A3-D5:0] IBM ULT3580-TD3 5BG2
0x09 [V321-A4] Adaptec SCSI Card 39160/3960D - Ultra160 SCSI [slot 202]

Netware may display unbound device, meaning a driver is not bound to the loader unless a driver
from a backup software is loaded. This does not prevent the backup application from detecting the
LUN and binding the appropriate driver.

Note: The command scan all must be typed upon OS boot every time. If backup software services
automatically start on OS boot, you must disable them, run the scan all command, and re-enable the
services.

Appendix D. Enabling LUN Support in Linux 233

234 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Appendix E. Notes on IPv6 Compatibility with Windows
2003/XP and 2008/Vista
IPv6 addressing is different from traditional IPv4 addressing. IPv4 addressing is listed in the format
255.255.255.255, with each value 1 byte, a total address of 4 bytes. IPv6 addresses require 16 bytes, and
are listed in the format FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF, where there are 8 segments each 2
bytes long.

Windows 2003/XP

IPv6 support in Windows 2003 is not turned on by default. Use the following instructions to enable IPv6
support.
1. Go to Control Panel > Network Connections, and right-click on the Local Area Connection interface
that is to be enabled with IPv6 support.
2. Select Properties from the drop-down menu, and the Local Area Connection Properties window
should open. Click on the Install button.
3. In the new Select Network Component Type window, select Protocol and click on the Add button.
4. In the Select Network Protocol window, select Microsoft TCP/IP version 6 and click on the OK
button. IPv6 is now enabled.

Windows 2003 and XP comes with a WinINet API that does not fully support IPv6 literals. Upgrading to
Internet Explorer 7 in Windows 2003 is recommended for IPv6 browser support as the WinINet API is
updated with the installation of Internet Explorer 7. Third party browsers (such as Firefox) also use the
WinINet API either directly or indirectly, so an upgrade to IE7 will be recommended for all users.

As multiple IPv6 addresses can be associated with one physical interface, Windows 2003 and XP use an
interface number associated with each link-local IPv6 address that must be included for connectivity to
any link-local IPv6 address. The interface number then must be appended to any outgoing IPv6 traffic;
otherwise, the IPv6 packet does not know which logical interface to egress from.

The interface number can be determined through the command line of Windows.
1. Go to Start > Runand type cmd to enter the command prompt.
2. At the command prompt, type ipconfig and find the link-local IPv6 address. Appended to the end of
this will be a %x where x is the interface number.

Browser connectivity to a global unicast IPv6 address

v Global unicast IPv6 addresses can be browsed to by entering this syntax into the browser address line:
HYPERLINK "http://[%3cIPv6_Global_Unicast_Address%3e]/"http://
<[IPv6_Global_Unicast_Address>]/
v The IPv6 address must be enclosed in square brackets (“[]”).

Browser connectivity to a link-local IPv6 address

v The IPv6 address cannot be entered into a browser window in the same way an IPv4 address is when
connecting via a link-local IPv6 address.
v After upgrading the WinInet API (by upgrading to IE 7), the library RMU can be accessed from the
browser by using the following format.
– Replace all : with -.
– Append s<interface#>.ipv6-literal.net to the end of the IPv6 address.

235
 – For example, if the IPv6 address is fe80::1234:5678:abc and the interface number is 13, the address to
browse to would be http://fe80--1234-5678-abcs13.ipv6-literal.net.
v Using the same IPv6 address as above, another alternative to this would be to edit the hosts file in the
<Windows Base Directory\system32\drivers\etc\ directory and add the following line:
fe80::1234:5678:abc%13<hostname> .
– The address to browse to would be HYPERLINK "http://%3chostname%3e/"http://<hostname>
– Note that the interface number can change with a reboot of the Windows host.

Windows 2008/Vista

Windows 2008 and Vista natively support IPv6. Also, interface numbers have been removed from these
versions of Windows. All that is needed to browse to an address would be to add brackets ([]) around the
IPv6 address. Thus, if the TL2000/4000 IPv6 address is fe80::1234:5678:abc, enter http://
[fe80::1234:5678:abc] into the browser window. This is applicable for both link-local and global unicast
IPv6 addresses.

Notes on IPv6 Compatibility with Linux

1. While IPv6 is supported under Linux, IPv6 literals for link-local addresses are not currently supported
in Linux browsers, so the RMU will not be accessible in Linux via a link-local IPv6 address. Global
unicast IPv6 addresses are supported in the same manner as in Windows 2008/Vista browsers.
2. The RMU is accessible through IPv4.

236 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Appendix F. SNMP Status MIB Variables and Traps
Note: For additional information, refer to “SNMP Messaging” on page 7.
Table 52. SNMP Status Events
Event Trap ID Definition
Cold Start 0 Library has rebooted.
Status Change 1 Library status has changed.
Door Open 2 Library door has been opened.
Mail Slot Accessed 3 Library I/O Station has been
accessed.
Fault Posted 4 Library has posted a hard fault/error.
Request Drive Clean 5 Drive has requested a clean.
Drive Error 6 Drive has reported an error.
Loader Retries Excessive 7 Library has reported excessive load
retries.
Loader OK 8 Library has resumed normal
operations.
Account Password Change 9 Account password in the library has
changed.
Note: Trap ID 9 requires library firmware level 8.0 or greater, and the latest SNMP MIB file.
Configuration Change 10 Library or drive configuration has
changed.
Library Login 11 Someone has logged into the library
via the Web User Interface.
Library Logout 12 Someone has logged out of the
library via the Web User Interface.
Note: Trap IDs 10, 11, and 12 require library firmware level 9.00 or greater and the latest SNMP MIB file.

237
238 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Appendix G. Library Configuration Form
Use this form when planning your library configuration. Keep this document in a secure location and
update it when changes are made to the library configuration.

General Information
Library type TL2000 TL4000
Library Serial
Number
Library name
I/O Station Enabled Disabled
AutoClean Enabled Disabled
Library Network Settings
DHCP Enabled Disabled
IP Address
Netmask
Address
Gateway
Address
DNS Servers IP
Addresses
EKM Servers IP
Addresses
Encryption
Settings
Logical Libraries
Number in 1 2 3 4
library
Mode Random: ON/OFF Random: ON/OFF Random: ON/OFF Random: ON/OFF
Sequential: ON/OFF Sequential: ON/OFF Sequential: ON/OFF Sequential: ON/OFF
Autoload: ON/OFF Autoload: ON/OFF Autoload: ON/OFF Autoload: ON/OFF
Loop: ON/OFF Loop: ON/OFF Loop: ON/OFF Loop: ON/OFF
Magazine h Upper Left h Upper Left h Upper Left h Upper Left
Assignment h Lower Left h Lower Left h Lower Left h Lower Left
h Upper Right h Upper Right h Upper Right h Upper Right
h Lower Right h Lower Right h Lower Right h Lower Right
Number of
Active Slots
Drive Serial 4U Position 4: 4U Position 4: 4U Position 4: 4U Position 4:
Numbers 4U Position 3: 4U Position 3: 4U Position 3: 4U Position 3:
2U/4U Position 2: 2U/4U Position 2: 2U/4U Position 2: 2U/4U Position 2:
2U/4U Position 1: 2U/4U Position 1: 2U/4U Position 1: 2U/4U Position 1:

239
Drive types 4U Position 4: 4U Position 4: 4U Position 4: 4U Position 4:4U
4U Position 3: 4U Position 3: 4U Position 4: Position 3:2U/4U
2U/4U Position 2: 2U/4U Position 2: 4U Position 3: Position 2:2U/4U
2U/4U Position 1: 2U/4U Position 1: 2U/4U Position 2: Position 1:
2U/4U Position 1:4U
Position 3:
2U/4U Position 2:
2U/4U Position 1:
Fibre Channel Logical Library: Logical Library: Logical Library: Logical Library:
Drive settings Position: Position: Position: Position:
Speed: Speed: Speed: Speed:
Port type: Port type: Port type: Port type:
Loop ID: Loop ID: Loop ID: Loop ID:
SAS Drive Logical Library: Logical Library: Logical Library: Logical Library:
settings Position: Position: Position: Position:
ID: ID: ID: ID:
SCSI Drive Logical Library: Logical Library: Logical Library: Logical Library:
settings Position: Position: Position: Position:
ID: ID: ID: ID:
User Accounts
Role:
Password:
Role:
Password:
Role:
Password:
Role:
Password:

240 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Appendix H. Accessibility
Accessibility features help a user who has a physical disability, such as restricted mobility or limited
vision, to use the HTML version of the customer documentation successfully.

Features

The major accessibility features for the HTML version of this document are:
v You can use screen-reader software and a digital speech synthesizer to hear what is displayed on the
screen. The following screen readers are tested: WebKing and Window-Eyes.
v You can operate all features with the keyboard instead of the mouse.

Navigating by keyboard
You can use keys or key combinations to complete operations and initiate many menu actions that are
also done through mouse actions. You can navigate the HTML version of the Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape
Library and TL4000 Tape Library User's Guide help system from the keyboard with the following key
combinations:
v To traverse to the next link, button, or topic, press Tab inside a frame (page).
v To move to the previous topic, press ^ or Shift+Tab.
v To scroll all the way up or down, press Home or End.
v To print the current page or active frame, press Ctrl+P.
v To select, press Enter.

Accessing the publications

You can view the publications for this library in Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF) with the Adobe
Acrobat Reader. The PDFs are provided at the following website:

www.Dell.com/support.

241
242 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Glossary
This glossary defines the special terms, abbreviations, and acronyms that are used in this publication. If
you do not find the term that you are looking for, refer to the index or to the Dictionary of Computing,
1994.

Numbers
2:1 compression
The relationship between the quantity of data that can be stored with compression as compared
to the quantity of data that can be stored without compression. In 2:1 compression, twice as much
data can be stored with compression as can be stored without compression.

A
A Ampere.
ac Alternating current.
access method
A technique for moving data between main storage and input or output devices.
accessor
This component contains the library robot and bar code reader. The accessor moves cartridges to
and from the I/O Station, storage slots, and tape drives.
adapter card
A circuit board that adds function to a computer.
adj Adjustment.
AH Authentication Header. An Internet Protocol intended to guarantee connectionless integrity and
data origin authentication of IP datagrams. Further, it can optionally protect against replay attacks
by using the sliding window technique and discarding old packets.
alphanumeric
Pertaining to a character set that contains letters, numerals, and other characters, such as
punctuation marks.
alter To change.
ambient temperature
The temperature of air or other media in a designated area, particularly the area that is
surrounding equipment.
AME Application Managed Encryption.
ampere (A)
A unit of measure for electric current that is equivalent to a flow of 1 coulomb per second, or to
the current produced by 1 volt applied across a resistance of 1 ohm.
ANSI American National Standards Institute.
application-managed encryption
Tape encryption that is controlled by an application.
archive
To collect and store files in a designated place.
ASCII American National Standard Code for Information Interchange. A 7 bit coded character set (8 bits
including parity check) that consists of control characters and graphic characters.

243
assigning a device
The establishing of the relationship of a device to a running task, process, job, or program.
assignment
The naming of a specific device to perform a function.
asynchronous
Pertaining to two or more processes that do not depend upon the occurrence of specific events
such as common timing signals.
attention (notice)
A word for calling attention to the possibility of danger to a program, device, or system, or to
data. Contrast with caution and danger.
ATTN Attention.

B
backup
To make extra copies of documents or software for safekeeping.
bar code
A code that represents characters by sets of parallel bars of varying thickness and separation,
which are read optically by transverse scanning.
bar code label
Paper bearing a bar code and having an adhesive backing. The bar code label must be affixed to
a tape cartridge to enable the library to identify the cartridge and its volume serial number.
bar code reader
A laser device that is specialized for scanning and reading bar codes and converting them into
either the ASCII or EBCDIC digital character code.
bezel Decorative and safety cover.
bicolored
Having two colors.
bit Either of the digits 0 or 1 when used in the binary numbering system.
BOM or bill of materials
A list of specific types and amounts of direct materials that are expected to be used to produce a
specific job or quantity of output.
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP)
BGP is the core routing protocol of the Internet. It works by maintaining a table of IP networks or
'prefixes' that designate network reachability among autonomous systems (AS).
BRMS Backup Recovery and Media Services.
browser
A client program that initiates requests to a web server and displays the information that the
server returns.
buffer
A routine or storage that is used to compensate for a difference in rate of flow of data or time of
occurrence of events, when data is transferred from one device to another.
bus A facility for transferring data between several devices that are located between two end points,
only one device able to transmit at a specified moment.
byte A string that consists of some bits (usually 8) that are treated as a unit and represent a character.
A fundamental data unit.

244 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
C
CA certification
In cryptography, a certificate from a certificate authority (CA).
capacity
The amount of data that can be contained on storage media and expressed in bytes of data.
cartridge manual rewind tool
A device that can be fitted into the reel of a cartridge and used to rewind tape into or out of the
cartridge.
cartridge memory (CM)
Within each data cartridge, an embedded electronics and interface module that can store and
retrieve a cartridge's historical usage and other information.
cartridge storage slot
Individual slot that is located within a magazine that is used to house tape cartridges.
caution (notice)
A word to call attention to possible personal harm to people. Contrast with attention and danger.
centimeter (cm)
One one-hundredth of a meter (0.01 m). Approximately 0.39 inch.
channel command
An instruction that directs a data channel, control unit, or device to perform an operation or set
of operations.
char Character.
CHK Check.
cleaning cartridge
A tape cartridge that is used to clean the heads of a tape drive. Contrast with data cartridge.
COD Capacity On Demand.
command
A control signal that initiates an action or the start of a sequence of actions.
compact disc (CD)
A disc, usually 4.75 inches in diameter, from which data is read optically by using a laser.
compression
The process of eliminating gaps, empty fields, redundancies, and unnecessary data to shorten the
length of records or blocks.
concurrent
Refers to diagnostic procedures that can be run on one control unit while the rest of the
subsystem remains available for customer applications.
contingent connection
A connection between a channel path and a drive that is caused when a unit check occurs during
an I/O operation.
controller
A device that provides the interface between a system and one or more tape drives.
control path drive
controllerA device that provides the interface between a system and one or more tape
drives.control path drive A drive that communicates messages from the host computer to the
library in which the drive is installed.
cookie A packet of data that is exchanged between the library and a web browser to track configuration.

Glossary 245
CP Circuit protector.
CPF Control Path Failover.
CRU Customer Replaceable Unit.
CSA Canadian Standards Association.
ctrl Control.
CU Control unit.

D
danger (notice)
A word to call attention to possible lethal harm to people. Contrast with attention and caution.
data Any representations such as characters or analog quantities to which meaning is or might be
assigned.
data buffer
The storage buffer in the control unit. This buffer is used to increase the data transfer rate
between the control unit and the channel.
data cartridge
A tape cartridge that is dedicated to storing data. Contrast with cleaning cartridge.
data check
A synchronous or asynchronous indication of a condition that is caused by invalid data or
incorrect positioning of data.
dc Direct current.
DCS Designated Cleaning Slot.
degauss
To make a magnetic tape nonmagnetic by using electrical coils that carry currents that neutralize
the magnetism of the tape.
degausser
A device that makes magnetic tape nonmagnetic.
degradation
A decrease in quality of output or throughput or an increase in machine error rate.
degraded
Decreased in quality of output or throughput or increased machine error rate.
deserialize
To change from serial-by-bit to parallel-by-byte.
detented
A part that is held in position with a catch or lever.
device Any hardware component or peripheral device, such as a tape drive or tape library, that can
receive and send data.
device driver
A file that contains the code that is needed to use an attached device.
DHCPv6
The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6. Although IPv6's stateless address
autoconfiguration removes the primary motivation for DHCP in IPv4, DHCPv6 can still be used
to statefully assign addresses if the network administrator wants more control over addressing.
DH group
Diffie-Hellman group.

246 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
DIAG
Diagnostic section of maintenance information manual.
differential
See High Voltage Differential (HVD).
direct access storage
A storage device in which the access time is independent of the location of the data.
display contrast
The brightness of the display on the Operator Panel.
DLL Dynamic Link Library. The Microsoft implementation of the shared library concept. These
libraries usually have the file extension dll, ocs (for libraries that contain activeX controls, or drv
(for legacy system drivers).
DNS Directory Name System. This allows the library to recognize text-based addresses instead of
numeric IP addresses.
download
To transfer programs or data from a computer to a connected device, typically a personal
computer.
To transfer data from a computer to a connected device, such as a workstation or personal
computer.
DPF Data Path Failover.
DRAM
Dynamic random-access memory.
drive, magnetic tape
A mechanism for moving magnetic tape and controlling its movement.
Drive Not Configured
This message occurs during the first boot after a factory settings restore is run. This message is
not a real issue since it takes time for the library to configure.
DRV Drive.
DSA key
Encryption key type.
DSE Data security erase.
DSP Digital signal processor.

E
EBCDIC
Extended binary-coded decimal interchange code.
EC Edge connector. Engineering change.
ECC Error correction code.
EEB Ethernet Expansion Blade
EEPROM
Electrically erasable programmable read-only memory.
EIA Electronics Industries Association.
EIA unit
A unit of measure, which is established by the Electronic Industries Association, equal to 44.45
millimeters (1.75 inches).

Glossary 247
eject To remove or force out from within.
EKM Encryption Key Manager.
electronic mail
Correspondence in the form of messages that are transmitted between user terminals over a
computer network.
email See electronic mail.
encryption
A method of storing data in a format that helps protect data from inadvertent or deliberate
compromise. An encryption-enabled drive contains the necessary hardware and firmware to
encrypt and decrypt host tape application data. Encryption policy and encryption keys are
provided by the host application or host server.
encryption key manager (EKM)
A software program that assists encrypting tape drives in generating, protecting, storing, and
maintaining encryption keys that encrypt information that is written to and decrypt information
that is read from tape media.
entitlement
Entitlement is the official right to receive service and support for your tape library.
EPO Emergency power off.
EPROM
Erasable programmable read only memory.
EQC Equipment check.
equipment check
An asynchronous indication of a malfunction.
Error log
A data set or file in a product or system where error information is stored for later access.
ESD Electrostatic discharge.
ESP Encapsulating Security Payload. An Internet Protocol that provides origin authenticity, integrity,
and confidentiality protection of a packet. ESP also supports encryption-only and
authentication-only configurations, but encryption without authentication is discouraged because
it is insecure.

F
fault symptom code (FSC)
A hexadecimal code that is generated by the drive or the control unit microcode in response to a
detected subsystem error.
FC Feature code.
FCC Federal communications commission.
FH Full height.
fiducial
A target that is used for teaching a physical location to a robot.
field replaceable unit (FRU)
An assembly that is replaced in its entirety when any one of its components fails.
file A named set of records that are stored or processed as a unit. Also referred to as a data set.

248 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
file protection
The processes and procedures that are established in an information system that are designed to
inhibit unauthorized access to, contamination of, or deletion of a file.
file transfer protocol (FTP)
In the Internet suite of protocols, an application layer protocol that uses TCP and Telnet services
to transfer bulk-data files between machines or hosts.
firmware
Proprietary code that is delivered as microcode as part of an operating system. Firmware is more
efficient than software loaded from an alterable medium and more adaptable to change than pure
hardware circuitry. An example of firmware is the Basic input/output system (BIOS) in read-only
memory (ROM) on a PC system board.
FLASH EEPROM
An electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM) that can be updated.
FMR Field microcode replacement.
format
The arrangement or layout of data on a data medium.
formatter
Part of a magnetic tape subsystem that performs data conversion, speed matching, encoding, first
level error recovery, and interfaces to one or more tape drives.
FP File protect.
frayed Damaged as if by an abrasive substance.
FRU Field replaceable unit.
FSC Fault symptom code.
FSI Fault symptom index.
FTSS Field Technical Sales Support.
functional microcode
Microcode that is resident in the machine during normal customer operation.

G
g Gram.
GB gigabyte.
GBIC Gigabit Interface Converter.
Gbs gigabits/second
Gbi gigabit
gigabit (Gbit)
1 000 000 000 bits.
gigabyte (GB)
1 000 000 000 bytes.
Gigabit Interface Converter (GBIC)
Converts copper interface to optic interface.
gnd Ground.

H
HBA Host Bus Adapter.

Glossary 249
HD Slot Technology
High-density (HD) slot technology. Allows multiple cartridges to be stored in a tiered
architecture.
hertz (Hz)
Unit of frequency. 1 hertz equals one cycle per second.
hex Hexadecimal.
HH Half height
High Voltage Differential (HVD)
A logic signaling system that enables data communication between a supported host and the
library. HVD signaling uses a paired plus and minus signal level to reduce the effects of noise on
the SCSI bus. Any noise that is injected into the signal is present in both a plus and minus state,
and is canceled. Synonymous with differential.
HVD SCSI Bus High Voltage Differential
Hz Hertz (cycles per second).

I
IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager (SKLM)
IBM's EKM application that assists encrypting tape drives in generating, protecting, storing, and
maintaining encryption keys that encrypt information that is written to and decrypt information
that is read from tape media.
ID Identifier.
identifier (ID)
(1) In programming languages, a lexical unit that names a language object; for example, the
names of variables, arrays, records, labels, or procedures. An identifier usually consists of a letter
optionally followed by letters, digits, or other characters. (2) One or more characters that are used
to identify or name data element and possibly to indicate certain properties of that data element.
(3) A sequence of bits or characters that identifies a program, device, or system to another
program, device, or system.
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission.
IML Initial microprogram load.
incompatible magazine
This message might display on the Operator Panel during library initialization. It occurs during
factory restore or VPD. This message is not a real issue since it takes time for the library to
configure.
initial microprogram load (IML)
The action of loading a microprogram from an external storage to writable control storage.
initiator
The component that runs a command. The initiator can be the host system or the tape control
unit.
INST Installation.
interface
A shared boundary. An interface might be a hardware component to link two devices or it might
be a portion of storage or registers accessed by two or more computer programs.
Internet Protocol Version 4 (IPv4)
See IPv4.
Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6)
See IPv6.

250 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
intervention required
Manual action is needed.
INTRO
Introduction.
I/O Input/output.
I/O Station
Cartridge location that is dedicated for the insertion of cartridges into and the removal of
cartridges from the library.
IOP Input/output processor.
IP Internet Protocol.
IP address
An identifier for a computer or device on an Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) network. Networks that
use the TCP/IP protocol route messages that are based on the IP address of the destination. See
IPv4 and IPv6.
IPL Initial program load.
IP Stack
A TCP/IP protocol stack that manages static IP addresses.
IPv4 A network layer protocol for packet-switched networks. IPv4 supports 232 (about 4.3 billion)
addresses.
IPv6 A network layer protocol for packet-switched networks. It is the designated successor of IPv4 for
general use on the Internet. The main improvement that is brought by IPv6 is the increase in the
number of addresses available for networked devices, allowing, for example, each mobile phone
and mobile electronic device to have its own unique address.
ISV Independent software vendor.
ITDT IBM Tape Diagnostic tool.
ITST Idle-time self-test.

K
Kerberos
Kerberos Authentication is a standard (RFC 1510) third-party authentication protocol that
provides end-to-end security for distributed computing environments.
kilogram (kg)
1000 grams (approximately 2.2 pounds).
km kilometer. 1000 Meters, Approximately 5/8 mile.

L
LAN Local area network. A computer network within a limited area.
LCB Library Control Blade
LCD See liquid crystal display.
LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol. This allows the library to use login and password
information that is stored on a server to grant access to the library functionality.
LDAPS
Secure LDAP over SSL.
LDI Library Drive Interface.

Glossary 251
LED Light-emitting diode.
library certification
In cryptography, a certificate that is provided by the library.
library-managed encryption
Tape encryption that is controlled by the tape library.
Linear Tape-Open (LTO)
A type of tape storage technology that is developed by the IBM Corporation, Hewlett-Packard,
and Quantum. LTO technology is an "open format" technology, which means that its users have
multiple sources of product and media. The "open" nature of LTO technology enables
compatibility between different vendors' offerings by ensuring that vendors comply with
verification standards. The LTO technology is implemented in two formats: the Accelis format
focuses on fast access; the Ultrium format focuses on high capacity. The Ultrium format is the
preferred format when capacity (rather than fast access) is the key storage consideration. The
latest LTO cartridge, Ultrium 8, has a compressed data capacity of up to 30000 GB (2.5:1
compression) and a native data capacity of up to 12000 GB.
liquid crystal display (LCD)
A low-power display technology that is used in computers and other I/O devices.
loadable
The ability to be loaded.
LME Library Managed Encryption.
LTO cartridge memory (LTO-CM)
Within each LTO Ultrium data cartridge, an embedded electronics and interface module that can
store and retrieve a cartridge's historical usage and other information.
LUN Logical Unit Number.
LVD SCSI Bus Low Voltage Differential

M
MAC address
The Media Access Control address of a computer networking device.
magnetic tape
A tape with a magnetic surface layer on which data can be stored by magnetic recording.
MAP Maintenance analysis procedure.
mask A pattern of characters that controls the retention or elimination of portions of another pattern of
characters. To use a pattern of characters to control the retention or elimination of portions of
another pattern of characters.
master file
A file that is used as an authority in a job and that is relatively permanent, even though its
contents might change. Synonymous with main file.
Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU)
The size of the largest packet that a network protocol can transmit.
MB Megabyte (expressed as data rate in MB/s or MB/second).
media capacity
The amount of data that can be contained on a storage medium, expressed in bytes of data.
media-type identifier
Pertaining to the bar code on the bar code label of the Ultrium tape cartridge, a 2-character code,

252 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 L1, that represents information about the cartridge. L identifies the cartridge as one that can be
read by devices that incorporate LTO technology; 1 indicates that it is the first generation of its
type.
mega One million of.
meter In the Metric System, the basic unit of length; equal to approximately 39.37 inches.
MIB Management Information Base. Information repository that is used by SNMP.
micro One millionth of.
microcode
(1) One or more micro instructions. (2) A code, representing the instructions of an instruction set,
which is implemented in a part of storage that is not program-addressable. (3) To design, write,
and test one or more micro instructions. (4) See also microprogram.
microdiagnostic routine
A program that runs under the control of a supervisor, usually to identify field replaceable units.
microdiagnostic utility
A program that is run by the customer engineer to test the machine.
microinstruction
A basic or elementary machine instruction.
microprogram
A group of microinstructions that when run performs a planned function.
The term microprogram represents a dynamic arrangement or selection of one or more groups of
microinstructions for execution to perform a particular function. The term microcode represents
microinstructions that are used in a product as an alternative to hard-wired circuitry to
implement certain functions of a processor or other system component.
MIM Media information message.
mm Millimeter.
modifier
That which changes the meaning.
mount a device
To assign an I/O device with a request to the operator.
MP Microprocessor.
ms Millisecond.
MSG Message.
multipath
Pertaining to using more than one path.

N
N/A Not applicable.
Network Address Translation (NAT)
NAT involves rewriting the source or destination addresses of IP packets as they pass through a
router or firewall. Most systems that use NAT do so to enable multiple hosts on a private
network to access the Internet over a single public IP address.
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
node In a network, a point at which one or more functional units connect channels or data circuits.

Glossary 253
NTP Network Time Protocol. This protocol allows the library to set its internal date and time that is
based on the date and time of a server.
NVS Nonvolatile storage. A storage device whose contents are not lost when power is cut off.

O
oersted
The unit of magnetic field strength in the unrationalized centimeter-gram-second (cgs)
electromagnetic system. The oersted is the magnetic field strength in the interior of an elongated,
uniformly wound solenoid that is excited with a linear current density in its winding of`1
abampere per 4π centimeters of axial length.
offline
Pertaining to the operation of a functional unit without the continual control of a computer.
Contrast with online.
online Pertaining to the operation of a functional unit that is under the continual control of a computer.
Contrast with offline.
OPER Operation.
ov Over voltage.
overrun
Loss of data because a receiving device is unable to accept data at the rate it is transmitted.
overtightening
To tighten too much.

P
parameter
A variable that is given a constant value for a specified application and that might denote the
application.
p bit Parity bit.
PC Parity check.
PCC Power control compartment.
PDF Portable Document Format.
PE Parity error. Product engineer.
PFS Perfect forward secrecy.
pick Pertaining to the library, to remove, by using a robotic device, a tape cartridge from a storage slot
or drive.
picker A robotic mechanism that is located inside the library that moves cartridges between the cartridge
storage slots and the drive.
PM Preventive maintenance.
POR Power-on reset.
port A physical connection for communication between the 3590 and the host processor. The 3590 has
2 SCSI ports.
Portable Document Format (PDF)
A standard that is specified by Adobe Systems, Incorporated, for the electronic distribution of
documents. PDF files are compact, can be distributed globally (by way of email, the web,
intranets, or CD-ROM), and can be viewed with the Acrobat Reader, which is software from
Adobe Systems that can be downloaded at no cost from the Adobe Systems home page.

254 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Private key
A cryptographic key that is used to decrypt a message.
PROM
Programmable read only memory.
PS Power supply.
PTF Program temporary fix. A single bugfix or group of bugfixes that are distributed in a form ready
to install for customers.
PWR Power.

R
rack A unit that houses the components of a storage subsystem, such as the library.
rackmount kit
A packaged collection of articles that are used to install the rack mounted version of the library.
RAM Random access memory.
Random access memory
A storage device into which data is entered and from which data is retrieved in a nonsequential
manner.
RAS Reliability, availability, and serviceability.
record A collection of related data or words, which are treated as a unit.
recording density
The number of bits in a single linear track measured per unit of length of the recording medium.
recoverable error
An error condition that allows continued execution of a program.
ref Reference.
reg Register.
reinventory
To inventory again.
retension
The process or function of tightening the tape onto the cartridge, if it is sensed that the tape has a
loose wrap on the cartridge.
RFC (Request for Comments)
Request for Comments (RFC) documents are a series of memoranda, which encompasses new
research, innovations, and methodologies applicable to Internet technologies.
RH Relative humidity.
RML Rack Mount Line.
robot Picker.
robotics
Picker assembly.
root CA certification
In cryptography, a root certificate from a certificate authority (CA).
RPQ Request for price quotation.
RSA key
Encryption key type.

Glossary 255
R/W read/write.

S
s Seconds of time.
SAN Storage area network.
SAS Serial Attached SCSI. A computer bus technology and serial communication protocol for direct
attached storage devices. SAS is a replacement for parallel SCSI with higher speeds, but still
utilizing SCSI commands.
scratch cartridge
A data cartridge that contains no useful data, but can be written to with new data.
SCD Single Character Display.
SCSI Small computer system interface.
SE Single-ended.
segment
A part.
sel Select.
Serial Attached SCSI (SAS)
A drive with a SAS interface can be linked directly to controllers. SAS is a performance
improvement over traditional SCSI because SAS enables multiple devices (up to 128) of different
sizes and types to be connected simultaneously with thinner and longer cables. It supports
full-duplex signal transmission up to 3 Gb/s. In addition, SAS drives can be hot-plugged.
serialize
To change from parallel-by-byte to serial-by-bit.
serializer
A device that converts a space distribution of simultaneous states, which represents data into a
corresponding time sequence of states.
Service tag
Repair identification tag.
servo, servos
An adjective for use in qualifying some part or aspect of a servomechanism.
servomechanism
A feedback control system in which at least one of the system signals represents mechanical
motion.
signature
A digital signature that is used in cryptography to identify one party to ensure authenticity.
SKLM (IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager)
IBM's EKM application that assists encrypting tape drives in generating, protecting, storing, and
maintaining encryption keys that encrypt information that is written to and decrypt information
that is read from tape media.
slot blocker
A slot blocker is used to restrict/close off a data cell so a data cartridge cannot be inserted.
Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI)
A standard that is used by computer manufacturers for attaching peripheral devices (such as tape
drives, hard disks, CD-ROM players, printers, and scanners) to computers (servers). Pronounced
“scuzzy”. Variations of the SCSI interface provide for faster data transmission rates than standard
serial and parallel ports (up to 320 megabytes per second). The variations include:

256 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
 v Fast/Wide SCSI: Uses a 16-bit bus, and supports data rates of up to 20 MBps.
v SCSI-1: Uses an 8-bit bus, and supports data rates of 4 MBps.
v SCSI-2: Same as SCSI-1, but uses a 50-pin connector instead of a 25-pin connector, and supports
multiple devices.
v Ultra SCSI: Uses an 8- or 16-bit bus, and supports data rates of 20 or 40 MBps.
v Ultra2 SCSI: Uses an 8- or 16-bit bus and supports data rates of 40 or 80 MBps.
v Ultra3 SCSI: Uses a 16-bit bus and supports data rates of 80 or 160 MBps.
v Ultra160 SCSI: Uses a 16-bit bus and supports data rates of 80 or 160 MBps.
v Ultra320 SCSI: Uses a 16-bit bus and supports data rates of 320 MBps.
SME System Managed Encryption.
SMI-S See Storage Management Initiative Specification (SMI-S).
SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. SMTP is a standard for email transmissions across the internet.
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol. SNMP is used by network management systems to
monitor network-attached devices for conditions that warrant administrative attention.
SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol. Used to synchronize the clocks of network-attached devices.
SMW Servo Manufacturer's Word.
SNS Sense.
special feature
A feature that can be ordered to enhance the capability, storage capacity, or performance of a
product, but is not essential for its basic work.
SPI Security Parameters Index.
SR Service representative, see also CE.
SRAM
Static random access memory.
SS Status store.
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)
A set of cryptographic protocols for secure communications on the Internet for such things as
web browsing, email, Internet faxing, instant messaging, and other data transfer. SSL allows
applications to communicate across a network in a way that is designed to prevent
eavesdropping, tampering, and message forgery.
SSP Serial SCSI Protocol.
ST Store.
standard feature
The significant design elements of a product that are included as part of the fundamental
product.
START
Start maintenance.
StartTLS
Secure LDAP communication that uses TLS.
Storage Management Initiative Specification (SMI-S)
A storage standard that is developed and maintained by the Storage Networking Industry
Association (SNIA). It is also ratified as an ISO standard. The main objective of SMI-S is to enable
broad interoperable management of heterogeneous storage vendor systems.

Glossary 257
subsystem
A secondary or subordinate system, capable of operating independently of, or asynchronously
with, a controlling system.
SUPP Support.
sync Synchronous, synchronize. Occurring with a regular or predictable time relationship.
System-managed encryption
Tape encryption is set up implicitly through the device driver.

T
tachometer, tach
A device that emits pulses that are used to measure/check speed or distance.
tape cartridge
A container that holds magnetic tape, that can be processed without separating it from the
container.
tape void
An area in the tape in which no signal can be detected.
TCP/IP
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol.
TCU Tape control unit.
TH Thermal.
thread/load operation
A procedure that places tape along the tape path.
TM Tapemark.
transport mode
End-to-end communications security in which the end-point computers do the security
processing.
trusted certification
In cryptography, a trustworthy certificate that is not registered with a certificate authority.
tunnel mode
Port-to-port communications security in which security is provided to several machines by a
single node.

U
UART Universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter.
UL Underwriter's Laboratories.
unload
Prepare the tape cartridge for removal from the drive.
utilities
Utility programs.
utility programs
A computer program in general support of the processes of a computer; for instance, a diagnostic
program.
uv Under voltage.

258 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
V
VOLSER
Volume serial number.
volume
A certain portion of data, together with its data carrier, that can be handled conveniently as a
unit.
VPD Vital product data. The information that is contained within the tape drive that requires
nonvolatile storage that is used by functional areas of the drive, and information that is required
for manufacturing, RAS, and engineering.

W
word A character string that is convenient for some purpose to consider as an entity.
World Wide Node Name (WWNN)
A unique character string which identifies Fibre Channel Host Bus adapters (HBA).
WORM
Write Once Read Many.
Write Write command.
WT World trade.
WWCID
Worldwide Cartridge Identifier.
WWN Worldwide Name.
WWNN
Worldwide Node Name.
WWPN
Worldwide port name.

X
XR External register.
XRA External register address register.

Glossary 259
260 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Index
A control path failover 26, 118
control paths 96
feature activation key 118
features
Access PIN, Operator Control Panel 98 multiple 26 optional
accessibility using multiple for control path drives 9
keyboard 241 failover 26 Fibre Channel 30
repeat rate of up and down Fibre Channel interface
buttons 241 cables and speeds 33
shortcut keys 241
accessor 5 D sharing on a SAN 34
zoning 33
accessory package 36 daisy-chaining 32
Fibre Channel ports 33
active slots 94, 116 Data Cartridge 135
Firmware
Active Slots 57 data transfer rate 8
updating
air quality 35 DCS 136
using ITDT Tool 177
air vents, front panel 1 dedicated cleaning slot 204
firmware, upgrade 134
AME 118 default settings 99
foot pads, installing 37
Application Managed Encryption description 1
front panel components 1
(AME) 60 desktop installation 35
ASC 215 Device drivers supported 15
ASCQ 215 DHCP 54, 62, 97, 122
auto clean 94, 116 Diagnostics 132 G
Auto Clean 57 display contrast 104 Gateway address 54
dll 69, 159 Gateway Address 62, 97, 122
Drive glossary 243
B channel calibration 10
power management 11
Bar Code Labels 142
guidelines for using 144
speed matching 10
drive configuration 120
H
bar code reader 5 Host Attachment 159
Drive Density 110
bootcode firmware, current level 106 host bus adapter 30
Drive Diagnostics 104, 132
BOP 110 host connection, verifying 69
drive dump, saving to host 131
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) 7 host interface cable 50
drive firmware, current version 107
host interface connectors 3
drive interface 96
host interfaces 30
Drive Log 131
C drive serial number 107
host preparation 69
humidity 35
cable, host interface 50 drive sled
Cartridge 11, 139 description 9
capacity scaling 139 drive status 110
cleaning 142 drive, clean 129 I
compatibility 141 I/O station 69
data 139 I/O Station 1, 135
proper handling 145 E I/O Station, configuring 136
I/O Station, open and close 136
specifications 147 EC 88
Write-Protect Switch 144 identifying a suspect cartridge 1, 18
ED 88
cartridge magazines 1, 69 Import Media 73, 91, 114, 135
element addresses 26, 204, 205
Cartridge, environment 146 installation 35
element addressing 203
cartridge, suspect 18 rack
element types 203
cartridges safety xviii
Encryption 6, 60
inserting in library 73 Interface 159
environment 15
populating library 73 interfaces 30
operating 15
Cartridges, insert and remove 135 interfaces, supported 9
particulates 15
channel calibration 10 Internet Protocol version 4 7
environmental specifications 12
choosing a location 35 Internet Protocol version 6 7
Error codes 161
clean drive 129 Inventory 88, 115
Error LEDs 155
cleaning slot 136 IP address 54, 106
Error log 161
clearance 35 IP Address 62, 97, 122
Ethernet Port 3
Configure menu IP Stack 97
Export Media 73, 91, 114, 135, 175
network settings 54 IPv4 7
configuring library using Web User IPv6 7
Interface 53 ITDT Tool 177
configuring the library 53 F
control keys 81 factory default settings 99
control path drive 107, 120 fan vents 3

261
K N S
Key Path 110 Navigation 81 safety information
Key Path Diagnostics 133 Netmask 54 laser compliance xviii
keyboard 241 Network Address Translation (NAT) 7 laser safety xviii
network configuration 97 SAS interface 32
Network Mask 62, 97, 122 screens displayed at power ON 18
L network settings 97 SCSI interface 30
bus termination 32
Labels
description 9
bar code 142
guidelines for using 144 O multiple buses 32
physical characteristics 31
laser OCP 68
SCSI LVD 30, 32
compliance xviii ON/OFF power button 20
SCSI Trade Association Web site 32
safety xviii operation specifications 12
sending your comments v
LED, amber 160 Operator Control Panel
Sense data
LEDs 18, 155 Access PIN 98
using 215
LEDs, front panel 1 Configure: Save/Restore 99
sense data, library 215
library configuration form 239 control keys on front panel 1
sequential mode, starting 94
library firmware, current level 106 display 1
sequential mode, stopping 94
library logs 130 menu tree 83
serial number 106
library mode 57, 94, 106, 116 Monitor menu
serial number, drive 107
library name 116 Drive 86
Serial Port 3
library network configuration 62, 122 Library 84
server attachment
library recovery 155 power ON display 18
SCSI interface 30
library SNMP configuration 66, 127 Operator Control Panel menus
Sharing the library 25
library status 109 Configure: Drive 96
shipment verification 36
Library Verify 102 Configure: Library 94
shipping container 36
library weight 12 Ordering Media
shipping label, removing and storing 38
license activation key 59, 60, 102 Ordering WORM cartridges 141
shipping lock and label storage
Link-local IPv6 address 84
location 3
Linux 231
shipping lock. removing and storing 38
LME 118
locating the library 35
P shortcut keys 241
packaging materials 36 Simple Network Management
logical libraries 58, 92, 117
partitioning 26, 58, 205 Protocol 7
determining number 25
partitioning your 4U library 117 SKLM 60, 118
basic guidelines 25
path failover 59, 102 SKLM (Security Key Lifecycle
using multiple for sharing 25
physical specifications 12 Manager) 6
logical libraries, assigning 58
power button 1, 20 SKLM Server Setting 60
logs 130
power connector 3 sled, description of tape drive 9
low voltage differential (LVD) SCSI
power management 11 slot physical locations 204
interface 9
power ON display 18 SME 118
low-power mode 11
power source 35 SNMP 7, 66, 122, 127, 209, 237
LUN 30, 231
power specifications 12 specifications 12
LUN scanning 30
Power Supply Problem 155 environmental 12
LVD SCSI interface 9
product ID 106 operation 12
PTF 69, 159 physical 12
power 12
M Specifications
MAC Address 7
magazines 1, 69
Q cartridges 147
speed matching 10
Quiesce 133
Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) 7 SSL 62, 122
media 11 storage capacity 8
Media 139 support notification v
media capacity 1 R
menu shortcuts 75 rack installation 35, 40
menu tree
Operator Control Panel 83
safety xviii
rack mounting the library 40
T
tape cartridge 11
Menus rack requirements 35
tape drive sled 3
Configure RAID controllers 30
Tape drives
network settings 54 Read/Write capability 141
channel calibration 10
MIB 7, 209 rear panel of library 3
power management 11
Monitor menu Remove/replace procedures 179
quantity in library 9
Drive 86 reserve slot, active slot 136
speed matching 10
Library 84 Reserved Slots 57
TapeAlert Flags
Move Media 73, 91, 114 RFC (Request for Comments) 7
for drives 211
Multiple control paths 26 Router assigned IPv6 address 84
TapeAlert Flags, library 209

262 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
technical support v
Telnet Service Port 105
Traps 237
troubleshooting 149

U
Ultra160 8
Ultra320 8
Ultrium Tape Drives 9
unpacking the library 36
Updating firmware
using ITDT Tool 177
upgrade firmware 134
USB port 3

V
verifying the shipment 36
View Drive Logs 131

W
Web User Interface
Configure Library: Event
Notification 126
Configure Library: Save/Restore 128
configuring library 53
drive information 61
event notification 66
general library information 57
logging on 55
logs and traces 65
user access information 64
Web User Interface menus
Configure Library: User Access 123
Web User InterfaceConfigure Library
date and time 65
worldwide node name 106
WORM 141
WORM (Write Once, Read Many) 141
Write Once, Read Many (see
WORM) 141
write-protect switch
Write Protect Switch Setting 211
Write-Protect Switch
setting 144
WWNN 106

Index 263
264 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library: User's Guide
Printed in USA